High Wall Inverter R410A
CHAPTER 2
High Wall Inverter
R410A
EVHC 09 to 24 DS
Installation Instructions
Service manual
Exploded view
by johnson controls
73
74
EVJC 09, 12, 18, 24 DSAAAR
by johnson controls
Ref: 40343-1109M
E
Condensadoras bomba de calor con tecnología Inverter
Instrucciones de Instalación ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
GB
Heat pump condensing units with Inverter technology
Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................................. 7 - 9
F
Unités de condensation réversibles à technologie Inverter
Instructions d’installation .......................................................................................................................... 10 - 12
P
Condensadoras de bomba de calor com tecnologia Inverter
Instruções de Instalação........................................................................................................................... 13 - 15
I
Unità esterna pompa di calore con tecnologia Inverter
Istruzioni per l’installazione....................................................................................................................... 16 - 18
D
Verflüssiger Wärmepumpe mit Inverter-Technik
Hinweise zum Einbau ............................................................................................................................... 19 - 21
NL
Condensingunits warmtepomp met Inverter technologie
Installatie-instructies ................................................................................................................................. 22 - 24
N
Kondensatorer vermepumpe med Inverter-teknologi
Instruksjoner for innstallering.................................................................................................................... 25 - 27
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. participa en el Programa de Certificación EUROVENT.
Los productos se corresponden con los relacionados en el Directorio EUROVENT de Productos
Certificados, en el programa AC1, AC2, AC3, LCP y FC.
El LCP, abarca plantas enfriadoras condensadas por aire y bombas de calor hasta 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. partecipa al Programma di Certificazione EUROVENT.
I prodotti interessati figurano nell’Annuario EUROVENT dei Prodotti Certificati, nel programma AC1,
AC2, AC3, LCP e FC.
Il programma LCP è valido per refrigeratori d’acqua raffreddati ad aria e pompe di calore sino a 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. is participating in the EUROVENT Certification Programme.
Products are as listed in the EUROVENT Directory of Certified Products, in the program AC1, AC2,
AC3, LCP and FC.
The LCP program covers air condensed water chillers and heat pumps of up to 600 kW
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. ist am Zertifikationsprogramm EUROVENT beteiligt.
Die entsprechend gekennzeichneten Produkte sind im EUROVENT-Jahrbuch im Programm AC1, AC2,
AC3, LCP und FC. enthalten.
Das LCP- Programm umfasst luftgekühlte Kühlanlagen und Wärmepumpe bis 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. participe au Programme de Certification EUROVENT.
Les produits figurent dans l’Annuaire EUROVENT des Produits Certifiés, dans le programme AC1,
AC2, AC3, LCP et FC.
Le programme LCP recouvre les groupes refroidisseurs de liquides froid seul et réversible, à
condensation par air jusqu’à 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. neemt deel aan het EUROVENT-certificatieprogramma.
De produkten zijn opgenomen in het EUROVENT-jaarboek van de gecertificeerde produkten, in de
programma AC1, AC2, AC3, LCP en FC.
Het LCP programma omvat door lucht gecondenseerde koelaggregaten en warmtepompen tot
600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. participa no Programa de Certificação EUROVENT.
Os produtos correspondem aos referidos no Directório EUROVENT de Produtos Certificados, no
programa AC1, AC2, AC3, LCP e FC.
O programa LCP abrange instalações arrefecedoras condensadas por ar e bombas de calor até
600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. deltar i EUROVENT sertifiseringsprogram.
Produktene er oppført i EUROVENT’s katalog over sertifiserte produkt, i kategoriene AC1, AC2, AC3,
LCP og FC.
LCP-programmet omfatter luftkondenserte kjøleanlegg og varmepumper opptil 600 kW..
75
by johnson controls
Fig.1
Fig.2
OK
Fig.5
Fig.3
1
2
3
Fig.4
Lo
Hi
4
8 mm
8 mm
5
2
76
1
Unidad interior
Indoor unit
Unité intérieure
Unidade interior
Unità interna
Innengerät
Binnenunit
Innvendig enhet
3
Manometros
Pressure gauges
Manomètres
Manómetros
Manometri
Manometer
Manometers
Trykkmålere
2
Unidad exterior
Outdoor unit
Unité extérieure
Unidade exterior
Unità esterna
Außengerät
Buitenunit
Utvendig enhet
4
Analizador de servicio
Service analyser
Analyseur de service
Analisador de serviço
Analizzatore di servizio
Manometerbatterie
Service-analysator
Serviceanalysator
5
Bomba de vacio
Vacuum pump
Pompe à vide
Bomba de vácuo
Pompa a vuoto
Vakuumpumpe
Vacuümpomp
Vakuumpumpe
by johnson controls
Dimensiones generales / General dimensions mm / Dimensions générales / Dimensões gerais
Dimensioni d’ingombro / Algemeine abmessungen / Algemene afmetingen / Generelle dimensjoner
EVJC 09 , 12, 18, 24
Fig. 6 (mm)
A
B
150
300
500
C
2000
540
A
B
C
EVJC 09
848
540
260
EVJC 12
848
540
260
EVJC 18
890
700
340
EVJC 24
890
700
340
3
77
by johnson controls
Instrucciones de instalación Espacios libres, unidad exterior
Inspección
En su recepción, inspeccionar la mercancía y comunicar por escrito las posibles
anomalías al transportista y a la Compañía
de Seguros.
Protección del medio ambiente
Eliminen el embalaje según la reglamentación vigente para la preservación del medio ambiente.
En la instalación, y mantenimiento tener en
cuenta que se utiliza HFC-410A con aceite
POE.
Seguridad
La instalación y operaciones de mantenimiento de este sistema de aire acondicionado deben realizarse tan sólo por personal cualificado y experto. Deben realizarse
operaciones de mantenimiento periódicas,
como la limpieza de las baterías y filtros de
aire, para que el rendimiento de las unidades siga siento óptimo.
Precaución
Este aparato debe ser instalado y utilizado
conforme a:
- Reglamento Electrotécnico de
baja Tensión.
- Reglamento de Seguridad para
Plantas e Instalaciones Frigoríficas.
- Reglamento de Aparatos de Presión.
- Normas Básicas de la Edificación.
- Normas Técnicas de la Edificación.
- Ordenanzas Municipales.
Emplazamiento (fig. 1 a 3)
Debe instalarse directamente en exteriores.
Situar la unidad encima de una base consistente y fijarla mediante tornillos.
Unidades exteriores
Se suministran las unidades con una carga de
refrigerante R410A suficiente para una longitud de tubería de interconexión de 5 metros.
Cada unidad incluye un codo conector,
para el drenaje de condensados (sólo en
modelos con bomba de calor). Cada compresor está equipado con un envolvente
de aislamiento acústico para reducir a un
mínimo el nivel de ruidos.
Instalación
Interconexión de las unidades
En la instalación de unidades Split debe asegurarse la total estanqueidad del circuito frigorífico una vez realizada la operación de montaje, para asegurar la ausencia de fugas.
Ello contribuirá a obtener las máximas
prestaciones con el mínimo consumo y evitará averías graves en la unidad. Es además, una precaución ecológica.
Instalación de las tuberías de
interconexión
La longitud de los tubos de interconexión
de las unidades debe ser la mínima posible. Las distancias máximas admisibles
con el circuito y diámetro de tubos estándar son las que se indican en cada uno de
los apartados, de las unidades interiores
correspondientes.
Tuberías que deben utilizarse
Para la realización de las tuberías que unen
las dos unidades, debe tenerse especial
cuidado en que los tubos que se utilicen se
mantengan limpios y secos, ya antes de su
instalación. Aconsejamos tener en cuenta
las recomendaciones siguientes:
- Utilizar sólo tubo de cobre de calidad frigorífica.
- No efectuar trabajos en el exterior si está
lloviendo.
- Los extremos de los tubos deben permanecer cerrados mientras dure la instalación.
- No dejar abiertos al ambiente los filtros
secadores ni el compresor.
- Para soldar, utilizar varillas de bajo punto
de fusión, deben contener un mínimo del
5% de plata.
- Durante la soldadura y mientras el tubo
permanezca caliente, mantener una corriente de nitrógeno seco, a fin de evitar
la formación de óxidos y cascarilla en el
interior, que podrían provocar contaminación y obstrucciones.
- En las uniones cobre-cobre, no debe utilizarse decapante.
- La conexión a las unidades debe efectuarse por el método de abocardado.
La instalación de la unidad
comprende:
Aislamiento de los tubos de
refrigerante
- Montaje unidad.
- Conexiones tubería de refrigerante.
- Conexiones drenaje de condensados en
unidades con bomba de calor.
- Instalación eléctrica de la unidad.
Debido a que los tubos capilares están instalados en al unidad exterior, tanto el tubo
de mayor diámetro como el de menor, están en el lado de baja presión relativa del
sistema.
4
78
Se requiere un espacio libre mínimo alrededor de las unidades para la circulación
de aire y fácil acceso para realizar operaciones de mantenimiento tal y como está
indicado en las dimensiones generales.
E
En consecuencia, para evitar la caída al
suelo del agua de condensación proveniente de los tubos, ambos deben ser aislados
con un aislante adecuado. El espesor del
mismo debe ser de 8 mm como mínimo,
ver fig.4.
Vaciado y deshidratado (Fig.5)
El aire no actúa como refrigerante debido a
que no puede ser licuado por el compresor.
El aire y la humedad que permanezcan en
el sistema de refrigeración tienen efectos
indeseables, tal como se indica más abajo.
Consecuentemente, deben ser eliminados
completamente.
- Aumenta la presión de alta.
- Aumenta la corriente consumida.
- Desciende el rendimiento del equipo.
- El agua contenida en el aire puede congelarse y bloquear los capilares.
- El agua puede provocar la corrosión de
algunas partes del circuito y el deterioro
del compresor.
Proceso
- Montar un adaptador a la bomba para evitar la contaminación del aceite POE.
- Conectar la bomba de vacío y los manómetros al sistema.
- Efectuar alto vacío hasta 50 micrones.
- Verificar que el sistema no pierde el vacío.
- Si lo pierde, detectar fugas y repararlas.
Interconexiones frigoríficas
Particularidades del refrigerante R-410A
- El refrigerante R410A es una mezcla binaria al 50% de HFC-32 y HFC-125. Su
comportamiento como gas refrigerante es
casi azeotrópico (deslizamiento inferior a
0,17°K). No contiene cloro en su composición, por lo que no daña la capa de ozono
de la atmósfera. No obstante, en caso de
vaciar un circuito, el gas siempre debe ser
recuperado y en ningún caso debeser lanzado a la atmósfera.
- Comparado con el R-22, el R-410A trabaja
a presiones superiores. Un 60% mas en el
lado de alta y un 75% mas en el lado de
baja. Ver tabla adjunta.
Temperatura
°C
Presión R-410A bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
43
25
54
32,6
by johnson controls
- El refrigerante R-410A debe ser cargado
siempre en forma líquida. Si la botella no
tiene tubo de inmersión, esta deberá girarse al revés.
- Las botellas de refrigerante R-410A se distinguen por ser de color rosado.
- Debido a que no contiene cloro, el refrigerante R-410A solo puede emplearse asociado con aceite sintético tipo POE (Polyol
Ester).
- El R-410A no es inflamable a presión atmosférica. No obstante, por contener un
50% de HFC-32, nunca debe ser presurizado con aire u otro gas que no sea el
nitrógeno (igual que el R-22).
- Botella de refrigerante. Apta para una presión de 47 bar y para contener solo R410A
(Pintada de color rosa). Con adaptador
para rosca ½” UNF-20.
- Detector de fugas. Específico para HFC.
Sensibilidad de aproximadamente 23gr
año.
- Equipo de recuperación. Unidad específica para recuperar R-410A.
- Cuando el aceite POE se ha contaminado con agua, una bomba de vacío ya no
es suficiente para eliminarla. La presencia excesiva de humedad provocará la
aparición de lodos y ácidos que dañarán
el compresor. Por ello, el aceite contaminado debe ser substituido o recuperado
mediante filtros.
- Debido a su alta higroscopicidad, el aceite
POE puede causar quemaduras en la piel.
Se recomienda el uso de guantes durante
su manipulación.
- Los aceites POE aptos para los sistemas
R-410A son los siguientes:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
Espesores mínimos de las tuberías
Debido a las mayores presiones de trabajo del refrigerante R-410A, para la interconexión de las unidades partidas es necesario emplear tubos de cobre DHP sin costuras
y de pared más gruesa.
Particularidades del aceite POE
Herramientas específicas
- El aceite POE es altamente higroscópico.
Su capacidad de absorción de agua es 15
veces superior a la del aceite mineral.
- Los contenedores de aceite POE deben
ser metálicos y hay que mantenerlos abiertos el mínimo tiempo posible. Después de
su uso, deben taparse herméticamente.
- No abrir nunca un circuito o un compresor cargado con aceite POE cuando está
bajo vació. En caso de estar bajo presión
atmosférica, no debe permanecer abierto más de 15 minutos. En caso contrario
debe preverse una circulación de nitrógeno seco.
- El aceite POE no puede mezclarse con
aceite mineral. Cantidades superiores al
5% de aceite mineral mezclado con POE
causaran obstrucciones transitorias en los
sistemas de expansión.
- Se recomienda el empleo de filtros deshidratadores en los sistemas que utilicen
aceite POE.
Para instalar equipos cargados con refrigerante R-410A y aceite POE hay que disponer de las siguientes herramientas:
- Manómetros. Específicos para R-410A. El
de alta (color rojo), con la escala de -1 a
53 bar. El de baja (color azul) con la escala
de -1 a 38 bar. Con conexiones roscadas
½” UNF-20.
- Mangueras. De goma HNBR y con forro
interior de nylon. Presión de trabajo 5,1
Mpa, presión de ruptura 27,4 Mpa. Rosca
½” UNF-20.
- Bomba de vacío. De alto vacío (dos etapas) y con adaptador para evitar que parte
del aceite mineral de la bomba fluya hacia
el circuito cargado con aceite POE. Con
adaptador para rosca ½” UNF-20.
- Balanza electrónica. Se necesita porque
no es posible cargar R-410A empleando
un cilindro de carga por las burbujas que
se producen debido a la alta presión y a la
velocidad de evaporación del gas.
Diametro del tubo
mm (pulgadas)
Espesor mínimo
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Límites de utilización
Límites de voltaje
Temperatura entrada aire a la batería exterior TS
Temperatura entrada aire a la batería inferior
Ciclo de funcionamiento
Ciclo de funcionamiento
Nom. 230 V
Mínimo °C
Máximo °C
Mínimo °C
Máximo °C
Mínimo
Máximo
Frío
Calor
Frío
Calor
Frío TH
Calor TS
Frío TH
Calor TS
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Notes: TH = Termómetro húmedo. TS = Termómetro seco.
(1) El equipo puede trabajar durante un corto intervalo de tiempo a una temperatura fuera del límite hasta conseguir acondicionar el espacio ocupado.
E
5
79
by johnson controls
Especificaciones técnicas
EVJC
Modelo
Unidad exterior
09
12
18
24
Capacidades
Frio
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Calor
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Compresor
Rotativo
Refrigerante
R-410A
Expansión/ubicación
Capilar/unidad exterior
Alimentación eléctrica
Consumo
Frio / Calor
Nivel de ruidos exterior (1 m)
Diam. exterior tubo drenaje condensados
Peso neto
230.1.50
V.ph.Hz
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
kg
16,5
35
36
Abocardado + Tuerca
Tipo de conexión
Tubería
Diámetro gás
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Diámetro líquido
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Longitud máxima tubería
m
15
20
25
25
Desnivel máximo tubería
m
5
10
10
10
Carga de refrigerante
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
La capacidad frigorífica nominal se basa en : Temp. aire interior = 27°C TS/19°C TH, Temperatura aire exterior = 35°C TS, tuberías 4 metros.
La capacidad calorífica nominal se basa en : Temp. aire interior = 21°C TS, Temperatura aire exterior = 7°C TS/6°C TH, tuberías 4 metros.
ATENCIÓN
Su producto está marcado con este símbolo. Esto significa que al final de su vida útil no debe mezclarse con
el resto de residuos domésticos no clasificados, sino que su eliminación debe realizarse de acuerdo con la
normativa local y nacional pertinente, de forma correcta y respetuosa con el medio ambiente.
El desmantelamiento del acondicionador de aire, así como el tratamiento del refrigerante, aceite y otros
componentes, debe ser efectuado por un instalador competente de acuerdo con la legislación aplicable.
Contacte con las autoridades locales para obtener más información.
Datos y medidas susceptibles de variación sin previo aviso.
6
80
E
by johnson controls
Installation Instructions
Inspection
Upon reception, inspect the equipment and
notify both the carrier and the insurance
company, in writing, of any possible damage.
Environmental protection
Eliminate packing in accordance
with the regulations in force on
environmental conservation.
During installation and maintenance, keep
in mind that HFC-410A and oil POE are
used.
Safety
Installation and maintenance operations
of this air conditioning system should be
carried out only by qualified and expert
personnel.
Periodical maintenance operations should
be carried out, such as cleaning the coils and
air filters, so as to keep unit performance at
an optimum.
Caution
This unit should be installed and used in
accordance with:
- Low Voltage Electrotechnical
Regulations.
- Safety Regulations for Cooling
Plants and Installations.
- Regulations on Pressure Equipment.
- Basic Construction Standards.
- Technical Construction Standards.
- Local ordinances.
Location (Fig. 1 to 3)
To be installed directly outdoors. Place the
unit on a consistent base and fasten by
means of bolts.
Outdoor units
These units are supplied with an
adequate R-410A refrigerant load for an
interconnecting tubing length of 4 meters.
Each unit includes a connecting elbow for
the condensed water drain (on heat pump
models only). Each compressor is equipped with an acoustic isolation casing to
reduce noise to a minimum.
Installation
Unit installation comprises:
- Unit mounting.
- Refrigerant tubing connections.
- Condensed water drain connections in
heat pump units.
- Unit wiring.
Clearances, outdoor unit
A minimum clearance is required around
the units for the circulation of air and access
for maintenance servicing, as indicated in
the general dimensions.
Interconnection of the units
When installing Split units, the cooling
circuit should be completely leakproof after
mounting.
This will help to obtain maximum performance
with minimum consumption, and avoid serious
damage to the unit. This is an ecological
precaution as well.
Installation of interconnecting
tubing
The length of the interconnecting tubing of
the units should be as short as possible.
The maximum admissible distances with
regard to the circuit and standard tubing
diameters are indicated on each apparatus
of the corresponding indoor units.
Tubing to be used
Special care should be taken that the tubing
that interconnects the two units is kept
clean and dry, even prior to installation. It is
advisable to take into account the following
recommendations:
- Use copper refrigerant quality tubing
only.
- Do not work outdoors when raining.
- The ends of the tubing should remain
closed during installation.
- Do not leave dryer filters or the compressor
out in the open air.
- For welding use low melting point rods
with a 5% silver content, minimum.
- When welding and as long as the tubing is
hot, maintain a flow of dry nitrogen so as to
avoid internal rusting and scaling that could
cause contamination and obstructions.
- Do not use strippers on copper-copper
joints.
- Connection between units should be
carried out by means of the flaring
method.
cooling system has undesirable effects, as
indicated below. Consequently, they should
be eliminated completely.
- High pressure increases.
- Consumed power supply increases.
- Equipment performance decreases.
- Water contained in the air could freeze
and block the capillaries.
- Water can cause corrosion of certain
parts of the circuit, and deterioration of
the compressor.
Process
- Fit an adapter to the pump to avoid
contamination of the POE oil.
- Connect the vacuum pump and service
pressure gauges to the system.
- Carry out a vacuum of up to at least 50
microns.
- Make sure the system does not loose
vacuum.
- If it does, detect leaks and repair.
Cooling Interconnections
R-410A refrigerant
- R-410A refrigerant is a 50% binary mixture
of HFC-32 and HFC-125. Its reaction as a
refrigerant gas is nearly azeotropic (creep
below 0.17°K). Does not contain chlorine
and, thus, it does not harm the ozone layer.
Nevertheless, should a circuit be drained,
the gas should always be recovered and in
no case released in the atmosphere.
- In comparison to R-22, R-410A operates
at higher pressures. At 60% higher on the
high side and at 75% more on the low side.
See following table.
Temperature
°C
R-410A
pressure bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
43
25
54
32,6
Insulation of refrigerant tubing
Due to the fact that the capillary tubing is
installed in the outdoor unit, both the larger
as well as the smaller diameter tubes are
in the relative low pressure side of the
system.
Consequently, to avoid condensed water
dripping on the floor, both tubes should
be insulated adequately. The thickness of
same should be at least 8 mm. See Fig. 4.
Emptying and dehydrating
(Fig. 5)
Air does not act as a refrigerant since it
cannot be liquefied by the compressor.
Any air and humidity remaining in the
GB
- R-410A refrigerant should be charged
always in liquid form. Should the tank not
have a dipping pipe, it should be turned
upside down.
- The R-410A refrigerant tanks stand out
because they are pink.
- Due to the fact that it does not contain
chlorine, R-410A refrigerant can be used
only in combination with POE (Polyol
Ester) type synthetic oil.
7
81
by johnson controls
- R-410A refrigerant is not flammable at
atmospheric pressure. Nevertheless, as it
contains 50% HFC-32, it should never be
pressurised with air or any gas other than
nitrogen (the same as R-22).
- The POE oils that are adequate for R-410A
systems are as follows:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
Minimum thickness of tubing
Due to the greater operating pressures
of R-410A refrigerant, the interconnection
of the split units requires seamless DHP
copper tubing with thicker walls.
Specific tools
POE oil
- POE oil is highly hygroscopic. Its water
absorbing capacity is 15 times greater
than mineral oil.
- POE oil containers should be metallic
and should be kept open the least time
possible. They should be hermetically
sealed after use.
- Never open a circuit or compressor charged
with POE oil while under vacuum. Should
either one be under atmospheric pressure,
it should not remain open for more than
15 minutes. Should this not be possible, a
flow of dry nitrogen should be established.
- POE oil cannot be mixed with mineral oil.
Amounts of over 5% of mineral oil mixed
with POE will cause transitory obstructions
within the expansion systems..
- It is recommendable to use filter-dryers on
systems using POE oil.
- Should the POE oil become contaminated
with water, a vacuum pump is no longer
sufficient. Excessive presence of humidity
causes sludge and acids that damage the
compressor. Therefore, any contaminated
oil should be changed or recovered by
means of filters.
- Due to its high hygroscopic nature, POE
oil can cause burns on the skin. The use of
gloves during handling is recommended.
For installing equipment charged with
R-410A refrigerant and POE oil, the following
tools are required:
- Pressure gauges. Specific for R-410A.
High pressure (red) with a range of -1 to
53 bar. Low pressure (blue) with a range
of -1 to 38 bar. With ½” threaded UNF-20
connections.
- Hoses. Of HNBR rubber and with nylon
internal lining. Operating pressure 5.1
Mpa, bursting pressure 27.4 Mpa. ½”
UNF-20 thread.
- Vacuum pump. High vacuum (two stages)
and with adapter to avoid part of the mineral
oil in the pump from flowing towards the
circuit charged with POE oil. With adapter
for ½” UNF-20 thread.
- Electronic scale. Needed because it is
impossible to charge R-410A by using a
charge cylinder due to the bubbles caused
by the high pressure and speed of gas
evaporation.
- Refrigerant tank. Adequate for a pressure
of 47 bar and for containing R-410A only
(painted pink). With adapter for ½” UNF20 thread.
- Leak detector. Specific for HFC. Sensitivity
of approximately 23 gr. year.
- Recovery equipment. Specific unit for
recovery of R-410A.
Tubing diameter
mm (inches
Minimum thickness
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Limits of use
Voltage limits
Air intake temperature to outdoor coil DB
Air intake temperature to indoor coil
Operating cycle
Operating cycle
Nom. 230 V
Minimum °C
Minimum °C
Maximum °C
Minimum
Maximum
Cool
Heat
Cool
Heat
Cool WB
Heat DB
Cool WB
Heat DB
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Notes: WB = Wet bulb. DB = Dry bulb.
(1) This equipment can operate, for a short interval of time, at a temperature beyond limits until the occupied space is conditioned.
8
82
Maximum °C
GB
by johnson controls
Technical specifications
EVJC
Model
Outdoor unit
09
12
18
24
Capacities
Cooling
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Heating
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Compressor
Rotary
Refrigerant
R-410A
Expansion/location
Capillary/outdoor unit
Power supply
Consumption
V.ph.Hz
Cooling / Heating
Outdoor noise level (1 m.)
Outer dia. condensed water drain pipe
Nett Weight
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
kg
16,5
35
36
Type of connection
Flared + Nut
Tubing
Gas diameter
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Liquid diameter
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Maximum tubing length
m
15
20
25
25
Maximum elevation tubing
m
5
10
10
10
Refrigerant load
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
Nominal cooling capacity is based on: Indoor air temp. = 27°C DB/19°C WB. Outdoor air temp. = 35°C DB, 4-meter tubing.
Nominal heating capacity is based on : Indoor air temp. = 21°C DB - Outdoor air temp. = 7°C DB/6°C WB, 4-meter tubing.
ATTENTION
Your product is marked with this symbol. This means that at the end of its service life it should not be mixed
with other non-classified household waste. Therefore, disposal should be carried out in compliance with the
corresponding local and national regulations, in a correct and environment-friendly manner.
The dismantling of the air conditioning unit, as well as the processing of refrigerant, oil and other components,
should be carried out by a qualified technician and in compliance with the applicable legislation.
Contact your local authorities for further information
All data and dimensions are subject to change without prior notice.
GB
9
83
by johnson controls
Instructions d’installation
Inspection
- Les raccordements du drainage des condensats dans les unités réversibles.
- L’installation électrique de l’unité.
Dès sa réception, inspecter la marchandise et communiquer par écrit les possibles
anomalies au transporteur et à la compagnie d’assurances.
Dégagements nécessaires,
unité extérieure
Protection de l’environnement
Se défaire de l’emballage selon la réglementation en vigueur relative à la protection de
l’environnement.
Pendant l’installation et la maintenance, ne
pas oublier qu’on utilise du HFC- 410A et
l’huile POE.
Sécurité
L’installation et les opérations de maintenance de cet équipement de climatisation
ne doivent être effectuées que par un personnel qualifié. Il faut réaliser des opérations de maintenance périodiques telles
que le nettoyage des batteries et des filtres
à air pour que le rendement des unités soit
toujours optimum.
Précaution
Cet appareil doit être installé et utilisé conformément aux:
- Directive électrotechnique de
basse tension.
- Directive de sécurité pour équipements et installations frigorifiques.
- Directive des appareils à pression.
- Normes fondamentales relatives à la
construction.
- Normes techniques relatives à la construction.
- Règlements municipaux.
Emplacement (fig. 1 à 3)
L’unité doit être installée à l’extérieur. Situer
l’unité sur une base solide et l’y fixer par des
vis.
Unités extérieures
Les unités sont fournies avec une charge
suffisante de réfrigérant R-410A pour une
longueur de tubes d’interconnexion de 5
mètres.
Chaque unité comprend un coude de raccordement pour l’évacuation des condensats (seulement dans les modèles réversibles). Chaque compresseur est pourvu
d’un revêtement isolant pour réduire le
niveau sonore.
Installation
L’installation de l’unité comprend:
- Le montage de l’unité.
- Les liaisons frigorifiques.
10
84
Il faut laisser suffisamment d’espace libre
autour des unités pour permettre la libre circulation de l’air et un accès facile pour les
opérations de maintenance comme c’est
indiqué dans les dimensions générales.
Interconnexion des unités
Pour l’installation des unités Split, il faut
s’assurer de la totale étanchéité du circuit
frigorifique une fois l’opération de montage
achevée afin qu’il n’y ait aucune fuite.
On obtiendra ainsi des performances optimales avec une consommation minimale, tout
en évitant des dommages graves de l’unité.
C’est, d’autre part, une précaution d’ordre
écologique.
Installation des tubes d’interconnexion
Les tubes de raccordement des unités doivent être le plus court possible. Les distances maximales admises, avec le circuit et
le diamètre des tubes standard, sont celles
qui sont indiquées à chaque chapitre correspondant aux unités intérieures.
Tubes à utiliser
Pour l’installation des lignes qui relient les
deux unités, il faut prêter une attention
spéciale à ce que les tubes utilisés soient
propres et secs, avant même de les installer. Il est recommandé de tenir compte des
conseils suivants:
- Utiliser seulement du tube cuivre de qualité frigorifique
- Ne pas travailler à l’extérieur lorsqu’il pleut.
- Les extrémités des tubes doivent
être toujours bouchés tant que dure
l’installation.
- Ne pas laisser les filtres déshydrateurs ni
le compresseur exposés à l’air libre.
- Pour souder, utiliser des baguettes à bas
point de fusion qui contiennent un minimum de 5 % d’argent.
- Pendant la soudure et tant que le tube
est encore chaud, maintenir un courant
d’azote sec pour éviter la formation
d’oxydes et l’entrée de poussières à
l’intérieur qui pourrait contaminer et obstruer le tube.
- Pour les raccords cuivre-cuivre, ne pas
utiliser de décapant.
- Le raccordement aux unités doit être
effectué par la méthode de l’évasement.
installés dans l’unité extérieure, aussi bien
le gros tube que le petit tube se trouvent du
côté de basse pression relative du système.
En conséquence, pour éviter la chute d’eau
sur le sol des condensats provenant des
tubes, ces deux tubes doivent être isolés
avec un isolant adéquat qui aura au moins
8 mm d’épaisseur. Voir fig. 4.
Purge d’air et déshydratation
(Fig.5)
L’air n’agit pas comme réfrigérant car il ne
peut être liquéfié par le compresseur. L’air
et l’humidité qui restent dans le système de
réfrigération ont des effets nuisibles, comme on l’indique ci-après. En conséquence,
ils doivent être complètement éliminés.
- Augmentation de la haute pression
- Augmentation de la consommation
d’électricité
- Baisse du rendement de l’appareil.
- L’eau contenue dans l’air peut prendre en
glace et bloquer les capillaires.
- L’eau peut provoquer la corrosion de certaines parties du circuit et endommager le
compresseur.
Procédé
- Dans chaque circuit, les vannes fermées:
- Monter un adaptateur au réversible pour
éviter la contamination de l’huile POE.
- Brancher une pompe à vide et les manomètres au système.
- Tirer au vide jusqu’à 50 microns.
- S’il y a des pertes, détecter les fuites et
les réparer.
Raccordements frigorifiques
Particularités du réfrigérant R-410A
- Le réfrigérant R-410A est un mélange binaire à 50% de HFC-32 et HFC-125. Son
comportement en tant que gaz réfrigérant
est presque azéotropique (glissement inférieur à 0,17°K). Il n’y a pas de chlore
dans sa composition et en conséquence n’abîme pas la couche d’ozone de
l’atmosphère. Néanmoins, dans le cas où
l’on viderait le circuit, il faut toujours récupérer le gaz et ne le libérer dans aucun cas
dans l’atmosphère.
- En comparaison avec le R-22, le R-410A
travaille à des pressions supérieures. 60%
de plus du côté de haute pression et 75%
de plus du côté de basse pression. Voir le
tableau ci-joint :
Température
°C
Pression R-410A bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
Isolation des lignes frigorifiques.
43
25
Étant donné que les tubes capillaires sont
54
32,6
F
by johnson controls
- La charge de réfrigérant R-410A doit toujours se faire sous forme liquide. Si la bouteille ne dispose pas d’un tube d’immersion, il
faudra la tourner à l’envers.
- Les bouteilles de réfrigérant R-410A se
distinguent par leur couleur rose.
- Étant donné qu’il ne contient pas de chlore,
le réfrigérant R-410A ne peut s’employer
qu’avec de l’huile synthétique type POE
(Polyol Esther).
- Le R-410A n’est pas inflammable à la pression atmosphérique. Cependant, étant
donné qu’il contient 50% de HFC-32, il ne
doit jamais être pressurisé avec de l’air ou
avec un autre gaz que l’azote (comme le
R-22).
- Lorsque l’huile POE a été contaminée
par de l’eau, une pompe à vide ne suffira pas à l’éliminer. La présence excessive d’humidité provoquera l’apparition de
boues et d’acides qui endommageront
le compresseur. Par conséquent, l’huile
contaminée devra être remplacée ou récupérée à travers des filtres.
- À cause de sa forte hygroscopie, l’huile
POE peut provoquer des brûlures sur la
peau. L’usage de gants pendant sa manipulation est donc fortement recommandé.
- Les huiles POE aptes pour les systèmes
R-410A sont les suivants:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
Particularités de l´huile POE
Outils spécifiques
- L’huile POE est extrêmement hygroscopique. Sa puissance d’absorptionde l’eau
est 15 fois supérieure à celle del’huile minérale.
- Les récipients de l’huile POE doivent
être métalliques. Les maintenir ouverts le
moins longtemps possible. Après l’usage,
reboucher hermétiquement le récipients.
Pour installer des équipements chargés
avec du réfrigérant R-410A et de l’huile
POE, il faut être muni des outils suivants:
- Bouteille de réfrigérant. Apte pour une
pression de 47 bar et pour ne contenir que
du R-410A (peinte en rose)- Avec un adaptateur pour filetage ½» UNF-20.
- Détecteur de fuites. Spécifique pour HFC.
Sensibilité d’environ 23 g par an.
- Équipement de récupération. Unité spéciale pour la récupération de R-410A.
Épaisseurs minimales des tuyauteries
En vue de plus grandes pressions de travail
du réfrigérant R-410A pour l’interconnexion
des unités split, il faut employer des tubes
en cuivre DHP sans coutures et avec des
parois plus épaisses.
- Manomètres spéciaux pour R-410A. Celui de haute pression (couleur rouge) à
l’échelle de -1 à 53 bar. Celui de basse
pression (couleur bleu) à l’échelle de -1 à
38 bar. Raccords vissés ½» UNF-20.
- Tuyaux. En caoutchouc HNBR et fourreau
intérieur en nylon. Pression de travail 5,1
Mpa, pression de rupture 27,4 Mpa. Filetage ½» UNF-20
- Pompe à vide. De grand vide (deux étages) et munie d’un adaptateur pour éviter qu’une partie de l’huile minérale de la
pompe ne s’écoule dans le circuit chargé
d’huile POE. Avec un adaptateur pour filetage ½» UNF-20.
- Balance électronique. Nécessaire car il
n’est pas possible de charger le R-410A en
utilisant un cylindre de charge à cause de
la formation de bulles se devant à la haute
pression et à la vitesse d’évaporation du
gaz.
- Ne jamais ouvrir un circuit ou un compresseur chargé d’huile POE lorsqu’il est sous
pression. Dans le cas où il serait sous une
pression atmosphérique, il ne devra pas
rester ouvert plus de 15 minutes. Il faudra
prévoir, dans le cas contraire, une circulation d’azote sec.
- L’huile POE ne doit pas être mélangé avec
de l’huile minérale. Des quantités supérieures à 5% d’huile minérale mélangées
avec le POE pourraient occasionner des
obstructions transitoires dans les systèmes de détente.
- Il est recommandé d’employer des filtres
déshydrateurs dans les systèmes qui utiliutilisent de l’huile POE.
Diamètre du tube
mm (pouces)
Épaisseur minimale
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Limites d’utilisation
Limites de voltage
Température entrée d’air à la batterie extérieure BS
Température entrée d’air à la batterie intérieure
Cycle de fonctionnement
Cycle de fonctionnement
Nom. 230 V
Mínimum °C
Máximum °C
Mínimum °C
Máximum °C
Mínimum
Máximum
Froid
Chaud
Froid
Chaud
Froid BH
Chaud BS
Froid BH
Chaud BS
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Notes: BH= Thermomètre de Bulbe Humide. BS= Thermomètre de Bulbe Sec
(1) L’unité peut travailler pendant une courte durée à une température qui dépasse la limite jusqu’à atteindre la climatisation de l’espace occupé.
F
11
85
by johnson controls
Spécifications techniques
EVJC
Modéle
Unité extérieure
09
12
18
24
Puissances
Froid
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Chaud
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Compresseur
Rotatif
Réfrigérant
R-410A
Détente/emplacement
Capillaire / unité extérieure
V.ph.Hz
Alimentation électrique
Consommation
Froid / Chaud
Niveau sonore extérieur (1 m)
Diamètre extérieur tube drainage condensats
Poids net
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
kg
16,5
35
36
Type de raccords
Évasement + Écrou
Tuyauterie
Diamètre gaz
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Diamètre liquide
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Longueur maximale tuyauterie
m
15
20
25
25
Dénivellement maximal des tuyauteries
m
5
10
10
10
Charge de réfrigérant
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
La puissance frigorifique nominale est basée sur: Temp. air intérieur = 27°C BS/19°C BH. Température air extérieur = 35°C BS, tubes 4 mètres.
La puissance calorifique nominale est basée sur: Temp. air intérieur = 21°C BS, Température air extérieur = 7°C BS/6°C BH, tubes 4 mètres.
ATTENTION
Votre produit est marqué avec ce symbole. Cela veut dire qu’à la fin de sa vie utile, il ne doit pas être mélangé
avec les autres déchets domestiques non classés. Son élimination doit être réalisée conformément à la
réglementation locale et nationale pertinente, de manière correcte et respectueuse envers l’environnement.
Le démantèlement du climatiseur, ainsi que le traitement du réfrigérant, de l’huile et des autres composants, doit
être effectué par un installateur compétent, conformément à la législation en vigueur.
Contacter les autorités locales pour obtenir plus d’information.
Données et mesures susceptibles de variation sans préavis.
12
86
F
by johnson controls
Instruções de Instalação
Inspecção
À sua recepção, há que inspeccionar a mercadoria e comunicar as possíveis anomalias
por escrito ao transportador e à Companhia
de Seguros.
Protecção do meio ambiente
Deve-se eliminar a embalagem
de acordo com a regulamentação
para a preservação do meio ambiente em vigor.
Na instalação e na manutenção, deve-se
ter em linha de conta que são utilizados
HCF-410A e olio POE.
Segurança
A instalação e as operações de manutenção deste sistema de ar condicionado
somente devem ser realizadas por pessoal
qualificado e experimentado. Devem-se
realizar operações de manutenção periódicas, como a limpeza das baterias e dos
filtros de ar, a fim de que o rendimento das
unidades continue a ser óptimo.
Precaução
Este aparelho deve ser instalado e utilizado de acordo com:
- Regulamento Electrotécnico
de Baixa Tensão.
- Regulamento de Segurança
para Instalações Frigoríficas.
- Regulamento de Aparelhos de Pressão.
- Normas Básicas da Edificação.
- Normas Técnicas da Edificação
- Disposições Municipais.
Localização (Figs. 1 a 3)
Deve ser instalada directamente em exteriores. Há que situar a unidade sobre uma
base consistente e fixá-la a ela por meio de
parafusos.
Unidades exteriores
As unidades são fornecidas com a carga
de refrigerante R-410A suficiente para um
comprimento de tubagem de interligação
de 5 metros.
Cada uma das unidades inclui um cotovelo
corrector para a drenagem de condensados (somente nos modelos com bomba de
calor). Cada compressor está equipado
com uma envolvente de isolamento acústico a fim de reduzir o nível de ruídos ao
mínimo possível.
Instalação
A instalação da unidade abrange:
- Montagem da unidade.
- Ligações de tubagem de refrigerante.
- Ligações da drenagem de condensados
em unidades com bomba de calor.
- Instalação eléctrica da unidade.
Espaços livres, unidade exterior
Requer-se um espaço livre mínimo ao redor das unidades a fim de permitir a circulação de ar e um fácil acesso para realizar
as operações de manutenção, tal como se
indica nas dimensões gerais.
Interligação das unidades
Na instalação de unidades Split, deve-se
assegurar que o circuito frigorífico fique
totalmente estanco depois de realizada a
operação de montagem, com a finalidade
de garantir a ausência de fugas.
Isso contribuirá a obter as máximas prestações com o mínimo consumo e evitará
avarias graves à unidade. Além disso, tratase duma precaução ecológica.
Instalação das tubagens de
interligação
O comprimento dos tubos de interligação
das unidades deverá ser o mínimo que for
possível.
As distâncias máximas admissíveis com
o circuito e o diâmetro de tubos standard
são as que se indicam em cada um dos
parágrafos das unidades interiores correspondentes.
Tubagens que devem ser utilizadas
Para a realização das tubagens que unem
as duas unidades, deve ter-se em linha de
conta um especial cuidado de que os tubos que se utilizarem se mantenham limpos e secos, já antes da sua instalação.
Aconselhamos ter em linha de conta as
orientações que se oferecem nas seguintes recomendações:
- Utilizar somente tubo de cobre de qualidade frigorífica.
- Não efectuar trabalhos no exterior, se estiver a chover.
- As extremidades dos tubos devem permanecer fechadas enquanto durar a instalação.
- Não deixar expostos ao ambiente os filtros secadores nem o compressor.
- Para soldar, utilizar varetas de solda de
baixo ponto de fusão, as quais devem
conter um mínimo de 5% de prata.
- Durante a soldadura, e enquanto o tubo
permanecer quente, há que manter uma
corrente de nitrogénio seco, a fim de evitar a formação de óxidos e de casquinha
no seu interior, o que poderia provocar
contaminação e obstruções.
- Nas uniões cobre-cobre, não deve utilizar- se decapante.
- A ligação às unidades deve ser efectu da
por meio do método de afunilamento.
P
Isolamento dos tubos de
refrigerante
Devido a que os tubos capilares se encontram instalados na unidade exterior, tanto
o tubo de maior diâmetro como o de menor
se localizam no lado de baixa pressão relativa do sistema.
Em consequência, a fim de evitar a queda
ao chão da água de condensação procedente dos tubos, estes devem ser isolados
por meio dum material isolante adequado.
A espessura deste material deve ser, no
mínimo, de 8 mm (veja-se a fig. 4).
Despejamento e desidratação
(Fig. 5)
O ar não actua como refrigerante devido a
que ele não pode ser liquefeito pelo compressor.
O ar e a humidade que permanecerem no
sistema de refrigeração têm efeitos não
desejáveis, tal como se indica mais abaixo.
Em consequência, devem ser eliminados
por completo.
- Aumentam a pressão de alta.
- Aumentam a corrente consumida.
- Reduzem o rendimento do equipo.
- A água contida no ar pode-se gelar e obstruir os capilares.
- A água pode provocar a corrosão de algumas partes do circuito e a deterioração
do compressor.
Processo
- Montar um adaptador à bomba a fim de
evitar a contaminação do óleo POE.
- Ligar a bomba de vácuo e os manómetros ao sistema.
- Fazer um vácuo elevado até 50 microns.
- Verificar que o sistema não perca o vácuo.
- Se se perder, há que detectar as fugas e
repará-las.
Interligações frigoríficas
Particularidades do refrigerante R-410A
- O refrigerante R-410A é uma mistura binária a 50% de HFC-32 e HFC-125. O seu
comportamento como gás refrigerante é
quase azeotrópico (deslizamento inferior a
0,17°K). Não contém cloro na sua composição, pelo que não danifica a ca mada de
ozone da atmosfera. No entanto, no caso
de despejar um circuito, o gás sempre
deve ser recuperado e não deve ser libertado à atmosfera em caso nenhum.
- Comparado com o R-22, o R-410A trabalha a pressões superiores: 60% mais no
lado de alta e 75% mais no lado de baixa.
Veja-se a tabela anexa.
13
87
by johnson controls
Temperatura
°C
Pressão do
R-410A
bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
43
25
54
32,6
- O refrigerante R-410A deve ser carregado
sempre em forma líquida. Se a garrafa não
tiver tubo de imersão, esta deverá ser virada ao contrário.
- As garrafas de refrigerante R-410A podemse distinguir por serem de cor-derosa.
- Devido a que não contém cloro, o refrigerante R-410A apenas pode ser utilizado de
uma forma associada com óleo sintétido
tipo POE (Polyol Ester).
- O R-410A não é inflamável à pressão
atmosférica. No entanto, visto que
contém 50% de HFC-32, nunca deve ser
pressurizado com ar ou outro gás que não
seja o nitrogénio (igual que o R-22).
Particularidades do óleo POE
- O óleo POE é altamente higroscópico. A
sua capacidade de absorção de água é 15
vezes superior à do óleo mineral.
- Os contentores de óleo POE devem ser
metálicos e há que mantê-los abertos o
mínimo tempo que for possível. Depois
de serem utilizados, devem ser tapados
hermeticamente.
- Não abrir nunca um circuito ou um
compressor carregado com óleo POE
quando eles estiverem sob vácuo. No
caso de encontrarem-se sob pressão
atmosférica, não devem permanecer
abertos mais do que 15 minutos. No
caso contrário, deverá ser prevista uma
circulação de nitrogénio seco.
ar que se produzem em consequência
da alta pressão e da velocidade de
evaporação do gás.
- Garrafa de refrigerante. Apta para
umapressão de 47 bar e para conter
apenas R-410A (garrafa pintada de corde-rosa). Com adaptador para rosca de
1/2” UNF20.
- Detector de fugas. Específico para HFC.
Sensibilidade de, aproximadamente, 23 gr
por ano.
- Equipamento de recuperação. Unidade
específica para recuperar o R-410A..
- O óleo POE não pode ser misturado
com óleo mineral. Quando existirem
quantidades de óleo mineral superiores a
5% misturadas com óleo POE, produzirse-ão obstruções transitórias nos sistemas
de expansão.
- Recomenda-se o uso de filtros de
desidratação nos sistemas que utilizem
óleo POE.
- Quando o óleo POE se tiver contaminado
com água, não será suficiente uma bomba
de vácuo para eliminá-la. A presença
excessiva de humidade provocará a
aparição de lamas e ácidos que danificarão
o compressor. Por isso, o óleo contamina
do deverá ser substituído ou recuperado
por meio de filtros.
- Devido à sua elevada higroscopicidade,
o óleo POE pode causar queimaduras
na pele. Recomenda-se o uso de luvas
durante a sua manipulação.
- Os óleos POE aptos para os sistemas
R-410A são os seguintes:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
Espessuras mínimas das tubagens
Devido às maiores pressões de trabalho do
refrigerante R-410A, é preciso utilizar, para
a interligação das unidades divididas, tubos
de cobre DHP sem costuras e de parede
mais grossa.
Diâmetro do tubo
mm (polegadas)
Espessura mínima
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Ferramentas especiais
Para instalar equipamentos carregados
com refrigerante R-410A e óleo POE, há
que dispor das seguintes ferramentas:
- Manómetros. Específicos para o R-410A.
O de alta (de cor vermelha), com a escala
de -1 a 53 bar. O de baixa (de cor azul),
com a escala de -1 a 38 bar. Os dois
providos de ligações com rosca de 1/2”
UNF-20.
- Mangueiras. De borracha HNBR e com
forro interior de nylon. Pressão de trabalho
de 5,1 Mpa; pressão de ruptura de 27,4
Mpa. Rosca de 1/2” UNF-20.
- Bomba de vácuo. De vácuo elevado (duas
etapas) e com adaptador a fim de evitar
que uma parte do óleo mineral da bomba
possa fluir para o circuito carregado com
óleo POE. Provida de adaptador para
rosca de 1/2” UNF-20.
- Balança electrónica. Ela é precisa porque
não é possível carregar o R-410A ao usar
um cilindro de carga devido às bolhas de
Limites de utilização
Limites de voltagem
Temperatura entrada ar para a bateria exterior TS
Temperatura entrada ar para a bateria interior
Ciclo de funcionamento
Ciclo de funcionamento
Nom. 230 V
Mínimo °C
Máximo °C
Mínimo °C
Máximo °C
Mínimo
Máximo
Frio
Calor
Frio
Calor
Frio TH
Calor TS
Frio TH
Calor TS
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Notas: TH = Termómetro húmido. TS = Termómetro seco. (1) O equipamento pode trabalhar durante um curto intervalo de tempo a uma temperatura inferior ou superior
à do limite mínimo ou máximo, respectivamente, até conseguir condicionar a temperatura do ar do espaço ocupado.
14
88
P
by johnson controls
Especificações técnicas
EVJC
Modelo
Unidade exterior
09
12
18
24
Capacidades
Nominal em frio
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Nominal em calor
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Compressor
Rotativo
Refrigerante
R-410A
Expansão / localização
Capilar / unidade exterior
Alimentação eléctrica
V.ph.Hz
Consumo
frio / calor
Nível exterior de ruídos (1 m)
Diâm. ext. tubo de drenagem de condensados
Peso líquido
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
kg
16,5
35
36
Tipo de ligação
Afunilamento + Porca
Tubagem
Diâmetro de gás
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Diâmetro de líquido
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Comprimento máximo de tubagem
m
15
20
25
25
Desnível máximo das tubagens
m
5
10
10
10
Carga de refrigerante
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
A capacidade frigorífica nominal baseia-se em: Temp. do ar interior = 27°C TS / 19°C TH, Temperatura do ar exterior = 35°C TS, tubagens de 4 metros.
A capacidade calorífica nominal baseia-se em: Temp. do ar interior = 21°C TS, Temperatura do ar exterior = 7°C TS / 6°C TH, tubagens de 4 metros.
ATENÇÃO
O seu produto encontra-se marcado com este símbolo. Isto significa que no fim da sua vida útil não
deve ser misturado com o resto de resíduos domésticos não classificados, senão que a sua eliminação
deve ser realizada de acordo com a normativa local e nacional correspondente, de uma forma correcta
e respeitosa com o meio ambiente.
A desmontagem do condicionador de ar, bem como o tratamento do refrigerante, do óleo e doutros
componentes, deve ser efectuado por um instalador qualificado de acordo com a legislação aplicável.
Contacte as autoridades locais para obter mais informação.
Dados e medidas susceptíveis de variação sem aviso prévio.
P
15
89
by johnson controls
Istruzioni per l’installazione
Spazi liberi
Controllo
Lasciare attorno alle unità esterne il sufficiente spazio libero per non ostacolare la
circolazione dell’aria e per agevolare le
operazioni di manutenzione (vedere Dimensioni d’ingombro).
Al ricevimento, controllare la merce e comunicare per iscritto le eventuali anomalie
allo spedizioniere e alla compagnia assicuratrice.
Ecologia
Eliminare l’imballo attenendosi
alle norme vigenti per la raccolta selettiva dei rifiuti e la tutela
dell’ambiente.
Nell’effettuare l’installazione e la manutenzione, tener presente che utilizza R-410A
con olio POE.
Sicurezza
L’installazione e la manutenzione dell’impianto di climatizzazione devono essere
effettuate solo da tecnici qualificati. Perché
la resa delle unità sia sempre ottimale sono
necessarie operazioni di manutenzione periodiche, come la pulizia delle batterie e dei
filtri dell’aria.
Attenzione
L’apparecchio deve essere installato e utilizzato rispettando sempre:
- Normativa elettrotecnica di bassa tensione.
- Normativa di sicurezza per apparecchi e impianti frigoriferi.
- Normativa per gli apparecchi sotto pressione.
- Norme fondamentali di edilizia.
- Norme tecniche di edilizia.
- Ordinanze municipali.
Ubicazione (Figg. 1, 2 e 3)
L’unità deve essere installata all’esterno, collocandola su una base solida e fissandovela
mediante bulloni.
Unità esterne
Vengono fornite con una carica di refrigerante
R-410A sufficiente per un tubo di collegamento di 5 metri.
Le unità in versione pompa di calore sono
inoltre dotate di un raccordo a gomito per lo
scarico della condensa. Ogni compressore
è inoltre dotato di un rivestimento fonoassorbente per ridurne al minimo il livello sonoro.
Installazione
L’installazione dell’unità
comprende:
- Montaggio dell’unità.
- Collegamento dei tubi del refrigerante.
- Collegamento del tubo di scarico condensa nella versione pompa di calore.
- Impianto elettrico dell’unità.
16
90
Di conseguenza, per evitare il gocciolamento della condensa, entrambi i tubi devono
essere isolati con il materiale adeguato.
L’isolante deve avere uno spessore di a
meno 8 mm.
Svuotamento e disidratazione
Collegamento frigorifero tra le (Fig.5)
Al non poter essere liquefatta dal compresunità
Nell’installazione di unità split, al termine
dell’installazione si deve assicurare la perfetta tenuta del circuito frigorifero per garantire
l’assenza di fughe.
Ciò contribuirà ad ottenere le massime prestazioni con il minimo consumo ed eviterà gravi
guasti all’unità. È inoltre una precauzione ecologica.
Installazione dei tubi di
collegamento
La lunghezza dei tubi che collegano le unità deve essere la minima possibile.
Le distanze massime ammesse con il circuito ed il diametro dei tubi standard sono
indicate nel pertinente capitolo delle unità
interne corrispondenti.
Tubi da utilizzare
Nella realizzazione delle tubazioni che
uniscono le due unità si deve avere speciale cura nel mantenere puliti e asciutti
i tubi da utilizzare sin da prima della loro
installazione.
Tener inoltre presente quanto segue:
- Utilizzare solo tubi di rame di tipo frigorifero.
- Non effettuare lavori all’aperto se sta piovendo.
- Le estremità dei tubi dovranno rimanere chiuse per tutto il tempo in cui duri
l’installazione.
- Non lasciare esposti all’aria per più di uno
o due minuti i filtri deidratatori o il compressore.
- Per saldare, utilizzare elettrodi a basso punto di fusione e con un contenuto
d’argento di almeno il 5%.
- Durante la saldatura, e finché il tubo sia
caldo, mantenere una corrente di azoto
secco all’interno dello stesso per evitare la
formazione di ossidazioni che potrebbero
occasionare contaminazioni e ostruzioni.
- Nelle unioni rame-rame non impiegare
decapante.
- Il collegamento alle unità deve essere
effettuato con il metodo della svasatura.
sore, l’aria non agisce come refrigerante.
Pertanto, l’aria e l’umidità che siano potute
rimanere nel sistema di refrigerazione dovranno essere completamente eliminate,
poiché altrimenti potrebbero occasionare i
seguenti effetti indesiderati:
- Aumento della pressione di alta.
- Aumento del consumo elettrico.
- Diminuzione della resa dell’impianto.
- Possibilità che l’acqua contenuta nell’aria
si congeli, con la conseguente ostruzione
dei capillari.
- Possibilità che l’acqua corroda alcune
parti del circuito e provochi il deterioramento del compressore.
Procedimento da seguire
- Montare un adattatore alla pompa per evitare la contaminazione dell’olio POE.
- Collegare una pompa a vuoto e i manometri di servizio.
- Fare il vuoto sino al almeno 50 micron.
- Accertarsi che non ci siano perdite nel circuito del vuoto.
- Se il circuito non mantiene la depressione, cercare la fuga e ripararla.
Collegamenti frigoriferi
Particolarità del refrigerante R-410A
- Il refrigerante R410A è una miscela binaria
al 50% di HFC-32 e HFC-125. Il suo comportamento come gas refrigerante è quasi
azeotropico (glide inferiore a 0,17°K). Non
contiene cloro, per cui non danneggia lo
strato di ozono della stratosfera. Nonostante ciò, in caso di svuotamento del circuito, il gas deve essere sempre recuperato e
in nessun caso liberato nell’atmosfera.
- Rispetto all’R-22, l’R-410A lavora a pressioni superiori. Di un 60% nel lato di alta
e di un 75% nel lato di bassa (vedere la
tavola che segue).
Temperatura
°C
Pressione
R-410A bar g
-1
6,8
Isolamento dei tubi di
refrigerante (Fig. 4)
7
8,9
Dato che i tubi capillari si trovano nell’unità
esterna, sia il tubo di maggior diametro che
quello di minor diametro si trovano nel lato
di bassa pressione relativa del sistema.
43
25
54
32,6
I
by johnson controls
- Il refrigerante R-410A deve essere sempre
caricato in forma liquida. Se la bombola
non ha un tubo d’immersione, questa dovrà essere capovolta.
- Le bombole di refrigerante R-410A si distinguono per essere di color rosa.
- Al non contenere cloro, l’R-410A può essere impiegato assieme ad oli sintetici tipo
POE (poliolesteri)
- L’R410A non è infiammabile a pressione
atmosferica. Ciononostante, al contenere
un 50% di HFC-22, non deve essere mai
pressurizzato con aria o con un altro gas
che non sia l’azoto (come l’R-22).
- Quando l’olio POE si è contaminato con
l’acqua, una pompa a vuoto non è più
sufficiente per eliminarla. L’eccessiva presenza di umidità provocherà la comparsa
di fanghi e acidi che danneggeranno il
compressore. Pertanto, l’olio contaminato
deve essere sostituito o recuperato mediante filtri.
- Data la sua elevata igroscopicità, l’olio
POE può occasionare ustioni cutanee. Si
consiglia l’impiego di guanti quando lo si
maneggia.
- Gli oli POE adeguati per sistemi con
R-410A sono i seguenti:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
Particolarità dell’olio POE
- L’olio POE è altamente igroscopico. La sua
capacità di assorbimento dell’acqua è 15
volte superiore a quella dell’olio minerale.
- I contenitori dell’olio POE devono essere
metallici e si devono mantenere aperti il
minimo tempo possibile. Dopo l’uso devono essere richiusi ermeticamente.
- Non aprire mai, per nessun motivo, un circuito o un compressore carico di olio POE
che si trovi sotto vuoto. Quando si trovi a
pressione atmosferica, non deve rimanere aperto per più di 15 minuti, altrimenti si
deve prevedere una circolazione di azoto
secco.
- L’olio POE non può essere miscelato con
olio minerale. Quantità superiori al 5% di
olio minerale mischiate con l’olio POE causeranno ostruzioni transitorie nei sistemi di
espansione.
- Nei sistemi che utilizzano olio POE si raccomanda l’impiego di filtri disidratatori.
Utensili specifici
un cilindro di carica per le bollicine che si
producono a seguito dell’alta pressione e
della velocità di evaporazione del gas.
- Bombola di refrigerante. Idonea per una
pressione di 47 bar e per contenere solo
R-410A (verniciata di color rosa). Con
adattatore per filettatura da 1/2” UNF-20.
- Cercafughe. Specifico per HFC. Sensibilità
di circa 23 g/anno.
- Impianto di recupero. Specifico per R-410A.
Spessori minimi delle tubazioni
Date le maggiori pressioni di lavoro del refrigerante R-410A, per i collegamenti frigoriferi tra le unità è necessario impiegare tubi di
rame DHP senza commessura e con parete
molto erta.
Per l’installazione di apparecchi caricati con
refrigerante R-410A e olio POE si deve disporre dei seguenti strumenti:
- Manometri. Specifici per R-410A. Quello di
alta (di color rosso), con la scala da -1 a 53
bar. Quello di bassa (di color blu), con la
scala da -1 a 38 bar. Con raccordi filettati
da 1/2” UNF-20.
- Flessibili. Di gomma HNBR e rivestimento interno di nylon. Pressione di lavoro 5,1
Mpa, pressione di rottura 27,4 Mpa. Filettatura 1/2” UNF-20.
- Pompa a vuoto. A vuoto spinto (due stadi) e con adattatore per evitare che parte
dell’olio minerale della pompa vada verso
il circuito carico con olio POE. Con adattatore per filettatura 1/2” UNF-20.
- Bilancia elettronica. Necessaria perchénon
è possibile caricare R-410A impiegando
Diametro del tubo
mm (pulgadas)
Spessore minimo
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Limiti d’impiego
Limiti di tensione
Temperatura BA di entrata dell’aria nella batteria esterna
Temperatura entrada ar para a bateria interior
Ciclo di funzionamento
Ciclo di funzionamento
Nom. 230 V
Minimo °C
Massimo °C
Minimo °C
Massimo °C
Minimo
Massimo
Raffredd.
Riscald.
Raffredd.
Riscald.
Raffredd. BB
Riscald. BA
Raffredd. BB
Riscald. BA
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Note: BB = Termometro a bulbo bagnato. TS = Termometro a bulbo asciutto.
(1) Per un breve periodo di tempo l’apparecchio può lavorare a una temperatura al di fuori del limite per condizionare lo spazio occupato.
I
17
91
by johnson controls
Caratteristiche tecniche
EVJC
Modello
Unità esterna
09
12
18
24
Potenzialità
Raffreddamento
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Riscaldamento
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Compressore
Rotativo
Refrigerante
R-410A
Dispositivo di espansione/ubicazione
Alimentazione elettrica
Consumo
Capilar / unità esterna
V.ph.Hz
Raffred. / Riscald.
Livello di rumorosità (1 m)
Diam. esterno tubo scarico condensa
Peso netto
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
kg
16,5
35
36
Tipo di collegamento
Svasatura + Dado
Tubazione
Diametro gas
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Diametro liquido
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Lunghezza massima tubazione
m
15
20
25
25
Dislivello massimo dei tubi
m
5
10
10
10
Carica di refrigerante
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
La potenzialità di raffreddamento nominale si basa su: Temp. aria interna = 27°C BA/19°C BB, Temperatura aria esterna = 35°C BA, Lunghezza tubazioni 4 metri.
La potenzialità di riscaldamento nominale si bassa su: Temp. aria interna = 21°C BA, Temperatura aria esterna = 7°C BA/6°C BB, Lunghezza tubazioni 4 metri.
ATTENZIONE
Il prodotto è marchiato con questo simbolo. Ciò significa che al termine della vita utile non deve
essere mischiato con i rifiuti domestici generici, ma deve essere eliminato come previsto dalla
normativa municipale e nazionale pertinente, in modo corretto e rispettoso con l’ambiente.
La rottamazione del condizionatore d’aria e il trattamento del fluido refrigerante, dell’olio e degli altri
componenti deve essere effettuato da un installatore competente, come prescritto dalla legislazione
applicabile.
Per maggiori informazioni, rivolgersi alle autorità locali.
Dati e misure soggetti a variazioni senza preavviso.
18
92
I
by johnson controls
Hinweise zum Einbau
Einbau
Überprüfung
Die Installation des Geräts
umfasst:
Bei Erhalt der Ware muss diese sofort auf
mögliche Transportschäden überprüft werden.
Eventuelle Schäden müssen dem Spediteur
und der Versicherungsgesellschaft schriftlich
zur Anzeige gebracht werden.
Umweltschutz
Die Verpackung muss gemäß den
örtlichen Vorschriften entsorgt
werden.
Bei der Aufstellung und Wartung muss
berücksichtigt werden, dass das Gerät mit
HFC-410A und Polyolesteröl arbeitet.
Sicherheit
Einbau und Wartung dieses Klimageräts
dürfen nur von entsprechend zugelassenem
Fachpersonal
vorgenommen
werden. Zur Sicherstellung einer optimalen
Betriebsleistung müssen in regelmäßigen
Abständen die vorgeschriebenen Wartungsarbeiten (Reinigung der Batterien und
Luftfilter usw.) vorgenommen werden.
Vorsicht
Einbau und Einsatz dieses Klimageräts
müssen den folgenden Normen und
Verordnungen entsprechen:
- Verordnung für Niederspannungsgeräte.
- Verordnung zur Sicherheit von
Kühlanlagen und Kühlgeräten.
- Verordnung über Druckgeräte.
- Grundsätzliche Richtlinien für das
Baugewerbe.
- Technische Richtlinien für das
Baugewerbe.
- Kommunale Bauvorschriften.
Aufstellung und Freiraum
(Fig. 1 bis 3)
Das Gerät muss direkt im Freien zur
Aufstellung kommen. Hierbei muss die
Einheit auf einem stabilen Unterbau fest
verschraubt werden.
Außengeräte
Die Geräte werden mit einer für eine
Verbindungsleitung
von
5
Metern
ausreichenden Menge Kältemittel R-410A
ausgeliefert.
Jedes Gerät ist mit dem erforderlichen
Kondensatablauf
ausgestattet
(nur
bei Modellen mit Wärmepumpe). Zur
Reduzierung des Geräuschpegels sind
die Verdichter mit einer entsprechenden
Schallisolierung ausgerüstet.
- Montage des Geräts.
- Anschlüsse der Kältemittelleitung.
- Anschlüsse des Kondensatablaufs bei
den Einheiten mit Wärmepumpe.
- Elektrischer Anschluss des Geräts.
Freiräume, Außengerät
Für Wartungsarbeiten und zur Sicherstellung einer unbehinderten Luftzirkulation
ist um das Gerät herum der entsprechende
Freiraum vorzusehen. (Siehe Angaben
unter “Allgemeine Abmessungen”).
Verbindung der beiden Geräte
Bei der Aufstellung von Split-Geräten muss
nach Abschluss der Montage die absolute
Dichtigkeit des Kältekreises überprüft werden,
um auf diese Weise mögliche Leckstellen
vollkommen auszuschließen.
Hierdurch kann eine maximale Leistung bei
minimalem Energieverbrauch sichergestellt
und eine eventuelle Beschädigung der
Klimaanlage wirksam vermieden werden.
Eine absolute Dichtigkeit ist ferner auch ein
Gebot des Umweltschutzes.
Verlegung der
Verbindungsleitungen
Die Verbindungsleitung zwischen den
Einheiten muss so kurz als möglich gewählt
werden.
Die für einen standardmäßigen Kreislauf
mit normalen Leitungsdurchmessern maximal zulässigen Abstände ergeben sich
aus den diesbezüglichen Angaben bei den
entsprechenden Innengeräten.
Zu verwendende Rohre
Bei der Verlegung der Verbindungsleitung
zwischen den beiden Einheiten ist darauf
zu achten, dass die verwendeten Rohre
bereits vor ihrem Einsatz durchweg sauber
und trocken sind. Im weiteren sollten dann
die folgenden Empfehlungen beachtet
werden:
- Nur
kältetechnisches
Kupferrohr
verwenden.
- Bei Regen nicht unter freiem Himmel
arbeiten.
- Während der Installation müssen die
Rohrenden verschlossen sein.
- Trockenfilter und Verdichter nicht offen
stehen lassen.
- Beim Löten Lötstäbe mit niedrigem
Schmelzpunkt und mindestens 5% Silber
verwenden.
D
- Zur Vermeidung von zu Verschmutzung
und Verstopfung führendem Rost und
Zunder innerhalb der Leitung ist während
des Lötens und solange das Rohr noch
heiß ist ein Trockenstickstoffstrom
aufrechtzuerhalten.
- Bei Kupfer-Kupfer-Verbindungen darf kein
Beizmittel verwendet werden.
- Zur Verbindung mit den Geräten müssen
die Rohre aufgebördelt werden.
Isolierung der
Kältemittelleitung
Nachdem die Kapillarrohre im Außengerät
untergebracht sind, entsprechen sowohl
die dicke wie die dünne Leitung der
Niederdruckseite des Systems.
Zur Vermeidung von Kondenswasserschäden müssen die Leitungen deshalb
entsprechend
isoliert
werden.
Das
diesbezüglich verwendete Material sollte
hierbei eine Stärke von mindestens 8 mm
aufweisen. Siehe Fig. 4.
Evakuierung (Fig. 5)
Nachdem die Luft vom Verdichter nicht
verflüssigt
werden kann, wirkt sie nicht als
Kältemittel.
Die im Kältesystem verbleibende
Luft und Feuchtigkeit haben die weiter
unten
genannten negativen Auswirkungen zur
Folge und müssen deshalb vollständig
entfernt
werden.
- Es kommt zu einem Anstieg des
Hochdrucks.
- Es steigt der Stromverbrauch.
- Es kommt zu einem Leistungsverlust der
Anlage.
- Die in der Luft enthaltene Feuchtigkeit
kann zu einer Vereisung bzw. Blockierung
der Kapillarrohre führen.
- Das Wasser kann die verschiedensten
Bauteile im Kreis in Mitleidenschaft ziehen
sowie eine Beschädigung des Verdichters
hervorrufen.
Verfahren
- Zur Vermeidung einer Verschmutzung
des Polyolesteröls Pumpe mit einem
entsprechenden Adapter versehen.
- Vakuumpumpe und Betriebsmanometer
anschließen.
- Ein Hochvakuum von mindestens 50m.
herstellen.
- Eventuelle Leckstellen aufspüren.
- Sollten Leckstellen vorhanden sein, sind
diese umgehend zu beseitigen.
19
93
by johnson controls
Kälteanschlüsse
Typische Merkmale von Polyolesteröl
Typische Merkmale des Kältemittels
- Polyolesteröl ist hoch hygroskopisch.
Seine Wasseranziehungskraft ist 15 Mal
höher als die von Mineralöl.
- Polyolesteröl muss in Metallbehältern
gelagert werden, die so wenig als nur
irgend möglich offen stehen und nach
der Verwendung des Öls sofort wieder
hermetisch verschlossen werden sollten.
- Ein Polyolesteröl enthaltener Kreislauf
oder Verdichter darf bei Vakuum niemals
geöffnet werden. Bei normalem Druck
sollten Kreislauf bzw. Verdichter nicht
länger als 15 Minuten offen stehen.
Wird mehr Zeit benötigt, sollte für einen
entsprechenden
Trockenstickstoffstrom
gesorgt werden.
- Polyolesteröl darf nicht mit Mineralöl
vermischt werden. Ein Mineralölanteil
von mehr als 5% kann bei Polyolesteröl
zu vorübergehenden Verstopfungen im
Expansionssystem führen.
- Bei Systemen, die mit Polyolesteröl
arbeiten, wird der Einsatz von Trockenfiltern
empfohlen.
- Bei einer Verunreinigung des Öls durch
Wasser kann dies allein durch eine
Vakuumpumpe nicht mehr entfernt
werden. Bei einem übermäßig hohen
Anteil an Feuchtigkeit kommt es zur
Bildung von Schlämmen und Säuren, die
den Verdichter in Mitleidenschaft ziehen.
Verunreinigtes Öl sollte also sofort ersetzt
bzw. über Filter recycled werden.
- Aufgrund seiner hohen Hygroskopizität
kann Polyolesteröl zu Verbrennungen
auf der Haut führen. Beim Umgang
mit dem Produkt sollten deshalb stets
Schutzhandschuhe getragen werden.
- Für mit R-410A arbeitende Systeme
kommen die folgenden Polyolesteröle in
Frage:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
R-410A
- Das Kältemittel R-410A ist eine binäre
Mischung, die zu gleichen Teilen aus HFC32 und HFC-125 besteht. Als Kältegas
zeigt es ein fast azeotropisches Verhalten
(Schlupf unter 0,17°K). Es enthält kein
Chlor und wirkt sich so nicht negativ
auf die Ozonschicht der Erde aus. Wird
ein Kreislauf abgelassen, darf das Gas
jedoch nicht einfach in die Atmosphäre
entweichen, sondern muss entsprechend
aufgefangen werden.
- Verglichen mit dem Kältemittel R-22,
arbeitet R-410A bei höheren Drücken. Auf
der Hochdruckseite ist der Druck um 60%
und auf der Niederdruckseite um 75%
höher. Siehe hierzu die folgende Tabelle.
Temperatur
°C
Druck R-410A bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
43
25
54
32,6
- Das Kältemittel R-410A muss stets in
flüssiger Form eingefüllt werden. Hat
die Flasche kein Tauchrohr, muss sie
umgedreht werden.
- Die Flaschen mit R-410A haben
typischerweise eine rosa Färbung.
- Nachdem R-410A kein Chlor enthält, kann
es nur in Verbindung mit synthetischen Ölen
(Polyolesteröl) zum Einsatz kommen.
- R-410A ist unter normalem Druck nicht
entflammbar. Aufgrund seines 50%igen
Anteils an HFC-32 darf es jedoch (wie auch
das Kältemittel R-22) niemals zusammen
mit Luft oder einem anderen Gas als
Stickstoff unter Druck gesetzt werden.
von -1 bis 53 bar. Niederdruckmanometer
(blau) mit einer Skala von -1 bis 38 bar.
Jeweils mit ½»-Schraubanschlüssen UNF20.
- Schlauchmaterial: Aus HNBR-Kautschuk mit
innerer Nylonverkleidung. Betriebsdruck:
5,1 Mpa; Berstdruck: 27,4 Mpa. ½»Schraubanschluss UNF-20.
- Vakuumpumpe:
Für
Hochvakuum
(zwei Stufen) und mit Adapter, um zu
vermeiden, dass ein Teil des Mineralöls in
den mit Polyolesteröl beladenen Kreislauf
entweicht. Mit Adapter für ½»-Gewinde
UNF- 20.
- Elektronische Waage: Ist erforderlich, weil
R-410A aufgrund der hochdruckbedingten
Blasenbildung
und
der
schnellen
Verdampfung des Gases nicht über einen
normalen Einfüllstutzen eingefüllt werden
kann.
- Kältemittelflasche. Geeignet für einen
Druck von 47 bar zur Aufnahme von
R-410A (rosa Färbung). Mit Adapter für
½»-Gewinde UNF-20.
- Leckstellendetektor: Spezialdetektor für
HFC. Empfindlichkeit: ca. 23 g/Jahr.
- Recycling-Anlage: Spezialanlage zum
Recyclen von R-410A.
Mindestwandstärken der Leitungen
Aufgrund der bei R-410A höheren
Betriebsdrücke müssen die Geräte anhand
von nahtlosen Kupferrohren des Typs DHP
mit verstärkter Wand verbunden werden.
Rohrdurchmesser
mm (inches
Mindestwandstärke
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Spezifisches Werkzeug
Zur Aufstellung von mit Kältemittel R-410A
und Polyolesteröl arbeitenden Anlagen sind
die folgenden Hilfsmittel erforderlich:
- Manometer: Spezialmanometer für R- 410A.
Hochdruckmanometer (rot) mit einer Skala
Einsatzgrenzen
Spannungsgrenzen
Lufttemperatur bei Eintritt in die Außenbatterie TT
Lufttemperatur bei Eintritt in die Innenbatterie
Betriebszyklus
Betriebszyklus
Nom. 230 V
Minimum °C
Maximum °C
Minimum °C
Maximum °C
Minimum
Maximum
Kühlen
Heizen
Kühlen
Heizen
Kühlen TF
Heizen TT
Kühlen TF
Heizen TT
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Anm: TF = Thermometer feucht. TT = Thermometer trocken.
(1) Zur Klimatisierung des bereffenden Raums kann die Anlage kurzfristig auch mit einer Temperatur außerhalb der genannten Grenzen arbeiten.
20
94
D
by johnson controls
Technische Angaben
EVJC
Modell
Außengerät
09
12
18
24
Leistungswerte
Kühlbetrieb
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Heizbetrieb
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Verdichter
Rollkolben
Kältemitten
R-410A
Expansion/unterbringung
Kapillar / Außengerät
Elektr. Anschluß
V.ph.Hz
Kühlbetrieb /
Heizbetrieb
Consumption
Geräuschpegel außen (1 m)
Außendurchm. Kondensatablauf
Nettogewicht
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
kg
16,5
35
36
Anschlußart
Bördeln + Multer
Leitungen
Durchmesset Gas
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Durchmesser Flüssigkeit
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Maximale Leitungslänge
m
15
20
25
25
Max. Höhenunterschied der Leitung
m
5
10
10
10
Kältemittelmenge
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
Die Nenn-Kälteleistung basiert auf: Lufttemp. innen = 27°C TT/19°C TF, Lufttemp. außen = 35°C TT, Leitung 4 meter.
Die Nenn-Heizleistung besiert auf: Lufttemp. innen = 21°C TT, Lufttemp. außen = 7°C TT/6°C TF, Leitung 4 meter.
ACHTUNG
Ihr Produkt ist mit diesem Symbol versehen. Dies bedeutet, dass es bei Ablauf seiner Nutzungsdauer
nicht einfach mit dem übrigen Hausmüll beseitigt werden darf. Vielmehr muss es korrekt und
umweltgerecht in Übereinstimmung mit den diesbezüglich vor Ort geltenden Vorschriften entsorgt
werden.
Die Entsorgung des Klimageräts sowie die Weiterverwertung des Kältemittels, des Öls und aller
anderen Komponenten obliegt dem gesetzlich zuständigen Installateur.
Weitere Auskunft erhalten Sie bei den zuständigen Behörden vor Ort.
Technische Angaben und Maße können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden.
D
21
95
by johnson controls
Installatie-instructies
Vrije ruimten, buitenunit
Isoleren van de koelbuizen
Controle bij ontvangst
Er dient een minimale vrije ruimte rondom
de toestellen aangehouden te worden voor
de luchtcirculatie en een goede bereikbaarheid voor onderhoudswerkzaamheden
zoals onder algemene afmetingen aangegeven is.
Omdat de capillaire buizen in de buitenunits geïnstalleerd zijn, bevinden zich zowel
buis met de grootste als die met de kleinste doorsnede aan de lagedrukzijde van het
systeem.
Ter voorkoming van het druppelen van condensvocht op de vloer dienen beide buizen
goed geïsoleerd te worden. De dikte van
het isolatiemateriaal dient minimaal 8 mm
te bedragen, zie fig. 4.
Bij ontvangst dienen de goederen gecontroleerd te worden en bij eventuele gebreken dient het transportbedrijf en de verzekeringsmaatschappij hiervan schriftelijk op
de hoogte gesteld te worden.
Bescherming van het milieu
De verpakking dient overeenkomstig de door de gemeente vastgelegde milieuvoorschriften afgevoerd
te worden.
Bij het installeren en tijdens onderhoudswerkzaamheden er rekening mee houden dat er
HFK-410A met POE olie gebruikt wordt.
Veiligheid
De installatie- en onderhoudswerkzaamheden van dit airconditioningssysteem mogen
uitsluitend door deskundig en vakbekwaam
personeel uitgevoerd worden. Men dient periodieke onderhoudswerkzaamheden uit te
laten voeren, zoals het reinigen van de batterijen en luchtfilters, opdat het optimale rendement van de toestellen gewaarborgd wordt.
Voorzorgsmaatregelen
Dit toestel dient overeenkomstig de onderstaande richtlijnen geïnstalleerd en gebruikt te worden:
- Laagspanningsrichtlijn.
- Veiligheidsrichtlijn voor koelaggregaten en -installaties.
- Richtlijn drukapparaten.
- Standaard bouwnormen.
- Technische bouwnormen.
- Gemeentelijke bepalingen.
Plaats (fig. 1 t/m 3)
Het toestel is voor plaatsing buiten bedoeld.
Het toestel op een stevige voetplaat plaatsen en met schroeven hierop vastzetten.
Buitenunits
De toestellen worden geleverd met een
voldoende hoeveelheid koelmiddel R-410A
voor een leidinglengte van 5 meter. Bij elke
unit wordt een aansluitknietje voor de afvoer van het condensvocht bijgeleverd
(alleen bij modellen met warmtepomp).
Elke compressor is van geluidsisolatie voorzien om het geluidsniveau tot een minimum te beperken.
Installatie
De installatie van de unit omvat:
- Montage van het toestel.
- Aansluiten van de koelleiding.
- Aansluiten van de condensafvoer bij units
met warmtepomp.
- Elektrische installatie van de unit.
22
96
Onderling aansluiten van de
units
Bij het installeren van units van het type
splitsysteem dient de volledige afdichting
van het koelcircuit gecontroleerd te worden
na het beëindigen van de montagewerkzaamheden om de afwezigheid van lekken te
garanderen.
Dit draagt bij tot een maximaal rendement
bij een minimaal verbruik en voorkomt
ernstige storingen in de werking van de
unit. Het vormt tevens een belangrijke milieumaatregel.
Installeren van de aansluitleidingen tussen de units
De lengte van de aansluitleidingen tussen
de toestellen dient zo klein mogelijk te zijn.
De maximaal toelaatbare afstand tussen de
toestellen bij een standaard circuit en buisdoorsnede worden hieronder apart voor de
bijbehorende binnenunits aangegeven.
Te gebruiken buizen
Voor het aansluiten van de leidingen die
de beide units met elkaar verbinden, dient
men er voor te zorgen dat de te gebruiken
buizen reeds voor het installeren schoon
en droog gehouden worden. Wij adviseren
rekening te houden met de onderstaande
aanwijzingen:
- Uitsluitend koperbuis gebruiken van een
kwaliteit die geschikt is voor koelleidingen.
- Geen werkzaamheden buiten uitvoeren
wanneer het regent.
- De uiteinden van de buizen dienen afgesloten te blijven tijdens de duur van de installatiewerkzaamheden.
- De droogfilters noch de compressor langer dan één of twee minuten aan de omgeving blootstellen.
- Voor het solderen soldeerstaven gebruiken met een laag smeltpunt die minimaal 5% zilver bevatten.
- Tijdens het solderen en terwijl de buis nog
warm is, dient er een droge stikstofstroom
aangehouden te worden ter voorkoming
van roestvorming en een laag bladmetaal
aan de binnenzijde die verontreinigingen
en verstoppingen kunnen veroorzaken.
- Geen afbijtmiddel voor de koper-koper
verbindingen gebruiken.
- De toestellen dienen middels optrompen
aan elkaar gekoppeld te worden.
NL
Ledigen en ontvochtigen (fig. 5)
Lucht werkt niet als koelmiddel, omdat deze
door de compressor niet vloeibaar gemaakt kan worden. Lucht en vocht dat in het
koelsysteem achterblijft, heeft ongewenste
effecten zoals hieronder aangegeven is.
Daarom dient de lucht en het vocht geheel
verwijderd te worden.
- Verhoging van de hoge druk
- Toename van het stroomverbruik
- Vermindering van het rendement van het
toestel.
- Het water in de lucht kan bevriezen en de
membranen blokkeren.
- Het water kan op sommige plaatsen van
het circuit roest veroorzaken en de compressor beschadigen.
Werkwijze
Bij elk circuit met gesloten kleppen:
- Een verloopstuk op de pomp aansluiten
om verontreiniging van de POE olie te voorkomen.
- De vacuümpomp en de manometers op
het systeem aansluiten.
- Een vacuüm van minimaal 50 micron trekken.
- Controleren of het systeem het vacuüm
niet verliest.
- Is dit het geval, de lekken opsporen en ze
repareren.
Onderlinge koelaansluitingen
Bijzondere eigenschappen van het koelmiddel R-410A
- Het koelmiddel R-410A is een binair mengsel van 50% HFK-32 en HFK-125. Het koelgas gedraagt zich vrijwel azeotropisch
(verschuiving minder dan 0,17°K). Het bevat geen chloor in de samenstelling, waardoor het de ozonlaag niet schaadt. Toch
dient, als een circuit geledigd wordt, het
gas altijd opgevangen te worden en mag
dit in geen geval naar de atmosfeer uitgescheiden worden.
- In vergelijk met het R-22 werkt het koelmiddel R-401A bij hogere drukken. Zo’n
60% meer aan de hogedrukzijde en 75%
meer aan de lagedrukzijde. Zie bijgevoegde tabel.
by johnson controls
Temperatuur
°C
Druk R-410A bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
43
25
54
32,6
- Het koelmiddel R-410A moet altijd in vloeibare vorm gevuld worden. Als de fles niet
over een dompelslang beschikt, moet deze
tegengesteld gedraaid worden.
- De flessen met koelmiddel R-410A zijn
herkenbaar aan de roze kleur.
- Aangezien het geen chloor bevat, mag het
koelmiddel R-410A uitsluitend in combinatie met een synthetische olie van het type
POE (polyolester) gebruikt worden.
- Het koelmiddel R-410A is niet brandbaar
bij atmosferische druk. Omdat het echter
voor 50% uit HFK-32 bestaat, mag het nooit met lucht of een ander gas dan stikstof
onder druk gezet worden (net zoals het koelmiddel R-22).
Bijzondere eigenschappen van de POE
olie
- De POE olie is sterk hygroscopisch. Het
vermogen om water te absorberen is 15
maal groter dan dat van minerale olie.
- POE olie dient in metalen vaten verpakt
te zijn en de verpakking dient men zo kort
mogelijk geopend te laten. Na gebruik
dient de verpakking hermetisch afgesloten
te worden.
- Nooit een met POE olie gevuld circuit of
compressor openen, wanneer dit/deze
onder vacuüm is. Indien de olie onder atmosferische druk staat, mag dit/deze niet
langer dan 15 minuten geopend zijn. Is dit
niet het geval, dan dient een droge stikstofstroom voorzien te zijn.
- POE olie mag niet met minerale olie gemengd worden. Bij hoeveelheden van
meer dan 5% minerale olie die met POE
olie vermengd is, worden tijdelijke verstoppingen in de expansiesystemen veroorzaakt.
- Het gebruik van ontvochtigingsfilters wordt aanvolen voor systemen die POE olie
gebruiken.
- Wanneer POE olie met water verontreinigd is, is een vacuümpomp niet voldoende om het water te verwijderen. Eenteveel aan vocht veroorzaakt slib en zuren
die de compressor beschadigen. Daarom
dient de verontreinigde olie vervangen of
middels filter opgevangen te worden.
- Als gevolg van de hoge mate van hygroscopiciteit kan POE olie brandwonden op de
huid veroorzaken. Bij het werken met deze
olie strekt het dragen van handschoenen
ter aanbeveling.
- De POE oliën die geschikt voor systemen
met R-410A zijn:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
ge de bellen die door de hoge druk en de
verdampingssnelheid van het gas gevo
md worden.
- Koelmiddelfles. Geschikt voor een druk
van 47 bar en uitsluitend voor gebruik met
R-410A (in roze geverfd). Met verloopstuk
voor schroefdraad ½» UNF-20.
- Lekdetector. Speciaal voor HFK. Gevoeligheid ca. 23 g/jaar.
- Opvangvoorziening. Eenheid die speciaal
voor het opvangen van R-410A gebruikt
wordt.
Minimale dikten van de leidingen
Als gevolg van de hoge bedrijfsdrukken van
het koelmiddel R-410A dient voor het op
elkaar aansluiten van de toestellen van het
split-systeem naadloze DHP koperpijpen
met een dikkere wand gebruikt te worden.
Specifiek gereedschap
Om toestellen te kunnen installeren die met
het koelmiddel R-410A en POE olie gevuld
zijn, dient men over het volgende gereedschap te beschikken:
- Manometers. Speciaal voor R-410A. De
persdrukmanometer (rood), met de schaal
van -1 tot 53 bar. De zuigdrukmanometer
(blauw), met de schaal van –1 tot 38 bar.
Met schroefverbindingen ½» UNF-20.
- Slangen. Van HNBR rubber en met nylon
voering. Bedrijfsdruk 5,1 Mpa, breekdruk
27,4 Mpa. Schroefdraad ½» UNF-20.
- Vacuümpomp. Voor hoogvacuüm (2 trappen) en met een verloopstuk om te voorkomendat de minerale olie van de pomp
naar het met POE olie gevulde circuit vloeit.
Met verloopstuk met schroefdraad - - Elektronische weegschaal. Deze heeft
men nodig, omdat het niet mogelijk is R410A met een vulcilinder te vullen vanwe-
Buisdoorsnede
mm (inch)
Minimale dikte
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Gebruikslimieten
Spanningsgrenzen
Temperatuur bij luchtinlaat van buitenbatterij DT
Temperatuur bij luchtinlaat van binenbatterij
Bedrijfscyclus
Bedrijfscyclus
Nom. 230 V
Minimum °C
Maximum °C
Minimum °C
Maximum °C
Minimum
Maximum
Koeling
Verwarming
Koeling
Verwarming
Koeling NB
Verwarming DB
Koeling NB
Verwarming DB
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Nota’s: NB = natte bol. DB = droge bol.
(1) Her toestel kan gedurende korte tijd met temperaturen werken die buiten de grenzen vallen om de ruimte te kunnen verwarmen.
NL
23
97
by johnson controls
Technische specificaties
EVJC
Model
Buitenunit
09
12
18
24
Vermogen
Koeling
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Verwarming
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Compressor
Roterend
Koelmiddel
R-410A
Expansie/plaats
Capillair / Buitenunit
Voedingsspanning
Verbruik
V.ph.Hz
Koeling / Verwarming
Geluidsniveau (1 m)
Uitw. doorsnede afvoerbuis
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
Nettogewicht
kg
16,5
35
36
Tipe verbinding
Optrompen + Moer
Leiding
Diameter gasleiding
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Diameter vloeistofleiding
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Max. leidinglengte
m
15
20
25
25
Maximaal niveauvershil van de leiding
m
5
10
10
10
Koelmiddelvulling
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
Het nominale koelvermogen is gebaseerd op: binnenluchttemperatuur = 27°C DB/19°C NB, Buitenluchttemperatuur = 35°C DB, leidinglengte 4 meter.
Het nominale verwamingvermogen is gebasserd op: binnenluchttemperatuur = 21°C DB, Buitenluchttemperatuur = 7°C DB/6°C NB, leidinglengte 4 meter.
LET OP
Uw product is van dit symbool voorzien. Dit betekent dat het product aan het eind van zijn levensduur niet
als het huisvuil weggeggoid mag worden maar op correcte en milieuvriendelijke wijze overeenkomstig
de van kracht zijnde plaatselijke en landelijke regelgeving afgevoerd dient te worden.
Het demonteren van de airconditioner alsmede de verwerking van het koelmiddel, olie en andere
onderdelen dient door een bevoegd installateur overeenkomstig de van toepassing zijnde wetgeving
uitgevoerd te worden.
Voor nadere informatie kunt u contact met de plaatselijke overheid opnemen.
Gegevens en maten aan mogelijke wijzigingen onderhevig zonder kennisgeving vooraf.
24
98
NL
by johnson controls
Installasjonsinstrukser
Fritt rom, utvendig enhet
Tømming og tørking (Fig. 5)
Inspisering
Det kreves et minimalt fritt rom rundt
enhetene for å sikre luftsirkulasjonen og
plass nok til å foreta vedlikeholdsarbeid, slik
det angis under generelle dimensjoner.
Luften virker ikke som kjølemiddel fordi den
ikke kan gjøres flytende av kompressoren.
Luften og fuktigheten som blir igjen
inne i avkjølingssystemet, har skadelige
virkninger, se nedenfor, og bør derfor
elimineres.
- Øker trykket oppover.
- Øker strømforbruket.
- Nedsetter apparatets yteevne.
- Vannet som finnes i luften kan fryse og
blokkere kapillarrørene.
- Som følge av vannet kan deler av kretsen
ruste og derved forringe kompressoren.
Når man mottar apparatet, må man
undersøke det nøye, og underrette
transportfirmaet og forsikrtingsselskapet
om enhver uregelmessighet.
Miljøvern
Emballasjen
må
elimineres
i
henhold
til
gjeldende
miljøvernforordninger.
Under installasjonen og vedlikeholdsarbeid
må man ha i minne at i dette apparatet
brukes det HCF-410A med POEolje.
Sikkerhet
Installasjonen og vedlikeholdsarbeidene av
dette luftkondisjoneringssystemet må kun
foretas av kvalifiserte fagfolk. Det må gjøres
regelmessig vedlkehold, som rengjøring
av batteriene og luftfiltre for å oppnå en
maksimal effektivitet av enhetene.
Forholdsregler
Dette apparatet må installeres og
brukes i samsvar med:
- Elektrotekniske
lavspenningsforskrifter.
- Sikkerhetsreglement for
kjøleinstallasjoner og
kjøleanlegg.
- Reglement for trykkapparater.
- Grunnleggende bygningsregler.
- Tekniske bygningsregler.
- Kommunale forskrifter.
Plassering (fig. 1 til 3)
Apparatet må plasseres direkte utendørs.
Sett enheten på et solid underlag, og fest
den med skruer.
Utvendige enheter
De utvendige enhetene leveres med en
ladning kjølemiddel R-410A, tilstrekkelig til
en sammenkoblingsrørlengde på 5 meter.
Hver enhet har et koblingsknerør, for
drenasje av kondens (bare i modeller med
varmepumpe). Hver kompressor er utstyrt
med en lydisolert kasse for å redusere
støynivået til et minimum.
Installasjon
Installasjonen av enheten
omfatter:
- Montering av enheten.
- Koblinger av kjølerør.
- Koblinger av kondensdrenasje i enheter
med varmepumpe.
- Elektrisk installasjon av enheten.
Sammenkobling av enhetene
Etter montering av Split enheter må man
sjekke at kjølekretsen er fullstendig vanntett
for å forhindre lekkasjer.
Dette vil bidra til å oppnå maksimal ytelse
av apparatet med minimalt forbruk, og til
å forebygge alvorlige skader på enheten.
Det er dessuten også en økologisk
forholdsregel.
Montering av
sammenkoblingsrørene
Sammenkoblingsrørene må være så korte
som mulig.
Maksimalt tillatte avstander med hensyn
til kretsen og standard rørdiameter er
angitt under hvert avsnitt som behandler
tilsvarende innvendige enheter.
Hvilken type rør som bør anvendes
Ved sammenkobling av to enheter må man
være spesielt nøye med at rørene som
skal brukes holdes rene og tørre før de
monteres.
Vi anbefaler følgende forholdsregler:
- Bruk kun kobberrør av kjølekvalitet.
- Utfør ikke arbeid utendørs hvis det
regner.
- Rørendene må holdes tildekket så lenge
installeringen varer.
- La ikke tørkefiltrene eller kompressoren
stå ute.
- Til sveising bør man bruke stenger med
lavt smeltepunkt, og med minst 5%
sølvinnhold.
- Under sveisingen og så lenge røret er
varmt, må man holde gående en strøm av
tørrnitrogen for å unngå at det blir liggende
rust og spon inne i røret som kunne
forårsake forurensning og blokkeringer.
- Ved koblinger av to kobberrør, må man
ikke bruke etsende midler.
- Koblingen til enhetene må gjøres ved
hjelp av utvidelsesmetoden.
Isolering av kjølerør
Ettersom kapillarrørene er installert i
utvendig enhet, står både røret med den
største diameteren og det med den minste
diameteren på den siden av systemet hvor
det er lavest relativt trykk.
Følgelig, for å unngå at kondensert vann
fra rørene skal dryppe på gulvet, bør
begge rørene isoleres med et passende
isolasjonsmateriale.
Dette må være minst 8 mm tykt, se figur 4.
N
Prosess
- Monter en tilpasser til pumpen for å
forhindre forurensning av POE-oljen.
- Kople vakuumpumpen og trykkmålerne til
systemet.
- Gjørhøyvakuum inntil 50 mikroner.
- Sjekk at systemet ikke taper vakuum.
- Hvis dette skjer, må man finne lakkasjene
og reparere dem.
Sammenkoblinger av kjølerør
Kjølemiddelet R-410A’s karakteristiske
egenskaper
- Kjølemiddelet R410A er en binærblanding
av 50% HFC-32 og HFC-125. Som
kjølegass opptrer den nesten azeotropisk
(glidning under 0,17°K). Det finnes ikke
klor i dens sammensetning, og den er
følgelig ikke skadelig for atmosfærens
ozonlag. Hvis man skal tømme en krets
må man imidlertid alltid sende gassen til
gjenvinning, aldri kaste den direkte ut i
luften.
- Sammenlignet med R-22, arbeider
R- 410A ved høyere trykk. 60% mer
på høytrykkssiden, og 75% mer på
lavtrykkssiden.
Se vedlagt tabell.
Temperatur
°C
Trykk R-410A bar g
-1
6,8
7
8,9
43
25
54
32,6
- Kjølemiddelet R-410A må alltid fylles i
flytende form. Hvis beholderen ikke har
nedsenkningsrør, må den plasseres bak
fram.
- Kjølemiddelet R-410A’s beholdere skiller
seg ut ved sin lyserøde farge.
- På grunn av at kjølemiddelet R-410A
ikke inneholder klor, kan det bare brukes
sammen med syntetisk olje av typen POE
(Polyol Ester).
25
99
by johnson controls
- R-410A er
ikke
antennbart
ved
atmosfæretrykk. Men ettersom det
inneholder 50% HFC-32, må det aldri
settes under trykk med luft eller andre
gasser, bare med nitrogen (det samme
som for R-22).
POE-oljens karakteristiske egenskaper
- POE-oljen er høyhygroskopisk. Den har
en vannabsorberingskapasitet som er 15
ganger større enn minerloljens.
- POE-oljebeholderne må være av metall og
holdes åpne så kort tid som mulig. Etter
bruk må de lukkes hermetisk.
- Man må aldri åpne en krets eller
en kompressor fylt med POE-olje
under vakuum. Hvis den står under
atmosfæretrykk, kan den holdes åpen i
høyden 15 minutter. I motsatt fall må man
sørge for å holde gående en sirkulasjon av
tørrnitrogen.
- POE-oljen kan ikke blandes med mineralolje.
Oljemengder med mer enn 5% mineralolje
blandet med POE vil forårsakeforbigående
blokkeringer i ekspansjonssystemene.
- Man anbefales å bruke dehydratiserte filtre
i de systemene som bruker POE-oljen.
- Hvis POE-oljen blir forurenset av vann,
er det ikke nok med en vakuumpumpe
for å eliminere vannet. Hvis det finnes
for mye fuktighet, vil dette forårsake
mudder- og syredannelser som vil skade
kompressoren. Den forurensete oljen må
derfor skiftes eller gjenvinnes med filtre.
- På grunn av POE-oljens store tendens
til vannopptak, kan den forårsake
hudbrannsår. Man anbefales å bruke
hansker ved enhver manipulering.
- Følgende POE-oljer kan anvendes i
R-410A-systemene:
MOBIL EAL ARCTIC 22 CC (ICI)
EMKARATE RL32CF (ICI)
Spesielt verktøy
For installering av systemer fylt med
kjølemiddel R-410A og POE-olje, må man
bruke følgende type verktøy:
(malt i rosa farge). Med tilpasser for ½”
UNF-20 skruegjenge.
- Lekkasjesøker. Spesifikk for HFC.
Sensitivitet: ca. 23 g/år.
- Gjenvinningsutstyr. Spesifikk enhet for
gjenvinning av R-410A.
Minimumstykkelser på rørledningene
På grunn av de høyere arbeidstrykkene
som følge av kjølemiddelet R-410A, er
det nødvendig, når man skal forene delte
enheter, å bruke DHP kobberrør uten skjøter
og med tykkere vegger.
- Trykkmålere. Spesifikke for R-410A. En for
høytrykk (rødfarget), med en skala fra –1
til 53 bar. En for lavtrykk (blåfarget), med
en skala fra –1 til 38 bar. Med ½” UNF-20
skruforbindelser.
- Slanger. Av HNBR-gummi, med innvendig
nylonfôr. Arbeidstrykk 5,1 Mpa, bruddstyrke
27,4 Mpa. ½” UNF-20 skruegjenge.
- Vakuumpumpe. Med høyt vakuum (to
faser) og tilpasser for å forhindre at noe
av mineraloljen i pumpen skal renne mot
kretsen fylt med POE-olje. Med tilpasser
for ½” UNF-20 skruegjenge.
- Elektronisk vekt. Denne er nødvendig fordi
det ikke er mulig å fylle R-410A ved hjelp av
en fyllingssylinder, på grunn av de boblene
som utvikler seg som følge av det høye
trykket og gassfordamningshastigheten.
- Kjølemiddelbeholder. Egnet for et trykk
på 47 bar, og skal bare inneholde R-410A
Rørdiameter
mm (tommer)
Minimumstykkelse
mm
6,35 (1/4")
0,76
9,52 (3/8")
0,812
12,70 (1/2")
0,812
Begrensninger for bruk
Spenningsgrense
Temp. luftinntak utv. batteri TS
Temp. luftinntak innv. batteri
Driftssykel
Driftssykel
Nom. 230 V
Min. °C
Maks. °C
Min. °C
Maks. °C
Min.
Maks.
Kulde
Varme
Kulde
Varme
Kulde TH
Varme TS
Kulde TH
Varme TS
198
254
19
-15
50
24
15
10(1)
23 (1)
32
Merk: TH = fuktig termometer. TS = tørt termometer.
(1) Apparetet ken arbeide et kort tidsrom ved en temperatur utenfor de gitte grensene inntil det ønskede temperaturen er oppnådd.
26
100
N
by johnson controls
Tekniske data
EVJC
Modell
Utvendig enhet
09
12
18
24
Kapasitet
Kulde
kW
2.5 (1.2 ~ 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 ~ 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 ~ 6.8)
Varme
kW
2.8 (1.2 ~ 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 ~ 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 ~ 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 ~ 8.0)
Kompressor
Roterente
Kjølemiddel
R-410A
Forlengelse/Plassering
Kapillær / Utvendig enhet
Strømforsyning
Forbruk
V.ph.Hz
Kulde / Varme
Utvebdug støynivå (1 m.)
Diameter utvendig drensrør for kondens
230.1.50
kW
0.74 / 0.75
1.06 / 1.10
1.60 / 1.62
1.98 / 1.93
dB (A)
51
52
53
54
47
50
mm
Nettovekt
kg
16,5
35
36
Type kobling
Utvidelse + Skrumunning
Rørsystem
Diameter gass
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2”
Diameter væske
1/4”
1/4"
1/4"
1/4”
Maksimal lengde rørsystem
m
15
20
25
25
Maks. Høydeforskjell Rørsystemlengde
m
5
10
10
10
Fulling av kjølevæske
g
800
1 150
1 100
1 400
Den nominell kjølekapasiteten baserer seg på: Temperatur innvendig luft = 27°C TS/19°C TH, Temperatur utvendig luft = 35°C TS, rørsystem 4 meter.
Den nominell varmekapasiteten baserer seg på: Temperatur innvendig luft = 21°C TS, Temperatur utvendig luft= 7°C TS/6°C TH, rørsystem 4 meter.
OBS
Ditt produkt er merket med dette symbolet. Det betyr at etter endt levetid kan det ikke blandes med
annet usortert husholdningsavfall, og må elimineres i henhold til gjeldende miljøvernlovgivning.
Demonteringen av luftkondisjoneringsapparatet og behandlingen av kuldemediet, oljen og andre
komponenter må foretas av en kvalifisert installatør i samsvar med gjeldende lovgivning.
Ta kontakt med lokale myndigheter hvis du ønsker mer informasjon.
Data og ytelser er til orientering og kan endres uten varsel.
N
27
101
102
DECLARACION CE DE CONFORMIDAD SOBRE MAQUINAS
FABRICANTE:
JOHNSON CONTROLS MANUFACTURING ESPAÑA, S.L.
DIRECCIÓN:
Paseo Espronceda, 278, 08204 SABADELL
Certificamos que el equipo descrito, ha sido diseñado, fabricado y probado de conformidad con los requisitos básicos de la Directiva de Equipos a
presión 97/23/CEE y sus correspondientes módulos de aplicación. Así mismo certificamos que el equipo es conforme a las exigencias básicas de las
Directivas Europeas que le son aplicables, incluidas las modificaciones de las mismas y las correspondientes transposiciones a la ley nacional.
APLICACIÓN DE LA MÁQUINA: Aire Acondicionado/Refrigeración
TIPO:
EVJC 09, 12, 18, 24 DSAAAR
CATEGORIA D.E.P. : I (50 < PSxV < 200)
Módulo de evaluación : A
DIRECTIVAS DE LA CE APLICADAS:
NORMAS ARMONIZADAS APLICADAS:
NORMAS INTERNACIONALES Y
ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS APLICADAS:
LUGAR:
98/37/CEE, 2006/95/CEE, 2004/108/CEE, 97/23/CEE
EN12100-1, EN12100-2, EN563, EN294, EN953, EN378, EN60335-1,
EN60335-2-40, EN61000-3, EN55014-1, EN55014-2, EN55104
EN ISO 9001, EN ISO 14001
Sabadell, (España)
FIRMA:
ROMÁN LARRODA
JEFE DE GESTIÓN DE CALIDAD
CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
MANUFACTURER:
JOHNSON CONTROLS MANUFACTURING ESPAÑA, S.L.
ADDRESS:
Paseo Espronceda, 278, 08204 SABADELL
We hereby certify that the mentioned equipment has been designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with essential requirements of Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EEC and its relevant application modules. We futher certify that the equipment complies with the essential requirements
of the European Directives applicable, including their modifications and the corresponding transpositions from the national law.
MACHINE APPLICATION: Air Conditioning / Refrigeration
TYPE: EVJC 09, 12, 18, 24 DSAAAR
P.E.D. CATEGORY. : I (50 < PSxV < 200)
Assessment Module : A
EEC DIRECTIVES APPLIED:
APPLIED HARMONIZED STANDARDS:
APPLIED INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL STANDARDS
AND SPECIFICATIONS:
PLACE:
98/37/EEC, 2006/95/EEC, 2004/108/EEC, 97/23/EEC
EN12100-1, EN12100-2, EN563, EN294, EN953, EN378, EN60335-1,
EN60335-2-40, EN61000-3, EN55014-1, EN55014-2, EN55104
EN ISO 9001, EN ISO 14001
Sabadell, (Spain)
SIGNED BY:
ROMÁN LARRODA
QUALITY MANAGER
103
www.johnsoncontrols.com
104
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24 DSAAAR
by johnson controls
Ref: 40344-1109M
E
Minisplit mural con tecnología Inverter
Instrucciones de Instalación .............................................................................................................................. 6
GB
High Wall Minisplit with Inverter technology
Installation Instructions ...................................................................................................................................... 7
F
Minisplit mural à technologie Inverter
Instructions d’installation ................................................................................................................................... 8
P
Mini-split mural com tecnologia Inverter
Instruções de Instalação.................................................................................................................................... 9
I
Minisplit a parete con tecnologia Inverter
Istruzioni per l’installazione.............................................................................................................................. 10
D
Minisplit-Wangerät mit Inverter-Technik
Hinweise zum Einbau ...................................................................................................................................... 11
NL
Minisplit unit voor wandbevestiging met Inverter technologie
Installatie-instructies ........................................................................................................................................ 12
N
Vegg-minisplit med Inverter-teknologi
Instruksjoner for innstallering........................................................................................................................... 13
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. participa en el Programa de Certificación EUROVENT.
Los productos se corresponden con los relacionados en el Directorio EUROVENT de Productos
Certificados, en el programa AC1, AC2, AC3, LCP y FC.
El LCP, abarca plantas enfriadoras condensadas por aire y bombas de calor hasta 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. partecipa al Programma di Certificazione EUROVENT.
I prodotti interessati figurano nell’Annuario EUROVENT dei Prodotti Certificati, nel programma AC1,
AC2, AC3, LCP e FC.
Il programma LCP è valido per refrigeratori d’acqua raffreddati ad aria e pompe di calore sino a 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. is participating in the EUROVENT Certification Programme.
Products are as listed in the EUROVENT Directory of Certified Products, in the program AC1, AC2,
AC3, LCP and FC.
The LCP program covers air condensed water chillers and heat pumps of up to 600 kW
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. ist am Zertifikationsprogramm EUROVENT beteiligt.
Die entsprechend gekennzeichneten Produkte sind im EUROVENT-Jahrbuch im Programm AC1, AC2,
AC3, LCP und FC. enthalten.
Das LCP- Programm umfasst luftgekühlte Kühlanlagen und Wärmepumpe bis 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. participe au Programme de Certification EUROVENT.
Les produits figurent dans l’Annuaire EUROVENT des Produits Certifiés, dans le programme AC1,
AC2, AC3, LCP et FC.
Le programme LCP recouvre les groupes refroidisseurs de liquides froid seul et réversible, à
condensation par air jusqu’à 600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. neemt deel aan het EUROVENT-certificatieprogramma.
De produkten zijn opgenomen in het EUROVENT-jaarboek van de gecertificeerde produkten, in de
programma AC1, AC2, AC3, LCP en FC.
Het LCP programma omvat door lucht gecondenseerde koelaggregaten en warmtepompen tot
600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. participa no Programa de Certificação EUROVENT.
Os produtos correspondem aos referidos no Directório EUROVENT de Produtos Certificados, no
programa AC1, AC2, AC3, LCP e FC.
O programa LCP abrange instalações arrefecedoras condensadas por ar e bombas de calor até
600 kW.
Johnson Controls Manufacturing España, S.L. deltar i EUROVENT sertifiseringsprogram.
Produktene er oppført i EUROVENT’s katalog over sertifiserte produkt, i kategoriene AC1, AC2, AC3,
LCP og FC.
LCP-programmet omfatter luftkondenserte kjøleanlegg og varmepumper opptil 600 kW..
105
by johnson controls
2
106
by johnson controls
Fig. 1
> 15 cm
1
2
> 15 cm
> 15 cm
3
4
> 70 cm
5
> 15 cm
6
> 30 cm
> 50 cm
> 200 cm
7
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
5º
3
107
by johnson controls
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
OK
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
6
B
7
5
4
108
1
Panel frontal
Front panel
Panneau frontal
Painel frontal
Pannello frontale
Frontblende
Frontpaneel
Frontpanel
4
Filtros
Filters
Filtres
Filtros
Filtri
Filter
Filters
Filtre
2
Interruptor ON/OFF
ON/OFF switch
Interrupteur ON/OFF
Interruptor ON/OFF
Interruttore ON/OFF
EIN/AUS-Schalter
Strömbrytare ON/OFF
5
Cinta vinilo
Vinyl tape
Ruban de vinyle
Fita de vinilo
Nastro vinilico
Klebeband
Vinyltape
3
Tapa de conexiones eléctricas
Wire connection cover plate
Couvercle de connexions électriques
Tampa de conexões eléctricas
Coperchio dei collegamenti elettrici
Abdeckung elektrische Anschlüsse
Deksel voor elektrische aansluitingen
Lokk over elektriske koblinger
6
Manguera de desagüe
Drain hose
Tuyau de drainage
Mangueira de desaguamento
Tubo scarico condensa
Kondensatablauf
Afvoerslang
Avløpsslange
7
Cable de interconexión
Interconnecting cable
Câblage d’interconnexion
Cabo de interligação
Cavo di collegamento
Verbindungskabel
Aansluitkabel
Forbindelsesledninger
by johnson controls
Dimensiones generales / General dimensions mm / Dimensions générales / Dimensões gerais
Dimensioni d’ingombro / Algemeine abmessungen / Algemene afmetingen / Generelle dimensjoner
EVKC 09 , 12, 18, 24
A
B
C
EVKC 09
A
B
C
170
790
265
EVKC 12
180
845
275
EVKC 18
200
940
298
EVKC 24
208
1 060
330
Datos físicos / Physical data / Données physiques / Dados físicos
Dati tecnisi / Physikalische Angaben / Fysieke gegevens / Fysiske data
Modelo / Model / Modèle / Modelo / Modello / Modell /
Model / Modell
EVKC 09
EVKC 12
EVKC 18
EVKC 24
Capacidades / Capacities / Puissances / Capacidades / Potenza / Leistungsangaben / Vermogens / Kapasiteter
Frigoríficas / Cooling / Frigorifiques /
Frigorifícas / Frigorifera / Kühlleistung
/ Koelvermogen / Avkjøling
kW
2.5 (1.2 - 3.1)
3.5 (1.2 - 3.8)
5.3 (1.3 - 6.2)
6.4 (1.4 - 6.8)
Caloríficas / Heating / Calorifiques /
Caloríficas / Termica / Heizleistung /
Verwarmingsvermogen / Oppvarming
kW
2.8 (1.2 - 3.8)
4.0 (1.3 - 4.7)
5.8 (1.3 - 6.3)
7.0 (1.3 - 8.0)
Caudal / Flow / Débit / Caudal / Portata / Durchsatz / Luchtdebiet / Strøm
(Velocidad alta) / (High speed)
(Grande vitesse) / (Velocidade elevada)
(Velocità alta) / (Hohe Geschwindigkeit)
(Hoge snelheid) / (Høy hastighet)
m3/h
500
560
850
900
m3/s
0,14
0,16
0,24
0,25
Control / Control / Contrôle / Controlo
Comando / Bedienung / Regeling / Kontroll
Infrarrojos / Infrared rays / Infrarouges / Infravermelhos
Infrarossi / Ir / Infrarood / Infrarød
Conexiones frigoríficas / Cooling connections / Liaisons frigorifiques / Ligações frigoríficas / Collegamenti frigoriferi / Kälteanschlïsse / Koelaansluitingen / Kjølekoblinger
Diametro mayor / Larger diameter / Diamètre le plus grand
/ Diâmetro maior / Tubo di diam. maggiore / Durchm. dickes
Rohr / Grootste diameter / Største diam.
3/8”
1/2”
1/2”
1/2”
Diametro menor / Smaller diameter / Diamètre le plus petit
/ Diâmetro menor / Tubo di diam. minore / Durchm. dünnes
Rohr / Kleinste diameter / Minste diameter
1/4”
1/4”
1/4”
1/4”
Peso aproximado / Approximate weight / Poids approximatif / Peso aproximado / Peso approssivativo / Ungefähres Gewicht / Gewicht (ong.) / Tilnærmet vekt
Neto / Nett / Net / Líquido / Netto / Netto /
Netto / Netto
kg
9
11
13
16
5
109
by johnson controls
Instrucciones de instalación Drenaje de condensados
Inspección
En su recepción, inspeccionar la mercancía y comunicar por escrito las posibles
anomalías al transportista y a la Compañía
de Seguros.
Protección del medio ambiente
Eliminen el embalaje según la reglamentación vigente para la preservación del medio ambiente.
Instalación unidad interior
Fijar la placa de montaje a la pared. Apretar los tornillos ligeramente.
Nivelar la placa de montaje y a continuación, apretar los tornillos a fondo. (fig. 2).
Si se sacan las tuberías por la parte posterior de la unidad, taladrar un agujero de
diametro 50 mm, en la pared. El lado exterior del agujero debe estar ligeramente por
debajo del interior, (fig. 3 y 7). Instalar el
pasa muros.
Se pueden instalar las líneas de refrigerante en diversas posiciones, (fig. 6).
Instalación de las tuberías de interconexión e instalación eléctrica, con la
placa de montaje central ubicada en la
parte posterior del chasis.
Colgar la parte superior de la unidad sobre
el panel de montaje y presionarla hacia delante. Fijar la unidad interior a la placa de
montaje de modo permanente. Doblar la
tubería con cuidado de no aplastarla u
obstruirla.
Pasar la tubería y los cables de la unidad
por el agujero; y colgar la parte superior de
la unidad interior sobre el canto superior de
la placa de montaje, (ver fig. 2).
Asegúrese de que la unidad esté bien colocada, desplazándola primero a la izquierda
y luego a la derecha.
El tubo de drenaje de la unidad es flexible
y puede colocarse en diversas posiciones.
La línea de drenaje debe incluir un codo
(en forma de U) (fig. 4). Conectar un tubo
de drenaje de condensados de plástico
con un diámetro interior de 12 mm.
El tubo de drenaje debe fijarse a las líneas
de refrigeración con cinta de vinilo ver fig. 6.
Antes de dar por finalizada la
instalación
Verificar:
- El voltaje está siempre entre
198-254 V.
- La sección de los cables de alimentación es, como mínimo, la
aconsejada.
- El desagüe de condensados se
realiza perfectamente y no hay
fugas en el circuito de agua.
Instalación típica (fig. 1)
Este dibujo nos muestra, en forma generalizada, una instalación típica de estos
equipos. Después de realizar una prueba
de drenaje, aplicar cinta de vinilo ref. 5,
uniendo todos los tubos.
- Se han dado instrucciones al
usuario para su manejo.
- Se ha informado de la necesidad de la limpieza periódica del
filtro de aire.
Instalación eléctrica
1- Abra el panel frontal.
2- Extraiga la cubierta del cableado.
3- Ubique el cable de conexión desde la
unidad interior pasando por el agujero
de conexión.
4- Seguir indicaciones de la fig. 8 para las
conexiones.
5- Colocar el protector de conexiones eléctricas.
6- Montar el panel frontal.
Suministro
eléctrico
09
Conexión eléctrica
Fig. 8
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
Sección cables
Tamaños
- Se han dado instrucciones de
mantenimiento o efectuado
contrato de revisión periódica.
12
mm2
18
24
BU: Azul
BK: Negro
BN: Marrón
YE: Amarillo/verde
3 x 2,5
N(1) 2
BU BK
Interconexión
(int./ext.)
3
BN
YE
4 x 2,5
Conexión unidad
exterior
Fusible
(Curva D)
A
10
16
16
20
ATENCIÓN
Su producto está marcado con este símbolo. Esto significa que al final de su vida útil no debe mezclarse
con el resto de residuos domésticos no clasificados, sino que su eliminación debe realizarse de acuerdo
con la normativa local y nacional pertinente, de forma correcta y respetuosa con el medio ambiente.
El desmantelamiento del acondicionador de aire, así como el tratamiento del refrigerante, aceite y otros
componentes, debe ser efectuado por un instalador competente de acuerdo con la legislación aplicable.
Contacte con las autoridades locales para obtener más información.
6
110
E
by johnson controls
Installation Instructions
Condensed water drain
Inspection
The drain pipe of the unit is flexible and can
be placed in different positions. The drain
line should include an elbow (Ushaped) (Fig.
4). Connect a plastic condensed water drain
pipe with a 12 mm. inner diameter.
The drain pipe should be fastened to the
cooling lines with vinyl tape (see Fig. 6).
Upon reception, inspect the equipment and
notify both the carrier and the insurance
company, in writing, of any possible
damage.
Environmental protection
Eliminate packing in accordance
with the regulations in force on
environmental conservation.
Installation of indoor unit
Fasten the mounting plate to the wall.
Tighten screws slightly. Level the mounting
plate, and then tighten screws to a
maximum (Fig. 2).
If the tubing goes through the back of the
unit, drill a 50 mm. diameter hole in the
wall. The outer side of this hole should be
slightly below the inner side (Figs. 3 and 7).
Install the through guide.
The refrigerant lines can be installed in
different positions (Fig. 6).
Installation of the interconnecting tubing
and wiring, with the central mounting
plate located at the back of the chassis.
Hang the upper part of the unit over the
mounting panel and press forward. Fasten
the indoor unit to the mounting plate
permanently.
Bend the tubing carefully, without flattening
or obstructing it.
Pass the tubing and cables of the unit
through the hole; and hand the upper part
of the indoor unit on the upper edge of the
mounting plate (see Fig. 2).
Make sure the unit is installed properly,
moving it first to the left and then to the
right.
Prior to final approval of the
installation
Check:
- The voltage is always between
198-254 V.
- The power supply cable section
is, at least, that recommended.
- Condensed water drainage
is carried out correctly, and
there are no leaks in the water
circuit.
Typical installation (Fig. 1)
This illustration shows, in general, a typical
installation of this equipment.
After carrying out a drain test, apply vinyl
tape, ref. 5, joining all tubing.
- Operating instructions
been given to the user.
Wiring
- Information has been given on
the need to clean the air filter
periodically.
1- Open the front panel.
2- Remove the wiring cover.
3- Locate the connecting cable from
the indoor unit, passing though the
connecting hole.
4- Follow indication of Fig. 8 for wiring
connections.
5- Install the electrical connection
protector.
6- Mount the front panel.
- Maintenance instructions have
been given, or a contract has
been made for periodical
servicing.
Wiring
Fig. 8
Cable section
Sizes
Power
supply
09
12
mm2
18
24
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
BU: Blue
BK: Black
BN: Brown
YE: Yellow/green
3 x 2,5
N(1) 2
Interconnection
(ind./out.)
Fuse
(D Curve)
BU BK
4 x 2,5
A
have
10
16
16
20
3
BN
YE
Outdoor unit
connection
ATTENTION
Your product is marked with this symbol. This means that at the end of its service life it should not be mixed
with other non-classified household waste. Therefore, disposal should be carried out in compliance with
the corresponding local and national regulations, in a correct and environment-friendly manner.
The dismantling of the air conditioning unit, as well as the processing of refrigerant, oil and other components,
should be carried out by a qualified technician and in compliance with the applicable legislation.
Contact your local authorities for further information
GB
7
111
by johnson controls
Instructions d’installation Drainage des condensats
Inspection
Dès sa réception, inspecter la marchandise et communiquer par écrit les possibles
anomalies au transporteur et à la compagnie d’assurances.
Protection de l’environnement
Se défaire de l’emballage selon la réglementation en vigueur relative à la protection de
l’environnement.
Installation de l’unité intérieure
Fixer la plaque de montage sur le mur. Serrer légèrement les vis.
Niveler la plaque de montage et serrer ensuite les vis à fond (fig. 2).
Si on fait sortir les tubes par la partie arrière
de l’unité, percer un trou de 50 mm de diamètre dans le mur. Le côté extérieur du
trou doit être situé légèrement plus bas
que l’intérieur (fig. 3 et 7). Installer le passe-fils.
On peut installer les lignes frigorifiques
dans plusieurs positions. (fig. 6).
Installation des tubes de raccordement
et installation électrique, avec la plaque
de montage centrale située sur la partie
postérieure du châssis.
Suspendre la partie supérieure de l’unité
sur le panneau de montage et l’appuyer
vers l’avant. Fixer l’unité intérieure à la plaque de montage d’une façon permanente. Plier le tube avec soin afin de ne pas
l’aplatir ni de l’obstruer.
Passer les tubes et les fils de l’unité par
l’orifice; suspendre la partie supérieure de
l’unité intérieure sur l’arête supérieure de la
plaque de montage (voir fig. 2).
S’assurer que l’unité est bien installée en la
déplaçant d’abord vers la gauche et ensuite vers la droite.
Derniers contrôles
Le tube du drainage des condensats est
flexible et il peut adopter plusieurs positions. La ligne de drainage doit comporter
un coude (en forme de U) (fig. 4). Connecter
un tube en plastique pour le drainage des
condensats ayant un diamètre intérieur de
12 mm.
Le tube de drainage doit être fixé aux lignes
frigorifiques avec un ruban en vinyle. Voir
fig. 6.
Vérifier si:
- le voltage est toujours entre
198-254 V.
- la section des fils d’alimentation
est au moins celle recommandée
- le drainage des condensats
s’effectue parfaitement et il n’y
a aucune fuite dans le circuit
d’eau.
- l’utilisateur a reçu les instructions d’utilisation.
Installation typique (fig.1)
Ce dessin nous montre d’une façon générale une installation typique de ces appareils. Après avoir effectué un essai de drainage, appliquer le ruban de vinyle réf.5 en
raccordant tous les tubes.
- l’utilisateur a été informé de la
nécessité d’un nettoyage périodique du filtre à air.
- l’utilisateur a reçu les instructions
de maintenance ou a passé un
contrat de révision périodique.
Installation électrique
1- Ouvrir le panneau frontal
2.- Retirer le couvercle du câblage
3- Placer le fil de connexion depuis l’unité
intérieure en passant par l’orifice de
connexion.
4- Suivre instructions de connexion de la
fig. 8.
5- Mettre le protecteur des connexions
électriques.
6- Monter le panneau frontal.
Section fils
Tailles
Alimentation
électrique
09
12
mm2
Fig. 8
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
BU: Bleu
BK: Noir
BN: Marron
YE: Jaune/vert
24
N(1) 2
3 x 2,5
BU BK
Interconnexion
(int./ext.)
Fusible
(Courbe D)
18
Connexion électrique
4 x 2,5
A
10
16
3
BN
YE
Connexion unité
extérieure
16
20
ATTENTION
Votre produit est marqué avec ce symbole. Cela veut dire qu’à la fin de sa vie utile, il ne doit pas être mélangé
avec les autres déchets domestiques non classés. Son élimination doit être réalisée conformément à la
réglementation locale et nationale pertinente, de manière correcte et respectueuse envers l’environnement.
Le démantèlement du climatiseur, ainsi que le traitement du réfrigérant, de l’huile et des autres composants,
doit être effectué par un installateur compétent, conformément à la législation en vigueur.
Contacter les autorités locales pour obtenir plus d’information.
8
112
F
by johnson controls
Instruções de Instalação
Drenagem de condensados
Inspecção
O tubo de drenagem da unidade é flexível
e pode-se colocar em diversas posições. A
linha de drenagem deve incluir um cotovelo
(em forma de U) (Fig. 4). Há que ligar um
tubo de drenagem de condensados de
plástico com um diâmetro interior de 12 mm.
O tubo de drenagem dos condensados deve
ser fixado às linhas de refrigeração por meio
de fita de vinil (vejase a Fig. 6).
À sua recepção, há que inspeccionar a
mercadoria e comunicar as possíveis
anomalias por escrito ao transportador e à
Companhia de Seguros.
Protecção do meio ambiente
Deve-se eliminar a embalagem
de acordo com a regulamentação
para a preservação do meio
ambiente em vigor.
Instalação da unidade interior
Fixar a placa de montagem à parede. Apertar
ligeiramente os parafusos.
Nivelar a placa de montagem e, a seguir,
apertar a fundo os parafusos (Fig. 2).
Se as tubagens saírem pela parte traseira
da unidade, há que perfurar na parede
um orifício de 50 mm de diâmetro. O lado
exterior do orifício deve encontrar-se a um
nível ligeiramente inferior ao do lado interior
(Figs. 3 e 7). Há que instalar o passa-muros.
Podem-se instalar as linhas de refrigerante
em diversas posições (Fig. 6).
Instalação das tubagens de interligação
e de instalação eléctrica, com a placa
de montagem central situada na parte
traseira do chassis.
Pendurar a parte superior da unidade sobre
o painel de montagem e pressioná-la para
a frente. Fixar a unidade interior à placa de
montagem de um modo permanente.
Dobrar a tubagem com cuidado a fim de
não amachucá-la ou de não obstruí-la.
Passar a tubagem e os cabos da unidade
através do orifício; depois pendurar a parte
superior da unidade interior sobre o canto
superior da placa de montagem (veja-se a
Fig. 2).
Há que certificar-se de que a unidade
esteja bem colocada, deslocando-a em
primeiro lugar para a esquerda e logo a
seguir para a direita.
Antes de dar por finalizada a
instalação
Verificar se:
- A voltagem se encontra sempre
entre 198-254 V.
- A secção dos cabos de
alimentação é, no mínimo, a
aconselhada.
- O desaguamento de condensados se realiza perfeitamente
e que não hajam fugas no
circuito de água.
Instalação típica (Fig. 1)
Este desenho mostra, de forma generalizada, uma instalação típica de estes
equipamentos.
Depois de ter realizado um teste de drenagem, há que aplicar fita de vinil (refª 5),
unindo todos os tubos.
- Ao utente lhe foram dadas
instruções
para
a
sua
utilização.
- Ele foi informado da necessidade da limpeza periódica do
filtro de ar.
Ligação eléctrica
1- Abra o painel frontal.
2- Retire a cobertura do conjunto de
cabos.
3- Instale o cabo de ligação desde a
unidade interior ao passar pelo orifício
de ligação.
4- Siga as indicações tal como indica a
Fig. 8.
5- Coloque o protector de ligações
eléctricas.
6- Montar o painel frontal.
Fornecimento
eléctrico
09
12
mm2
Ligações eléctricas
Fig. 8
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
Secção dos cabos
Tamanhos
- Lhe foram dadas as instruções
de manutenção ou efectuado
um
contrato
de
revisão
periódica.
18
BU: Azul
BK: Preto
BN: Castanho
YE: Amarelo/verde
24
3 x 2,5
N(1) 2
BU BK
Interligação
(int./ext.)
3
BN
YE
4 x 2,5
Ligação
unidade exterior
Fusível
(Curva K)
A
10
16
16
20
ATENÇÃO
O seu produto encontra-se marcado com este símbolo. Isto significa que no fim da sua vida útil não
deve ser misturado com o resto de resíduos domésticos não classificados, senão que a sua eliminação
deve ser realizada de acordo com a normativa local e nacional correspondente, de uma forma correcta e
respeitosa com o meio ambiente.
A desmontagem do condicionador de ar, bem como o tratamento do refrigerante, do óleo e doutros
componentes, deve ser efectuado por um instalador qualificado de acordo com a legislação aplicável.
Contacte as autoridades locais para obter mais informação.
P
9
113
by johnson controls
Istruzioni per l’installazione
Scarico condensa
Controllo
Il tubo di scarico condensa dell’unità è flessibile e può essere collocato in diverse posizioni. Il tubo di scarico deve essere dotato di
un sifone (a forma di U) (fig. 4). Collegare un
tubo di scarico condensa di plastica con un
diametro interno di 12 mm.
Il tubo di scarico condensa deve essere fissato alle tubazioni frigorifere con nastro vinilico (fig. 6).
Al ricevimento, controllare la merce e comunicare per iscritto allo spedizioniere e
alla compagnia assicuratrice le anomalie
eventualmente riscontrate.
Ecologia
Eliminare l’imballo attenendosi alle
norme per la raccolta selettiva dei
rifiuti e la tutela dell’ambiente.
Installazione dell’unità interna
Fissare la piastra d’installazione alla parete
e avvitare leggermente le viti.
Livellare
accuratamente
la
piastra
d’installazione, quindi serrare bene le viti
(fig. 2).
Se i tubi vengono fatti uscire dalla parte
posteriore dell’unità, realizzare nella parete un foro di 50 mm di diametro. Il foro
dovrà avere una leggera pendenza verso
l’esterno (fig. 3 e 7). Collocare nella parete
la guida per il passaggio dei tubi.
Le tubazioni frigorifere possono essere installate in diverse posizioni (fig. 6).
Installazione delle tubazioni frigorifere e del cablaggio, con la piastra
d’installazione centrale ubicata nella
parte posteriore della struttura.
Appendere la parte superiore dell’unità
alla piastra d’installazione e spingerla in
avanti per bloccarvela. Fissare in modo
permanente l’unità interna sulla piastra
d’installazione.
Piegare la tubazione con cura, facendo
attenzione a non schiacciarla o strozzarla.
Far passare la tubazione ed i cavi dell’unità
attraverso il foro e appendere la parte superiore dell’unità interna all’angolo superiore della piastra d’installazione (vedere fig.
2). Accertarsi che l’unità sia ben collocata,
spostandola prima a destra e poi a sinistra.
Prima di considerare ultimata
l’installazione
Verificare:
- Che il voltaggio si trovi sempre
tra 198 e 254 V.
- Che la sezione dei cavi
d’alimentazione sia almeno
quella consigliata.
- Che lo scarico della condensa
avvenga perfettamente e che
non ci siano perdite nel circuito
dell’acqua.
Installazione tipica (fig. 1)
La figura mostra, in modo generalizzato,
un’installazione tipica di questi apparecchi.
Dopo aver controllato il perfetto funzionamento dello scarico condensa, unire tutti i
tubi con nastro vinilico (ref.5).
- Di aver dato all’utente le istruzioni per l’uso.
- Di averlo informato sulla necessità di pulire periodicamente il
filtro dell’aria.
Impianto elettrico
1- Aprire il pannello frontale.
2- Togliere la protezione del cablaggio.
3- Ubicare il cavo di connessione proveniente dall’unità interna facendolo
passare per il foro di collegamento.
4- Collegare i cavi di comando come indicato nella figura 8.
5- Ricollocare la protezione dei collegamenti
elettrici.
6- Montare il pannello frontale.
Alimentazione
elettrica
09
Collegamenti elettrici
Fig. 8
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
Sezione dei cavi
Modello
- Di aver dato le opportune istruzioni per la manutenzione o
stipulato un contratto di revisione periodica.
12
mm2
18
24
BU: Blu
BK: Nero
BN: Marrone
YE: Giallo/verde
3 x 2,5
N(1) 2
BU BK
Collegamento
(U. int./est.)
3
BN
YE
4 x 2,5
Collegamento
unità esterna
Fusibile
(Curva K)
A
10
16
16
20
ATTENZIONE
Il prodotto è marchiato con questo simbolo. Ciò significa che al termine della vita utile non deve essere
mischiato con i rifiuti domestici generici, ma deve essere eliminato come previsto dalla normativa
municipale e nazionale pertinente, in modo corretto e rispettoso con l’ambiente.
La rottamazione del condizionatore d’aria e il trattamento del fluido refrigerante, dell’olio e degli altri
componenti deve essere effettuato da un installatore competente, come prescritto dalla legislazione
applicabile.
Per maggiori informazioni, rivolgersi alle autorità locali.
10
114
I
by johnson controls
Hinweise zum Einbau
Kondensatablauf
Vor Abschluss des Einbaus
Überprüfung
Das anfallende Kondensat wird über
eine Schlauchleitung abgeführt, die in
verschiedenen Positionen verlegt werden
kann. Der Kondensatablauf muss über einen
(Uförmigen) Siphon geführt werden (Fig. 4).
Als Kondensatablauf muss ein Kunststoffschlauch mit einem Innendurchmesser von
12 mm angeschlossen werden.
Der Kondensatablauf muss mit Klebeband
an den Kälteleitungen befestigt werden
(Fig. 6).
Folgende Aspekte sind zu überprüfen:
Bei Erhalt der Ware muss diese
sofort auf mögliche Transportschäden
überprüft werden. Eventuelle Schäden
müssen dem Spediteur und der Versicherungsgesellschaft
schriftlich
zur
Anzeige gebracht werden.
Umweltschutz
Die Verpackung muss gemäß den
örtlichen Vorschriften entsorgt
erden.
Einbau des Innengeräts
Montageplatte an der Wand befestigen.
Schrauben vorerst noch nicht fest anziehen. Montageplatte korrekt ausrichten
und Schrauben fest anziehen (Fig. 2).
Sollen die Leitungen über die Rückwand
des Geräts nach außen austreten, muss
in die Wand eine Öffnung mit einem
Durchmesser von 50 mm gebohrt werden.
Der Mauerdurchgang muss hierbei leicht
nach außen hin abfallen (Fig. 3 und 7).
Mauerdurchführung einsetzen.
Die
Kältemittelleitungen
können
in
verschiedenen Positionen verlegt werden
(Fig. 6).
Installation der Verbindungsleitungen
und des elektrischen Anschlusses
über die zentrale Montageplatte im
rückwärtigen Teil des Gehäuses.
Oberen Teil der Einheit auf die Montageplatte hängen und hierauf nach vorne
andrücken. Innengerät auf Dauer an der
Montageplatte befestigen. Rohrleitung ohne
Knickstellen und sonstige Behinderungen
vorsichtig zurechtbiegen.
Rohrleitung und Kabel des Geräts durch
die Öffnung in der Wand führen und oberen
Teil des Innengeräts auf die Oberkante der
Montageplatte hängen (siehe Fig. 2).
Durch ein versuchsweises Hin- und
Herschieben des Gehäuses die korrekte
Anbringung des Geräts überprüfen.
- Die Spannung liegt stets
zwischen 198-254 V.
- Der Querschnitt der
Speisekabel entspricht
mindestens dem empfohlenen
Richtwert.
- Das Kondenswasser fließt
unbehindert ab, und im
Wasserumlauf sind keine
Leckstellen zu beobachten.
Typisches Installationsbeispiel
(Fig. 1)
- Die Benutzer sind
entsprechend eingewiesen
worden.
Diese Skizze zeigt schematisch ein
typisches
Installationsbeispiel
dieser
Geräte. Nach Überprüfung des korrekten
Kondensatablaufs
müssen
die
verschiedenen Leitungen mit Klebeband
miteinander verbunden werden.
- Auf die Notwendigkeit einer
regelmäßigen Reinigung des
Luftfilters wurde hingewiesen.
- Es wurden entsprechende
Hinweise zur Wartung gegeben
bzw. eine regelmäßige
Wartung vertraglich vereinbart.
Elektrischer Anschluss
1- Frontblende abnehmen.
2- Abdeckung über dem elektrischen
Anschluss öffnen.
3- Anschlusskabel vom Innengerät aus
durch die Anschlussöffnung führen.
4- Muss das Steuerkabel wie in Fig. 8
dargestellt angeschlossen.
5- Abdeckung über dem elektrischen
Anschluss schließen.
6- Frontblende aufsetzen.
Elektrischer Anschluss
Fig. 8
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
Leiterquerschnitte
Baugröße
Elektrischer
Anchluss
09
12
mm2
18
24
N(1) 2
3 x 2,5
BU BK
Verbindung
(innen/außen)
BU: Blau
BK: Schwarz
BN: Braun
YE: Gelb/Grün
3
BN
YE
4 x 2,5
Anschluss
Außeneinheit
Sicherung
(Kurve K)
A
10
16
16
20
ACHTUNG
Ihr Produkt ist mit diesem Symbol versehen. Dies bedeutet, dass es bei Ablauf seiner Nutzungsdauer nicht
einfach mit dem übrigen Hausmüll beseitigt werden darf. Vielmehr muss es korrekt und umweltgerecht in
Übereinstimmung mit den diesbezüglich vor Ort geltenden Vorschriften entsorgt werden.
Die Entsorgung des Klimageräts sowie die Weiterverwertung des Kältemittels, des Öls und aller anderen
Komponenten obliegt dem gesetzlich zuständigen Installateur.
Weitere Auskunft erhalten Sie bei den zuständigen Behörden vor Ort.
D
11
115
by johnson controls
Installatie-instructies
Afvoer condenswater
Controle bij ontvangst
De afvoerbuis van het toestel is flexibel en
kan in verschillende posities geplaatst worden. In de afvoerleiding dient een U-bocht
(fig. 4) opgenomen te zijn. Sluit een kunststof
afvoerbuis voor het condenswater met een
inwendige doorsnede van 12 mm aan. De
afvoerbuis dient op de koelleidingen met vinyltape aangesloten te worden, zie fig. 6.
Bij ontvangst dienen de goederen gecontroleerd te worden en bij eventuele gebreken dient het transportbedrijf en de verzekeringsmaatschappij hiervan schriftelijk op
de hoogte gesteld te worden.
Bescherming van het milieu
De verpakking dient overeenkomstig de door de gemeente vastgelegde milieuvoorschriften afgevoerd te worden.
Installatie binnenunit
De montageplaat op de wand bevestigen.
De schroeven licht aandraaien.
De montageplaat in het lood zetten en vervolgens de schroeven vast aandraaien (fig. 2).
Als ervoor gekozen wordt de leidingen aan
de achterkant uit het toestel te laten komen, een gat met een doorsnede van Æ 50
mm in de muur boren. Het gat dient naar
de buitenzijde toe iets af te lopen (fig. 3 en
7). De doorvoer installeren.
De koelleidingen kunnen in verschillende
posities (fig. 6) geïnstalleerd worden.
Installeren van de aansluitleidingen en
elektrische aansluitingen bij montage
van de centrale montageplaat aan de
achterkant van het frame.
Hang het toestel aan de bovenzijde aan
het montagepaneel en druk dit naar voren,
zodat het op de centrale montageplaat ingrijpt. Bevestig de binnenunit met de bijbehorende schroef op de montageplaat. Buig
de leiding voorzichtig zonder dat deze geplet of de doorgang afgesloten wordt.
Voer de leiding en de kabels van het toestel door het gat; hang de binnenunit met de
bovenzijde aan de bovenrand van de montageplaat. (zie fig. 2).
Let erop dat het toestel goed geplaatst is
door het eerst naar links en vervolgens
naar rechts te schuiven.
Alvorens het installeren als
beëindigd te beschouwen
Controleren of:
- De spanning altijd tussen 198 254 V ligt.
- De doorsnede van de netspanningkabels minimaal
overeenkomt met de in de desbetreffende schakelschema’s
aanbevolen doorsnede.
Standaard installatie (fig. 1)
- De afvoer van het condenswater optimaal werkt en er
geen lekken in het watercircuit
zijn.
In de afbeelding is de gebruikelijke installatie van deze toestellen in het algemeen
zien. Breng, nadat de afvoer getest is, vinyltape, ref. 5, aan om alle buizen te verbinden.
- De gebruiker aanwijzingen
omtrent de bediening heeft
gekregen.
Elektrische aansluitingen
1- Maak het frontpaneel open.
2- Verwijder het deksel van de bekabeling.
3- Leg de aansluitkabel vanaf de binnenunit via de aansluitopening.
4- Regelkabels aan zoals in figuur 8.
5- Breng het beschermdeksel voor de
elektrische aansluitingen weer aan.
6- Breng het frontpaneel aan.
- De gebruiker ingelicht is
omtrent de noodzaak van het
regelmatig reinigen van het
luchtfilter.
- Men aanwijzingen gegeven
heeft omtrent het onderhoud
of dat er een servicecontract
afgesloten is.
Kabeldoorsnede
Maten
09
12
18
24
Elektrische aansluitingen
Fig. 8
Stroomvoorziening
mm2
3 x 2,5
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
Onderlinge
aansluiting
(binnen/buiten)
BU: Blauw
BK: Zwart
BN: Bruin
YE: Geel/Groen
4 x 2,5
N(1) 2
BU BK
Zekering
(K Kromme)
A
10
16
16
20
3
BN
YE
aansluitingen
buitenunit
LET OP
Uw product is van dit symbool voorzien. Dit betekent dat het product aan het eind van zijn levensduur niet
als het huisvuil weggeggoid mag worden maar op correcte en milieuvriendelijke wijze overeenkomstig de
van kracht zijnde plaatselijke en landelijke regelgeving afgevoerd dient te worden.
Het demonteren van de airconditioner alsmede de verwerking van het koelmiddel, olie en andere
onderdelen dient door een bevoegd installateur overeenkomstig de van toepassing zijnde wetgeving
uitgevoerd te worden.
Voor nadere informatie kunt u contact met de plaatselijke overheid opnemen.
12
116
NL
by johnson controls
Installasjonsinstrukser
Kondensdrenasje
Inspisering
Enhetens drensrør er elastisk og kan stilles i
ulike posisjoner. Drenslinjen må ha et uformet
knerør (fig. 4). Monter et kondensdrensrør av
plastikk med en innvendig diameter på 12
mm.
Drensrøret må festes til kjølelinjene med
vinyltape (se figur 6).
Ved mottakelsen av apparatet må man
undersøke det nøye og underrette
transportfirmaet og forsikringsselskapet
om enhver uregelmessighet.
Miljøvern
Emballasjen må elimineres i
henhold til gjeldende miljøvernsforordninger.
Installasjon av innvendig enhet
Fest monteringsplaten på veggen. Skru
skruene så vidt til. Rettstill monteringsplaten,
og skru deretter skruene helt fast (fig. 2).
Hvis man trekker rørledningene ut på
enhetens bakside, må man bore et 50
mm stort hull i veggen. Hullet på utsiden
av veggen må orienteres en smule lavere
enn det på innsiden (fig. 3 og 7). Monter
rørbeskytteren. Kjølelinjene kan installeres
i ulike posisjoner (fig. 6).
Installering av forbindelesrørledningene
og elektrisk installsjon, med den midtre
monteringsplaten plassert på kassens
bakside.
Heng
enhetens
øvre
del
over
monteringspanelet og trykk den innover.
Fest den indre enheten permanent til
monteringsplaten.
Pass på at rørledningen ikke blir flatklemt
eller forskjøvet.
Før enhetens rørledning og ledninger
gjennom hullet, og heng den innvendige
enhetens øvre del over monteringsplatens
øvre kant (se figur 2).
Sjekk at enheten er riktig montert ved å la
den gli fra en side til den andre.
Før man anser installasjonen
for avsluttet
Sjekk:
- At spenningen alltid ligger
mellom 198-254 V.
- At mateledningenes snitt minst
er det anbefalte.
- At tømmingen av kondensen
skjer på korrekt måte, og at
det ikke finnes lekkasjer i
vannkretsen.
Standard installasjon (fig. 1)
Denne skissen viser en enkel standard
installasjon av disse apparatene. Etter at man
har foretatt en drenasjeprøve, binder man alle
rørene sammen med vinyltape ref. 5.
- At bruker er blitt instruert i
håndteringen av apparatet.
Elektrisk installasjon
1- Åpne frontpanelet.
2- Fjern dekslet over ledningene.
3- Før forbindelsesledningen fra den indre
enheten gjennom koblingshullet.
4- Koble kontrolledningene slik det er
angitt på figur 8.
5- Plassér beskyttelseslokket over de
elektriske koblingene.
6- Monter frontpanelet.
Strømforsyning
09
- At det er blitt gitt instrukser
angående vedlikehold, eller
tegnet vedlikeholdskontrakt.
Elektrisk installasjon
Fig. 8
Ledningssnitt
Størrelser
- At det er blitt opplyst om
at luftfilteret må rengjøres
regelmessig.
12
mm2
18
24
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24
BU: Blå
BK: Sort
BN: Brun
YE: Gul/Grønn
3 x 2,5
N(1) 2
BU BK
Sammenkobling
(innv./utv.)
3
BN
YE
4 x 2,5
installasjon
utvendige einheter
Sikring
(K Kurve)
A
10
16
16
20
OBS
Ditt produkt er merket med dette symbolet. Det betyr at etter endt levetid kan det ikke blandes med annet
usortert husholdningsavfall, og må elimineres i henhold til gjeldende miljøvernlovgivning.
Demonteringen av luftkondisjoneringsapparatet og behandlingen av kuldemediet, oljen og andre
komponenter må foretas av en kvalifisert installatør i samsvar med gjeldende lovgivning.
Ta kontakt med lokale myndigheter hvis du ønsker mer informasjon.
N
13
117
118
DECLARACION CE DE CONFORMIDAD SOBRE MAQUINAS
FABRICANTE:
JOHNSON CONTROLS MANUFACTURING ESPAÑA, S.L.
DIRECCIÓN:
Paseo Espronceda, 278, 08204 SABADELL
Certificamos que el equipo descrito, ha sido diseñado, fabricado y probado de conformidad con los requisitos básicos de la Directiva de Equipos a
presión 97/23/CEE y sus correspondientes módulos de aplicación. Así mismo certificamos que el equipo es conforme a las exigencias básicas de las
Directivas Europeas que le son aplicables, incluidas las modificaciones de las mismas y las correspondientes transposiciones a la ley nacional.
APLICACIÓN DE LA MÁQUINA: Aire Acondicionado/Refrigeración
TIPO:
EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24 DSAAAR
CATEGORIA D.E.P. : I (50 < PSxV < 200)
Módulo de evaluación : A
DIRECTIVAS DE LA CE APLICADAS:
NORMAS ARMONIZADAS APLICADAS:
NORMAS INTERNACIONALES Y
ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS APLICADAS:
LUGAR:
98/37/CEE, 2006/95/CEE, 2004/108/CEE, 97/23/CEE
EN12100-1, EN12100-2, EN563, EN294, EN953, EN378, EN60335-1,
EN60335-2-40, EN61000-3, EN55014-1, EN55014-2, EN55104
EN ISO 9001, EN ISO 14001
Sabadell, (España)
FIRMA:
ROMÁN LARRODA
JEFE DE GESTIÓN DE CALIDAD
CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
MANUFACTURER:
JOHNSON CONTROLS MANUFACTURING ESPAÑA, S.L.
ADDRESS:
Paseo Espronceda, 278, 08204 SABADELL
We hereby certify that the mentioned equipment has been designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with essential requirements of Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EEC and its relevant application modules. We futher certify that the equipment complies with the essential requirements
of the European Directives applicable, including their modifications and the corresponding transpositions from the national law.
MACHINE APPLICATION: Air Conditioning / Refrigeration
TYPE: EVKC 09, 12, 18, 24 DSAAAR
P.E.D. CATEGORY. : I (50 < PSxV < 200)
Assessment Module : A
EEC DIRECTIVES APPLIED:
APPLIED HARMONIZED STANDARDS:
APPLIED INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL STANDARDS
AND SPECIFICATIONS:
PLACE:
98/37/EEC, 2006/95/EEC, 2004/108/EEC, 97/23/EEC
EN12100-1, EN12100-2, EN563, EN294, EN953, EN378, EN60335-1,
EN60335-2-40, EN61000-3, EN55014-1, EN55014-2, EN55104
EN ISO 9001, EN ISO 14001
Sabadell, (Spain)
SIGNED BY:
ROMÁN LARRODA
QUALITY MANAGER
119
www.johnsoncontrols.com
120
High Wall
EVHC 09 to 12 DSAAAR
SERVICE MANUAL
EVHC-09 / EVHC-12
SM-EVHC-D-09-12GB 05-10
121
CONTENTS
Safety Cautions ................................................................................................................................1
Operation of wireless remote control .................................................................................................4
Emergency operation ........................................................................................................................9
Product Specifications .....................................................................................................................10
Part name ........................................................................................................................................12
Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................13
Schematic Diagram .........................................................................................................................15
PCB function manual and operation method ...................................................................................2
Appending data ...............................................................................................................................27
Refrigerant sysem diagram .............................................................................................................31
Installation .......................................................................................................................................32
Troubleshooting Guide ....................................................................................................................37
Disassembly ....................................................................................................................................56
Exploded View .................................................................................................................................63
Replacement Parts List ....................................................................................................................65
Appendix ..........................................................................................................................................67
122
6DIHW\&DXWLRQV
Safety Cautions
To prevent injury to the user or other people and property damage, the following instructions must
be followed.
■ Incorrect operation due to ignoring instruction will cause harm or damage. The seriousness is
classified by the following indications.
This symbol indicates the possibility of death or serious injury.
This symbol indicates the possibility of injury or damage to properties only.
■ Meanings of symbols used in this manual are as shown below.
Be sure not to do.
Be sure to follow the instruction.
ƾ Earth: The ground be connected!
ƾBe sure to pull out the power plug when not
using the air conditioner for a long time.
If not, please ask the qualified personnel to install. Furthermore,
don't connect each wire to the gas pipe, water pipe, drainage
pipe, drainage pipe or any other improper places.
ƾ Select the most appropriate temperature.
Otherwise, the accumulated dust may cause fire or electric
shock.
ƾ Don't leave windows and doors open for a
long time while operating the air conditioner.
Keep room cooer than outside
about 5 degree.
It can preclude the electricity wasted.
It can decrease the air conditioning capacity.
123
6DIHW\&DXWLRQV
ƾ For re-installation of the installed product,
always contact a dealer or an authorized
service center.
There is risk of fire, electric shock, explosion, or
injury.
ƾ Be cautious when unpacking and installing
the product.
Sharp edges could cause injury. Be especially careful of the case edges and the fins on the condenser
and evaporator.
ƾ Do not install the product on a defective
installation stand.
ƾ Do not install, remove, or re-install the
unit by yourself.
There is risk of fire, electric shock, explosion, or
injury.
ƾ For installation, always contact the
dealer or an Authorized service center.
There is risk of fire, electric shock, explosion, or injury.
ƾ Be sure the installation area does not
deteriorate with age.
• It may cause injury, accident, or damage to the
product.
• If the base collapses, the air conditioner could fall
with it, causing property damage, product failure,
and personal injury.
124
6DIHW\&DXWLRQV
ƾ
Don't place a space heater near the air
conditioner.
ƾ
It can cause afire or explosion.
Or CO toxicosis may occur for imcomplete
burning.
ƾ
The airflow direction can be adjusted
appropriately.At operating, adjust the
vertical airflow direction by adjusting the
louvers of upward/downward direction.
And then, hold two ends of left and right
louver to adjust the horizontal airflow.
Louver of left/right direction
ƾ
ƾDon't insert your hands or stick into the air
intake or outlet vents.
Louver of upward/
downward direction.
Don't apply the cold wind to the body for
a long time.
Keep combustible spray away from
the units more than 1m.
Otherwise it will cause accident.
ƾ Don't blow the wind to animals and plants
directly. It can cause a bad influence to
them.
It can cause the health problems.
ƾ
Splashing water on the air conditioner
can cause an electric shock and
malfunction.
ƾ
Don't use the air conditioner for other purposes, such as drying clothes, preserving
foods, etc.
125
2SHUDWLRQRIZLUHOHVVUHPRWHFRQWURO
Operation of wireless remote control
Note: There is no fan display shown on the front
panel of the indoor unit
126
Operation of wireless remote control
This function only operates when unit is
in DRY or Cooling mode and should be
on when used in high humidity indoor
environment to dry indoor coil to prevent
mould growing on the coil.
To set this function press Below button,
an Icon will be displayed on LCD remote
controller. When this function is on and unit
is turned off at the remote controller the
indoor fan will continue to operate for period
of time then will turn off.If you press the
Below button whilst the unit is turned off and
fan is running
127
Operation of wireless remote control
TIMER ON
TIMER ON BUTTON
●
Remote control
SWING UP AND DOWN BUTTON
●
Press this button, to set up swing angle,
which circularly changes as below:
OFF
This is an universal use remote controller. If
remote controller sends the following three
kinds of status that the swing status of main
unit will be:
When the guide louver start to swing up and
down, if turn off the Swing, the air guide louver
will stop at current position.
which indicates the guide louver swings up
and down between that all five positions.
TIMER OFF
●
Timer On setting: Signal ìONî will blink
and display, signal
will conceal, the
numerical section will become the timer
on setting status. During 5 seconds blink,
by pressing + or - button to adjust the
time value of numerical section, every
press of that button, the value will be
increased or decreased 1 minute. Hold
pressing + or -button, 2 seconds later,
it quickly change, the way of change is:
During the initial 2.5 seconds, ten numbers
change in the one place of minute, then
the one place is constant, ten numbers
change in the tens place of minute at 2.5
seconds speed and carry. During 5s blink,
press the Timer button, the timer setting
succeeds. The Timer On has been set up,
repress the timer On button, the Timer
On will be canceled. Before setting the
Timer, please adjust the Clock to the
current actual time.
TIMER OFF BUTTON
Once press this key to enter into
TIMER OFF setup, in which case
the TIMER OFF icon will blink.
The method of setting is the same
as for TIMER ON.
To turn the display panel(indoor
unit) on or off press the light
button on the remote controller.
If the light function is on a
which is be displayed on the LCD
panel of the remote controller
When pressing - and + together the
remote controller will be locked.to
release lock function press - and +
together again.
ć7 Ŗ
When unit isoff, press MODE and button simultaneously to switch
between ć and ̧ 128
Operation of wireless remote control
Guide for operation- General operation
1. After powered on, press ON/OFF button, the unit will start to run.(Note: When
it is powered off, the guide louver of main unit will close automatically.)
2. Press MODE button, select desired running mode, or press COOL or HEAT
mode to enter into the corresponding operation directly.
3. Pressing +or - button, to set the desired temperature. (It is unnecessary
to set the temp. at AUTO mode.)
4. Pressing FAN button, set fan speed, can select AUTO FAN, LOW, MID
and HIGH.
5. Pressing
button, to select the swing.
Guide for operation- Optional operation
1. Press SLEEP button, to set sleep.
2. Press TIMER ON and TIMER OFF button, can set the scheduled timer on
or timer off.
3. Press LIGHT button, to control the on and off of the displaying part of the
unit (This function may be not available for some units).
4. Press TURBO button, can realize the ON and OFF of TURBO function.
Introduction for special function
ƾ About AUTO RUN
When AUTO RUN mode is selected, the setting temperature will not be displayed on the
LCD, the unit will be in accordance with the room temp. automatically to select the suitable
running method and to make ambient comfortable.
ƾ About turbo function
If start this function, the unit will run at super-high fan speed to cool or heat quickly so that
the ambient temp. approachs the preset temp. as soon as possible.
ƾ About swing up and down
1. Press swing up and down button continuously more than 2s,the main unit will swing back
and forth from up to down, and then loosen the button, the unit will stop swinging and present
position of guide louver will be kept immediately.
2. Under swing up and down mode, when the status is switched from off to , if press this
button again 2s later,
status will switch to off status directly; if press this button again
within 2s,the change of swing status will also depend on the circulation sequence stated above.
129
Operation of wireless remote control
ƾ About new function of defrosting
It indicates: after starting this function by remote controller and the unit has been under
defrost status, If turn off the unit by remote controller, the unit will not stop defrosting until
it is finished; if change setting mode by remote controller, the function ,which is set last
time, won't be carried out until defrosting finished.
Operation of this function on or off: If remote controller is under off status, press mode button
and blow button simultaneously in order to enter or cancel this new function. If the unit is under
defrost mode, dual eight position on remote controller will display H1.If switch to heat mode,
the position will display H1, which flickers for 5s, in which case, press +/- button, H1 will
disappear and setting temp. be displayed.
After remote controller is powered on, the new defrost function will be defaulted to be closed.
Changing batteries and notices
Slightly to press the place with
1
, along the arrowhead direction to push the back cover of wireless
remote control. (As show in figure)
2Take out the old batteries. (As show in figure)
3 Insert two new AAA1.5V dry batteries, and pay attention to the polarity.
(As show in figure)
4 Attach the back cover of wireless remote control. (As show in figure)
Fi g.1
ƾ NOTE:
ƽ When changing the batteries, do not use the old or different batteries,
otherwise, it can cause the malfunction of the wireless remote control.
ƽ If the wireless remote control will not be used for a long time, please
take them out, and don't let the leakage liquid damage the wireless
remote control.
ƽ The operation should be in its receiving range.
ƽ It should be placed at where is 1m away from the TV set or stereo sound sets.
ƽ If the wireless remote control can not operate normally, please take them out,
after 30s later and reinsert, if they cannot normally run, please change them.
Sketch map for
changing batteries
Fig.2
130
Emergency operation
Displayer indicator light control of indoor unit
It's a special selective buttonfor the users ,who are not accustomed to the
light at sleeping.
ƽ Get
the displayer indicator light on: When setting the light function,the mark will
display on the remote controller screen by
pressing this button. In which case,the dissplayer indicator light will be on if the AC receives
this signal.
ƽ Get
the displayer indicator light off: If cancel the light function,the mark
will disap-
per on the remote controller screen by pressing this
button. In which case, the displayer indicator light will
be off if the AC receives this signal.
Emergency operation
If the wireless remote control is lost
or broken, please use the manual switch
button. At this time, the unit will run at the
Auto mode, but the temperature and fan
speed cannot be changed. The operation
was shown as below:
To open the panel, the manual switch
Manual switch
Fig.3
is on the displayer box.
ƽ
Turn on the unit: At unit turned off, press
the button,the unit will run at Auto mode
immediately.The microcomputer will accord
to the indoor temperature to select (Cooling,
Heating, Fan) and obtain the comfortable effect.
ƽ
Turn off the unit: At unit turned on, press the
button, the unit will stop working.
131
Product Specifications
Product Specifications
Model
EVHC 09 DSAAAR
Function
COOLING
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Total Capacity (W/Btu/h)
Power Input (W)
Rated Input (W)
Rated Current (A)
HEATING
Energy Class
Model of Indoor Unit
Fan Motor Speed (r/min) (H/M/L)
Output of Fan Motor (w)
Input of Heater (w)
COOLING
HEATING
220-240V∼
220-240V∼
80/50/25
80/53/25
95/68/25
95/74/25
3100/2500/1200 3800/2800//1200 3800/3500/1220
4740/4000/1310
10600/9000/4036 13000/9386/4096 12970/12000/4172 14660/13650/4480
1330/735/280
1365/745/310
1560/1060/295
1420/1100/330
1400
1450
1600
6.3
7.0
6.1
Air Flow Volume (m 3/h) (H/M/L)**
Dehumidifying Volume (l/h)
EER / C.O.P (W/W)
EVHC 12 DSAAAR
1650
7.2
500
560
1.6
1.2
2.33/3.4/4.21
2.784/3.69/3.87
2.44/3.3/4.14
3/3.64/3.97
A/A
A/A
EVKC 09 DS
EVKC 12 DS
(1260)/1050/920/ (1320)/1200/1100
730
/950
(1260)/1070/900/730
10
20
None
/
Fan Motor Capacitor (uF)
1.0
1.0
Fan Motor RLA(A)
0.1
0.254
Cross flow fan - 1
Cross flow fan - 1
φ85×596
φ92 X 645
Aluminum fin-copper tube
Aluminum fin-copper tube
Φ7
7
2-1.5
2-1.4
581X264X25.4
645X25.4X267
MP24AA
MP24AA
1.5
PCB 3.15A
2.4
PCB 3.15A
(40)/37/31/23
(41)/37/33/24
(54)/50/46/43
(54)/51/48/45
Fan Type-Piece
Diameter-Length (mm)
Evaporator
Indoor Pipe Diameter (mm)
unit Row-Fin Gap(mm)
Coil length (l)×height (H)×coil
width (L)
Swing Motor Model
Output of Swing Motor (W)
Fuse (A)
Sound Pressure Level dB (A)
(H/M/L)
Sound Power Level dB (A)
(H/M/L)***
Dimension (W/H/D) ( mm)
790×265×170
845×275×180
Dimension of Package(W/H/D)(mm)
870×248×355
915×255×355
Net Weight /Gross Weight (kg)
9 / 12
10/13
10
132
Product Specifications
Model of Outdoor Unit
Compressor Manufacturer/trademark
Compressor Model
Compressor Type
L.R.A. (A)
Compressor RLA(A)
Compressor Power Input(W)
Overload Protector
Throttling Method
Starting Method
Working Temp Range (ºC)
Condenser
Pipe Diameter (mm)
Rows-Fin Gap(mm)
Coil length(l) x height(H) x coil width(L)
Fan Motor Speed (rpm) (H/M/L)
Output of Fan Motor (W)
Outdoor Fan Motor RLA(A)
Fan Motor Capacitor (uF)
unit
Air Flow Volume of Outdoor Unit
Fan Type-Piece
Fan Diameter (mm)
Defrosting Method
Climate Type
Isolation
Moisture Protection
Permissible Excessive Operating
Pressure for the Discharge Side(MPa)
Permissible Excessive Operating
Pressure for the Suction Side(MPa)
Sound Pressure Level dB (A) (H/M/L)
Sound Power Level dB (A) (H/M/L)
Dimension (W/H/D) (mm)
Dimension of Package (L/W/H)(mm)
Net Weight /Gross Weight (kg)
Refrigerant Charge (kg)
Length (m)
Gas additional charge(g/m)
Connecti Outer
Liquid Pipe (mm)
on Pipe Diameter
Gas Pipe (mm)
Height (m)
Max
Length (m)
Distance
EVJC 09 DS
MITSUBISHI
KNB092FHBMC
single-rotor
25
3.89
895
None
Capillary throttling
Transducer starting
-15 ºC≤ T≤ 43 ºC
Aluminum fin-copper tube
9.52
1-1.6
608X508X22
830±20
30
0.3
2.5
/
Axial fan -1
400
Auto defrost
T1
I
IP24
EVJC 12 DS
MITSUBISHI
KNB092FHBMC
single-rotor
25
8.9
895
222KT-XH-2P-400mm
Capillary throttling
Transducer starting
-10 ºC≤ T≤ 43 ºC
Aluminum fin-copper tube
7
2-1.4
608/498/22
880±20
30
0.3
2
/
Axial fan-1
400
Auto defrost
T1
I
IP24
3.8
3.8
1.2
1.2
53
63
848X260X540
878X360X580
35/40
R410A / 0.8
5
15
Φ6(1/4")
Φ9.52(3/8")
5
15
≤ 54
≤ 64
848X260X540
878X360X580
36/41
R410A / 1.15
5
15
Φ6(1/4")
Φ12(1/2")
5
20
11
133
3DUWQDPH
Part name
Air in
Power cable
Front Panel
Indoor unit
Wrapping Tape
Guide louver
Filter
Wall Pipe
Air out
Set Temp
DRY
Cooling
Wireless remote control
LED displayer
Run
Remote control window
Heat
Connection pipe
Air in
Outdoor unit
Drainage hose
Air out
134
Dimensions
Dimensions
Indoor Unit
W
Air inlet
H
D
Tube exit
Ceiling
Left
Right
Wall-Mounting Plate
W
Q
S
B
H
A
R
x
x
Hole, the position should be confirmed
by client or the erector
Hole, the position should be confirmed
by client or the erector
Model
EVKC 09 DS
EVKC 12 DS
Mounting Plate
B
Q
Hole
X
W(㎜)
H(㎜)
D(㎜)
A
790
845
265
275
170
180
110
140
148
605
32
55
110
147
129
542
169
55
R
S
13
135
Dimensions
Outdoor Unit
D2
D
D1
H
W
W2
W1
Unit:mm
Ov
er
30
Over 60cm
cm
O
O
r
ve
30
ve
0
r6
cm
cm
Bolt
Nut
Wrench
Model
EVJC 09 DS
EVJC 12 DS
W(mm)
848
848
W1(mm) W2(mm) H(mm)
762
540
540
762
540
540
D(mm)
320
320
D1(mm) D2(mm)
286
256.6
286
256.6
14
136
Schematic Diagram
Schematic Diagram
:LULQJ'LDJUDP
Indoor Unit
ক䖯
137
Schematic Diagram
Outdoor Unit
138
Schematic Diagram
Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram
INDOOR UNIT
• TOP VIEW
9
1
10
8
7
2
6
3
5
4
• BOTTOM VIEW
139
Schematic Diagram
• TOP VIEW
Serial No.
Name of circuit
Testing contents
Before commutating, voltage:
AC current; After commutated, voltage: DC current
1
Commutating filter wave circuit
2
Communication circuit
3
Stabilized voltage supply circuit Chip power supply 5V; relay power supply 12V
4
Buzzer circuit
Buzzer sound
5
Displaying board displaying circuit
Displaying the numerical design correctness
6
Sensor detection temperature circuit
Input IC pin voltage value
7
Jumper cap ciruit
Whether jumper cap is installed or whether it is correctly
installed
8
Fan motor feedback and
driving circuit
Impulse waveform and impulse voltage
9
Crystal oscillatory circuit
Waveform and voltage
10
Reset circuit
Reset pin voltage and waveform
Communication voltage and communication wave shape
• BOTTOM VIEW
Note: unnoted that the pins are suspending
Indoor unit pin definition
Definition
PIN
PIN
Definition
1
5V power supply Vcc
22
2
AD referrence voltage
23
3
AD referrence ground
24
4
PWM output
25
5
Reset output
26
Retain the swing motor control
Pin1 in advance
Retain the swing motor control
Pin2 in advance
Retain the swing motor control
Pin3 in advance
Retain the swing motor control
Pin4 in advance
Upper and lower swing motor control Pin 1
6
Motor feedback input
27
Upper and lower swing motor control Pin 2
7
Remote control receiving
28
Upper and lower swing motor control Pin 3
8
Buttons input
29
Upper and lower swing motor control Pin 4
9
Buzzer output
30
Cooling/heating selection port
10
Relay control
31
Display board code control G
11
Communication sending
32
Display board code control F
12
Communication receiving
33
Display board code control E
13
Display board code control S1
34
Display board code control D
14
Display board code control S2
35
Display board code control C
15
36
Display board code control B
16
Ground
Display board code control S3
37
Display board code control A
17
Display board code control S4
38
IIC
Bus data port
18
Reset input
39
IIC
Bus clock port
19
Surge signal input
40
Indoor ambient temperature sampling port
20
Surge singal output
41
21
Ground
42
Indoor tube temperature sampling port
Quick test port (retain the temperature
sampling port)
140
Schematic Diagram
Outdoor Unit
• TOP VIEW
2
1
7
3
4
8
5
9
10
6
11
12
• BOTTOM VIEW
141
Schematic Diagram
• TOP VIEW
Serial No.
Name of circuit
1
Commutating filter circuit
2
PFC circuit
3
Indicator circuit
4
Fan motor’s four-way valve
control circuit
5
Current of power on testing
circuit
6
Strong current filter cuircuit
7
Switch power supply circuit
8
Compressor driving circuit
9
Sensor detecting
temperature circuit
10
Crystal oscillatory circuit
11
Reset circuit
12
Communication circuit
Testing spot
Testing content
Before commutating voltage AC current;
After commutating voltage DC current
R212 underneath
multimeter black pen contact
with U406 radiator
multimeter red pen contact
with R212 underneath
Bus bar voltage, working voltage 15V
Indicator on/off times
R407right side
multimeter black pen contact
with U404 radiator
multimeter red pen contact
with R407 right side
Output voltage:12V
PTC temperature
Voltage of R101 both sides
The pen of multimeter
red meter contacts with
D304 negative port
The pen of multimeter
The pen of multimeter
black meter contacts
red meter contacts with
with U404 radiator
C405 underneath
The pen of multimeter
red meter contacts with
Pins 7,8 of U4
R201 left side
The pen of multimeter black meter
contacts with U404 radiator
The pen of multimeter red meter
contacts with R201 right side
R407 right side
The pen of multimeter black meter
contacts with U404 radiator
The pen of multimeter red meter
contacts with R407 right side
Both sides of R3
The pen of multimeter black meter
contacts with U404 radiator
The pen of multimeter red meter
to test the upper side and lower
side voltage of R3
C17 underneath
The pen of multimeter black meter
contacts with U404 radiator
The pen of multimeter red meter
contacts with C17 lower side
After filtered the waves, the voltage AC normal
value is power supply voltage
IPM˖15V
Chips power supply:5V
Chips power supply: 3.3V
Bus bar voltage
The normal value is
power supply voltage X1.42
Input IC pin voltage value
Waveform and voltage
Reset voltage and wave
normal value: once power on, instantly there is 200 millisecond
lower voltage, after that is 3.3V all along
C503 underneath
The pen of multimeter black meter
contacts with U404 radiator
The pen of multimeter red meter
contacts with C503 underneath
Communication receiving signal detection
Normal value: in this point, there is inerratic
change for voltage
C524 underneath
The pen of multimeter black meter
contacts with U404 radiator
The pen of multimeter red meter
contacts with C524 underneath
Communication sending singal detection
Normal value: in this point, there is inerratic
change for voltage
142
Schematic Diagram
• BOTTOM VIEW
Outdoor unit pin definition
Definition
PIN
Definition
PIN
1
JTAG pin
49
Quick test
2
Memory
50
Overload protection singal input
3
Digital ground
51
25/35 Models selection port
4
+3.3V
53
Digital ground
5
Fan motor PWM output
54
+3.3V
6
Module protection signal input
56
Fan motor speed feedback input
7
Memory
58
Digital ground
8
Phase-locked loop
59
+3.3V
9
Phase-locked loop
60
Electronic expansion valve driving signal
10
+3.3V
61
JTAG Pin
12
Power supply control output
62
JTAG Pin
13
Auxiliary heat control output
63
Digital ground
14
Four-way valve control output
64
+3.3V
16
Zero crossing detection
signal input
67
U phase current sampling input
17
Communication sending
68
W phase current sampling input
18
Communication receiving
69
V phase current sampling input
19
Digital ground
70
Air exhaust sampling input
20
+3.3V
71
Ambient temperature sampling input
22
Indicator output
72
Air intake sampling input
23
PFC Protection signal input
73
Tube temperature sampling input
24
PFC driving level output
74
Current sampling input
26
Indicator output
75
Bus voltage sampling input
27
Electronic expansion valve driving signal
76
Electronic valve temperature
sampling input
28
PWM Signal output
81
Digital ground
29
Digital ground
82
+3.3V
30
+3.3V
83
+3.3V
31
PWM Signal output
84
Digital ground
32
Electronic expansion valve driving signal
86
Indicator output
33
PWM Signal output
87
Crystal oscillatory pin input
34
Digital ground
88
Crystal oscillatory pin input
35
+3.3V
90
Digital ground
36
PWM Signal output
91
+3.3V
37
PWM Signal output
93
Reset signal
38
Electronic expansion valve driving signal
94
JTAG Pin
39
PWM Signal output
96
JTAG Pin
40
+5.0V
97
Digital ground
46
Digital ground
98
+3.3V
47
+3.3V
99
JTAG Pin
48
Fan motor control singal output
100
JTAG Pin
143
PCB function manual and operation method
PCB function manual and operation method
1. Temperature Parameters
u
Indoor preset temperature (Tpreset)
u
Indoor ambient temperature (Tamb.)
2. Basic Functions
Once energized, in no case should the compressor be restarted within less than 3 minutes. In the situation that memory
function is available, for the first energization, if the compressor is at stop before de-energization, the compressor will be
started without a 3-minute lag; if the compressor is in operation before de-energization, the compressor will be started with
a 3-minute lag; and once started, the compressor will not be stopped within 6 minutes regardless of changes in room
temperature;
(1) Cooling Mode
ķ Working conditions and process of cooling
When Tamb.ıTpreset, the unit will enter cooling operation, in which case the indoor fan, the outdoor fan and the compressor
will work and the indoor fan will run at preset speed.
When Tamb.İTpreset -2ć, the compressor will stop, the outdoor fan will stop with a time lag of 30s, and the indoor fan will
run at preset speed.
When Tpreset -2ć< Tamb.< Tpreset +1ć, the unit will remain at its previous state.
Ø Under this mode, the four-way valve will be de-energized and temperature can be set within a range from 16 to 30ć.
If the compressor is shut down for some reason, the indoor fan and the swing device will operate at original state.
Tamb
Start cooling
Tpreset
Original working state
Tpreset-2ć
Stop cooling
6 minutes
3 minutes
6 minutes
Compressor
Outdoor fan
Indoor fan
Preset wind speed
Run
Stop
ĸ Protection
u
Antifreeze protection
Under cooling and dehumidifying mode, 6 minutes after the compressor is started:
If T evap.İ2ć, the compressor will operate at reduced frequency.
If T evap.İ-1ć is detected for durative 3 minutes, the compressor will stop, and after 30 seconds, the outdoor fan will stop;
and under cooling mode, the indoor fan and the swing motor will remain at the original state.
If T evap. ı6ć and the compressor has remained at OFF for at least 3 minutes, the compressor will resume its original
operation state.
u
Total current up and frequency down protection
If ItotalİA, frequency rise will be allowed; if ItotalıB, frequency rise will not be allowed; ifItotalıC, the compressor will
run at reduced frequency; and if ItotalıD, the compressor will stop and the outdoor fan will stop with a time lag of 30s.
(2) Dehumidifying Mode
ķ Working conditions and process of dehumidifying
If Tamb.ηTpreset, the unit will enter cooling and dehumidifying mode, in which case the compressor and the outdoor fan will
operate and the indoor fan will run at low speed.
If Tpreset -2ćİTamb.İTpreset, the compressor remains at its original operation state.
If Tamb.< Tpreset -2ć, the compressor will stop, the outdoor fan will stop with a time lag of 30s, and the indoor fan will
operate at low speed.
144
Operation
ĸ Protection
Protection is the same as that under the cooling mode.
(3) Heating Mode
ķ Working conditions and process of heating
If Tamb.≤Tpreset +2ć, the unit enters heating mode, in which case the four-way valve, the compressor and the outdoor fan
will operate simultaneously, and the indoor fan will run at preset speed in the condition of preset cold air prevention.
If T amb.≥Tpreset +5ć, the compressor will stop, the outdoor fan will stop with a time lag of 30s, and the indoor fan will stop
after 60-second blow at low speed
If Tpreset +2ć<T amb.< Tpreset +5ć, the unit will maintain its original operating status.
Ø
Under this mode, the four-way valve is energized and temperature can be set within a range of 16 - 30ć. The
operating symbol, the heating symbol and preset temperature are revealed on the display.
ĸ Condition and process of defrost
When duration of successive heating operation is more than 45 minutes, or accumulated heating time more than 90 minutes,
and one of the following conditions is reached, the unit will enter the defrost mode after 3 minutes.
a.
Toutdoor amb. ≥Ać, Toutdoor tube≤Wć ;
b.
Ać≤Toutdoor amb. <Bć, Toutdoor tube≤Xć ;
c.
Bć≤Toutdoor amb. <Cć, Toutdoor tube≤Yć ;
d.
Touter amb. <Cć, Touter tube≤Zć
At that time, the indoor fan stops and the compressor stops, and after 30 seconds the outer fan will stop, and then after 30
seconds, the four-way valve will stop. After 30 seconds, the compressor is initiated for raising the frequency to defrost
frequency.
When the compressor has operated under defrost mode for 7.5 minutes, or Touter tube ≥Eć, the compressor will be converted
to 53Hz operation. After 30 seconds, the compressor will stop. And after another 30 seconds, the four-way valve will be
opened, and after 60 seconds, the compressor and the outer fan will be started, the indoor fan will run under preset cold air
prevention conditions, and H1 will be displayed at temperature display area on the display panel. Defrost frequency is
70Hz.
3.Protection
u
Cold air prevention
The unit is started under heating mode (the compressor is ON): ķ In the case of T indoor amb. <24ć : if T tube≤40ć and the indoor fan is at stop state, the indoor fan will begin to run at low
speed with a time lag of 2 minutes. Within 2 minutes, if T tubeη40ć, the indoor fan also will run at low speed; and after
1-minute operation at low speed, the indoor fan will be converted to operation at preset speed. Within 1-minute low speed
operation or 2-minute non-operation, if T tubeη42ć, the fan will run at present speed.
ĸ In the case of T indoor amb. ≥24ć: if T tube≤42ć, the indoor fan will run at low speed, and after one minute, the indoor fan
will be converted to preset speed. Within one-minute low speed operation, if T tubeη42ć, the indoor fan will be converted
to preset speed.
1 and ○
2 refers to, under initially heating mode, the indoor ambient temperature before the
Note: T indoor amb. indicated in ○
command to start the compressor is performed according to the program, or after the unit is withdrawn from defrost, the
indoor ambient temperature before the defrost symbol is cleared.
u
Total current up and frequency down protection
If the total current Itotal≤W, frequency rise will be allowed; if Itotal≥X, frequency rise will not be allowed; if Itotal≥Y, the
compressor will run at reduced frequency; and if Itotal≥Z, the compressor will stop and the outdoor fan will stop with a time
lag of 30s.
(4) Fan Mode
Under the mode, the indoor fan will run at preset speed and the compressor, the outdoor fan, the four-way valve and the
electric heater will stop.
Ø
Under the mode, temperature can be set within a range of 16 - 30ć.
(5) AUTO Mode
ķ Working conditions and process of AUTO mode
Under AUTO mode, standard cooling temperature Tpreset is 25ć and standard heating temperature Tpreset is 18ć.
a.
Once energized, if Tamb.≤20ć, the unit will be started under heating mode; if 20ć< Tamb.< 25ć, the unit will run
under fan mode and the run indicator will be bright; and if Tamb.≥25ć, the unit will be started under cooling mode.
23
145
Operation
a. Under AUTO mode, if Tamb.≥Tpreset is detected, the unit will select to run under cooling mode, in which case implicit
preset temperature is 25ć; if Tamb.≤Tpreset-2ć, the compressor will stop, the outdoor fan will stop with a time lag of 1
minute, and the indoor fan will run at preset speed; and if Tpreset –(-2ć)< Tamb.< Tpreset, the unit will remain at its original
state.
b. Under AUTO mode, if Tamb. ≤Tpreset+2ć is detected, the unit will select to run under heating mode, in which case
implicit preset temperature is 18ć; if Tamb.≥Tpreset+5ć, the compressor will stop, the outdoor fan will stop with a time lag
of 1 minute, and the indoor fan will run under the mode of residue heat blowing; and if Tpreset +2ć< Tamb.< Tpreset+5ć, the
unit will remain at its original state. The cooling-only unit will run under fan mode.
c. Under AUTO mode, if 20ć< Tamb.< 25ć, the unit will remain at its original state.
2.Protection
a. In cooling operation, protection is the same as that under the cooling mode;
b. In heating operation, protection is the same as that under the heating mode;
c. When ambient temperature changes, operation mode will be converted preferentially. Once started, the compressor will
remain unchanged for at least 6 minutes.
(6) Common Protection Functions and Fault Display under COOL, HEAT, DRY and AUTO Modes
ķ Overload protection
T tube: measured temperature of outdoor heat exchanger under cooling mode; and measured temperature of indoor heat
exchanger under heating mode.
1) Cooling overload
a. If T tube≤52ć, the unit will return to its original operation state.
b. If T tube≥55ć, frequency rise is not allowed.
c. If T tube≥58ć, the compressor will run at reduced frequency.
d. If T tube≥62ć, the compressor will stop and the indoor fan will run at preset speed.
2) Heating overload
a. If T tube≤52ć, the unit will return to its original operation state.
b. If T tube≥55ć, frequency rise is not allowed.
c. If T tube≥58ć, the compressor will run at reduced frequency.
d. If T tube≥62ć, the compressor will stop and the indoor fan will blow residue heat and then stop.
ĸ Exhaust temperature protection of compressor
If exhaust temperature ≥98ć, frequency is not allowed to rise.
If exhaust temperature ≥103ć, the compressor will run at reduced frequency.
If exhaust temperature ≥110ć, the compressor will stop.
If exhaust temperature ≤90ć and the compressor has stayed at stop for at least 3 minutes, the compressor will resume its
operation. Ĺ Communication fault
If the unit fails to receive correct signals for durative 3 minutes, communication fault can be justified and the whole system
will stop.
ĺ Module protection
Under module protection mode, the compressor will stop. When the compressor remains at stop for at least 3 minutes, the
compressor will resume its operation. If module protection occurs six times in succession, the compressor will not be started
again.
Ļ Overload protection
If temperature sensed by the overload sensor is over 115ć, the compressor will stop and the outdoor fan will stop with a
time lag of 30 seconds. If temperature is below 95ć, the overload protection will be relieved. ļ If voltage on the DC bus is below 150V or over 420V, the compressor will stop and the outdoor fan will stop with a time
lag of 30 seconds. When voltage on the DC bus returns to its normal value and the compressor has stayed at stop for at least
3 minutes, the compressor will resume its operation.
Ľ Faults of temperature sensors
24
146
Operation
Designation of sensors
Indoor ambient temperature
Indoor tube temperature
Outdoor ambient temperature
Outdoor tube temperature
Exhaust
Overload
Faults
The sensor is detected to be open-circuited or short-circuited for successive
seconds
The sensor is detected to be open-circuited or short-circuited for successive
seconds
The sensor is detected to be open-circuited or short-circuited for successive
seconds
The sensor is detected to be open-circuited or short-circuited for successive
seconds, and no detection is performed within 10 minutes after defrost begins.
After the compressor has operated for 3 minutes, the sensor is detected to
open-circuited or short-circuited for successive 30 seconds.
After the compressor has operated for 3 minutes, the sensor is detected to
open-circuited or short-circuited for successive 30 seconds.
30
30
30
30
be
be
3. Other Controls
(1) ON/OFF
Press the remote button ON/OFF: the on-off state will be changed once each time you press the button.
(2) Mode Selection:
Press the remote button MODE, then select and show in the following ways: AUTO, COOL, DRY, FAN, HEAT, AUTO.
(3) Temperature Setting Option Button
Each time you press the remote button TEMP+ or TEMP-, the setting temperature will be up or down by 1ć. Regulating
Range: 16~30ć, the button is useless under the AUTO mode.
(4) Time Switch
You should start and stop the machine according to the setting time by remote control.
(5) 5. SLEEP State Control
a. When the air conditioner is under the mode of COOL, DRY, and the SLEEP mode has been set well, after the SLEEP
state keeps about 1 hour, the pre-setting T will raise 1ć, and it will raise 1ć again after 2 hours, so it raise 2ć in 2 hours,
then it will run on at the setting temperature and wind speed.
b. When the air conditioner is under the mode of HEAT, and the Timer has been set well, after the SLEEP state keeps about
1 hour, the pre-setting T will reduce 1ć, and it will reduce 1ć again after 2 hours, so it reduce 2ć in 2 hours, then it will
run on at the setting temperature and wind speed.
c. The setting temperature keeps the same under the FAN mode and AUTO mode.
(6) Indoor Fan Control
The Indoor Fan can be set as HIGH, MED, LOW by remote control, and the Indoor Fan will be respectively run at high,
medium, low speed. It will also be set as AUTO, and the Indoor Fan is as the followings at the automatic wind speed.
Cooling mode: T ring ≥ T setting + 2, high speed; T setting - 2˘T ring˘T setting + 2, medium speed; T ring≤ T setting – 2, low speed.
Sending wind mode: : T ring˚ T setting + 4, high speed; T setting +2≤T ring≤T setting + 4, medium speed; T ring˘ T setting +2, low
speed.
Moisture removal mode: force to be set as the low speed
Heating mode: T ring ≤ T setting + 1 high speed; T setting +1˘T ring˘T setting + 5, medium speed; T ring ≥T setting + 2, low speed.
(7) Buzzer Control
The buzzer will send a “Di” sound when the air conditioner is powered up or received the information sent by the remote
control or there is a button input, the single tube cooler doesn’t receive the remote control ON signal under the mode of
heating mode.
(8) Auto button
If the controller is on, it will stop by pressing the button, and if the controller is off, it will be automatic running state by
pressing the button, swing on and light on, and the main unit will run based on the remote control if there is remote control
order.
(9) Up-and-Down Swinging Control
When power on, the up-and-down motor will firstly move the air deflector to o counter-clockwise, close the air outlet.
After starting the machine, if you don’t set the swinging function, heating mode and auto-heating mode, the up-and-down
air deflector will move to D clockwise; under other modes, the up-and-down air deflector will move to L1. If you set the
swinging function when you start the machine, then the wind blade will swing between L and D. The air deflector has 7
swinging states: Location L, Location A, Location B, Location C, Location D, Location L to Location D, stop at any
location between L-D (the included angle between L~D is the same). The air deflector will be closed at 0 Location, and the
swinging is effectual only on condition that setting the swinging order and the inner fan is running. The indoor fan and
compressor may get the power when air deflector is on the default location.
25
147
Operation
Heating angle
Cooling angle
(10) Display
ķ Operation pattern and mode pattern display
All the display patterns will display for a time when the power on, the operation indication pattern will display in red under
standby status. When the machine is start by remote control, the indication pattern will light and display the current
operation mode (the mode light includes: Cooling, heating and dehumidify). If you close the light key, all the display
patterns will close.
ĸ Double-8 display
According to the different setting of remote control, the nixie light may display the current temperature (the temperature
scope is from 16 ć to 30 ć) and indoor ambient temperature. The heating and air supply temperature will display 25ć
under auto-mode, the temperature will display 18ć under the heating mode, and the temperature will display H1 under the
defrosting mode.(If you set the fahrenheit temperature display, the nixie light will display according to fahrenheit
temperature)
(11) Protection function and failure display
E2: Freeze-proofing protection
E4: Exhausting protection
E5: Overcurrent protection
E6: Communication failure
E8: Overload protection
F1: Indoor ambient sensor start and short circuit (continuously measured failure in 30S)
F2: Indoor evaporator sensor start and short circuit (continuously measured failure in 30S)
F3: Outdoor ambient sensor start and short circuit (continuously measured failure in 30S)
F2: Outdoor condenser sensor start and short circuit (continuously measured failure in 30S, and don’t measure within 10
minutes after defrosted)
F5: Outdoor exhausting sensor start and short circuit (continuously measured failure in 30S after the compressor operated 3
minutes)
H3: Overload protection of compressor
H5: Module protection
PH: High-voltage protection
PL: Low-voltage protection
P1: Nominal cooling and heating
P2: Maximum cooling and heating
P3: Medium cooling and heating
P3: Minimum cooling and heating
(12) Drying Function
You may start or stop the drying function under the modes of cooling and dehumidify at the starting status (The modes of
automatism, heating and air supply do not have drying function). When you start the drying function, after stop the
machine by pressing the switch button, you should keep running the inner fans for 10 minutes under low air damper (The
swing will operate as the former status within 10 minutes, and other load is stopped), then stop the entire machine; When
you stop the drying function, press the switch button will stop the machine directly.
When you start the drying function, operating the drying button will stop the inner fans and close the guide louver.
(13) Memory function when interrupting the power supply
Memory content: mode, swing function, light, set temperature and wind speed.
After interrupted the power supply, the machine will start when recovering the power according to the memory content
automatically. If the last remote control command has not set the timed function, the system will remember the last remote
control command and operate according it. If the last remote control command has set timed function and the power supply
is interrupted before the timed time, the system will remember the timed function of the last remote control command, the
timed time will recounted form power on. If the last remote control command has set timed function, the time is out and the
system is start or stop according to the set time when the power supply is interrupted, the system will remember the
operation status before the power supply was interrupted, and do not carry out timed action; The timed clock will not
remembered.
148
Appending data
Appending data
Table showing operation frequency limits for cooling and heating
Outdoor Relative Humidity 37%
Outdoor Relative Humidity 86%
140
130
Indoor Wet Bulb
Temperature( )
120
15
20
110
25
100
80
60
40
Capacity Change Ratio(%)
Capacity Change Ratio(%)
140
130
Indoor Wet Bulb
Temperature( )
120
15
16
110
17
100
80
60
40
20
20
15
35
55
75
95
Compressor Frequency(Hz)
15
35
55
75
95
Compressor Frequency(Hz)
Performance date for both cooling and heating
COOLING:
Temperature
(°C)
Indoor
condition
Outdoor
27/19
35/–
Model
name
Standard
pressure
P (MPa)
Heat exchanger
temp.
pipe
Compresso
Indoor fan Outdoor fan r revolution
mode
(rps)
mode
T1 (°C)
T2 (°C)
09K
0.8 to 1.1
12 to 14
41 to 43
High
High
50
12K
0.8 to 1.0
10 to 12
43 to 45
High
High
69
HEATING:
Temperature
(°C)
Indoor
20/–
condition
Outdoor
7/6
Model
name
Standard
pressure
P (MPa)
Heat exchanger
temp.
pipe
Compresso
Indoor fan Outdoor fan r revolution
mode
(rps)
mode
T1 (°C)
T2 (°C)
09K
2.8 to 3.2
37 to 38
2 to 4
High
High
53
12K
2.8 to 3.2
42 to 44
0 to 3
High
High
74
NOTES :
(1) Measure surface temperature of heat exchanger pipe around center of heat exchanger path
U bent. (Thermistor themometer)
(2) Connecting piping condition : 5 m
149
Appending data
Expanded capacity data tables for both cooling and heating
Cooling
Heating
120
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
100
100
90
Capacity ratio (%)
Capacity ratio (%)
110
80
70
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
80
• Conditions
Indoor : DB 20˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
60
40
–15
–5
–10
0
5
10
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
Capacity Variation Ratio According to Pipe Length
110
110
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27°C/WB19°C
Outdoor : DB35°C/WB24°C
Indoor air flow: High
100
95
Standard pipe length 5m
90
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27°C/WB19°C
Outdoor : DB35°C/WB24°C
Indoor air flow : High
105
Capacity ratio (%)
Capacity ratio (%)
105
85
100
95
90
85
Maximum pipe length 10m
Maximum Elevation 5m
80
80
0
3
6
9
12
Total pipe length (m)
15
18
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Total Elevation (m)
150
Appending data
Operation Characteristic Curve
EVHC 09 DSAAAR
Cooling
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C/WB24˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
5
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C/WB15˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
6
220V
5
Current (A)
6
Current (A)
Heating
4
3
230V
2
220V
4
230V
3
2
240V
240V
1
1
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0
10
20
Compressor speed (rps)
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
80
90
Compressor speed (rps)
EVHC 12 DSAAAR
Cooling
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C/WB24˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
5
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C/WB15˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
6
220V
5
Current (A)
6
Current (A)
Heating
4
3
230V
2
220V
4
230V
3
2
240V
240V
1
1
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Compressor speed (rps)
70
80
90
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Compressor speed (rps)
29
151
Appending data
Noise criteria curve tables for both models
Indoor side noise when blowing
Outdoor side noise
1RLVHG%$
Low
Middle
High
Indoor fan motor rotating speed
Compressor frequency/Hz
152
5()5,*(5$176<67(0',$*5$0
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM
3-Way
valve
Heat exchanger
( INDOOR )
Sub-accumulator
Compressor
Muffler
2-Way
valve
4-Way valve
Strainer
Capillary
Strainer
Heat exchanger
( OUTDOOR )
Strainer
Cooling
Heating
153
Installation
Installation
Important Notices
1. The unit installation work must be done by qualified personnel according to the local rules and this
manual.
2. Before installating, please contact with local authorized maintenance center, if unit is not installed
by the authorized maintenance center, the malfunction may not solved,due to discommodious contacts.
.
3. When removing the unit to the other
place, please firstly contact with the authorized Maintenance
Center in the local area.
Basic Requirements For Installation Position
Install in the following place may cause malfunction. If it is unavoidable contact with service center please:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Place where strong heat sources, vapors, flammable gas or volatile object are emitted.
Place where high-frequency waves are generated by radio equipment, welders and medical equipment.
Place where a lot of salinities such as coast exists.
Place where the oil (machine oil) is contained in the air.
Place where a sulfured gas such as the hot spring zones is generated.
Other place with special circumstance.
Indoor Unit Installation Position Selection
1. The air inlet and outlet vent should be far from the obstruction, make sure that the air can be blown
through the whole room.
2. Select a position where the condensing water can be easily drained out, and the place is easily
connected for outdoor unit
.
3. Select a location where the children can not reach.
4. Can select the place where is strong enough to withstand the full weight and vibration of the unit.
And will not increase the noise.
Be
sure to leave enough space to allow access for routine maintenance. The height of the installed
5.
location should be 250cm or more from the floor.
6. Select a place about 1m or more away from TVset or any other electric appliances.
7. Select a place where the filter can be easily taken out.
8 . Make sure that the indoor unit installation should accord with installation dimension diagram
requirements.
9 . Do not use the unit in the immediate surroundings of a laundry a bath a shower or a swimming pool.
Outdoor Unit Installation Position Selection
1. Select a location from which noise and outflow air emitted by unit will not inconvenience neighbors,
animals, plants.
2. Select a location where there should be sufficient ventilation.
3. Select a location where there should be no obstructions cover the inlet and outlet vent.
4. The location should be able to withstand the full weight and vibration of the outdoor unit and permit
safe installation.
5. Select a dry place, but do not expose under the direct sunlight or strong wind.
6. Make sure that the outdoor unit installation dimension should accord with installation dimension
diagram, convenient for maintenance, repair.
7. The height difference of connecting the tubing within 5m, the length of connecting the tubing within 10m.
8. Select a place where it is out of reach for the children.
9. Select a place where will not block the passage and do not influence the city appearance.
154
Installation
Safety Requirements For Electric Appliances
1. The power supply should be used the rated voltage and AC exclusive circuit,
the power cable diameter should be satisfied.
2. Don't drag the power cable emphatically.
3. It should be reliably earthed, and it should be connected to the special earth device,
the installation work should be operated by the professional.
The air switch must have the functions of magnetic tripping and heat tripping, in order
to protect the short circuit and overloading.
4. The min. distance from the unit and combustive surface is 1.5m.
5. The appliance shall be installed in accordance with national wiring regulations.
6. An all-pole disconnection switch having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles
should be connected in fixed wiring.
Note:
●
Make sure that the Live wire or Zero line as well as the earth wire in the family power
socket can not be wrong connected, there should be reliable and no short circuit in the
diagram.
●
wrong connection may cause fire.
Earthing requirements
1. Air conditioner is type I electric appliance, thus please do conduct reliable earthing
measure.
2. The yellow-green two-color wire in air conditioner is earthing wire and cannot be used
for other propose. It cannot be cut off and be fix it by screw, otherwise it would cause
electric shock.
3. The earth resistance should accord to the National Criterion.
4. The user power must offer the reliable earthing terminal. Please don't connect the
earthing wire with the following place:
ķ Tap water pipe. ĸ Gas pipe.
Ĺ Contamination pipe.
ĺ Other places that professional personnel consider them unreliable.
5. The model and rating values for fuses according the silk print on fuse cover or related
PCB board.
155
Installation
Install the rear panel
1.Always mount the rear panel horizontally. Due to the water tray of indoor unit has been adopted the
both-way drainage design, the outlet of water tray should be adjusted slightly down when installing, that is
taking the outlet of the water tray as the center of a circle, the included angle between the evaporator and
level should be 0 or more, that is good for condensing water drainage.
Wall
2.Fix the rear panel on the wall with screws. Wall
Mark on the middle of it
Gradienter
Space
Space
(Where is pre-covered with plastic granula)
3.Be sure that the rear panel has been fixed
firmly enough to withstand the weight of an
adult of 60kg, further more, the weight should
be evenly shared by each screw.
to the
wall
above
150mm
to the
wall
above
150mm
ij 55mm
φ 55mm
Left
(Rear piping hole)
Right
(Rear piping hole)
Fig.4
Install the piping hole
Indoor
1.Make the piping hole (Ф55) in the wall at a slight downward slant to the
outdoor side.
Wall pipe
Outdoor
Seal pad
2.Insert the piping-hole sleeve into the hole to prevent the connection piping
and wiring from being damaged when passing through the hole.
Ø55
Install the water drainage pipe
1.For well draining, the drain hose should be placed at a downward slant.
Wrenched
Bent
2.Do not wrench or bend the drain hose or flood its end by water.
3.When the long drainage hose passing through indoor,
should wrap the insulation materials.
Flooded
Connect indoor and outdoor electric wires
1.Open the surface panel.
2.Remove the wiring cover .
3.Route the power connection cord and signal control wire (for cooling and heating unit only) from the
back of the indoor unit and pull it toward the front through the wiring hole for connection.
4.Connect the interconnection cord to the terminal block, and then fix the cord with cord anchorge.
5.Reassemble the clampand wiring cover.
6.Recover the surface panel.
yellowgreen
brown
156
Installation
NOTE:
When connecting the electric wire if the wire length is not enough, please contact with
the authorized service shop to buy a exclusive electric wire that is long enough and the
joint on the wire are not allowed.
●
The electric wiring must be correctly connected, wrong connection may cause spare parts
malfunction.
Tighten the terminal screw in order to prevent loose.
After tighten the screw, slight pull the wire and confirm whether is it firm or not.
●
If the earth wire is wrong connection, that may cause electric shock.
●
The cover plate must be fixed, and tighten the connection wire, if it is poor installed, that
the dust, moisture may enter in or the connection terminal will be affected by outside force,
and will cause fire or electric shock.
●
●
Install the indoor unit
The piping can be lead out from right, right rear, left
left rear.
1.When routing the piping and wiring from the left
or right side of indoor unit, cut off the tailings
from the chassis in necessary(Show in Fig.7)
Ł Cut off the tailings 1 when routing the wiring only;
ł Cut off the tailings 1 and tailings 2 when routing
both the wiring and piping.
2. Take out the piping from body case, wrap the piping
electric wire, water pipe with tape and pull them
through the piping hole (As show in Fig.8)
3. Hange the mounting slots of the indoor unit on the
upper tabs of the rear panel and check if it is firm
enough.(As show in Fig.9)
4. The height of the installed location should be 2.5m
or more from the floor.
●
Gas side pipe
External connection
electric wire
Liquid side piping
Tailing 2
Tailing 1
Gas side piping
insulation
Finally wrap it
with tape
Fig.5
Liquid side
Piping insulation
Water drainage pipe
Left
Right
Left rear
Right rear
Fixing hook
Mounting
plate
Fig.6
Mounting
baord
Fig.7
Install the connection pipe
1. Align the center of the piping flare with the relevant valve.
2. Screw in the flare nut by hand and then tighten the
nut with spanner and torque wrench refer to the
following:
Hex nut diameter
Ф6
Ф 9.52
Ф 12
Ф 16
Ф 19
Indoor unit piping
Taper nut Piping
Tightening torque (N·m)
15̚20
31̚35
50̚55
60̚65
70̚75
Spanner
Torque
wrench
NOTE: Firstly connect the connection pipe to indoor unit, then to outdoor unit; pay attention
to the piping bending, do not damage the connection pipe; the joint nut couldn't tighten too
much, otherwise it may cause leakage.
157
Installation
Electric wiring
1. Disassemble the handle on the outdoor unit right side plate.
2.Take off cord anchorage. Connect and fix power connect
cord (for cooling and heating unit,connect and fix power
connect cord and signal control wire)to terminal block.
1 %8
%.
%1 <(*1
3.Fix the power connection cable with cord anchorage,
(for cooling and heating unit, use the cord anchorage
to fix the power connection cable and the signal
control wire).
Handle
4. Ensure wire has been fixed well.
5. Install the handle.
NOTE:
● Wrong wiring may cause spare parts malfunction.
● After the cable fixed, make sure there should be
a free space between the connection and
connection and fixing place on the lead wire.
Air purging and leakage test
1. Connect charging hose of manifold valve to charge end of low pressure
valve (both high/low pressure valves must be tightly shut).
2. Connect joint of charging hose to vacuum pump.
Multimeter
-76cmHg
3. Fully open handle handle of Lo manifold valve.
Lo Handle
4. Open the vacuum pump to evacuate. At the beginning, slightly
Charging hose
loosen joint nut of low pressure valve to check if there
is air coming inside. (If noise of vacuum pump has
been changed, the reading of multimeter is 0) Then
tighten the nut.
5. Keep evacuating for more than 15mins and make
sure the reading of multi-meter is -1.0 105pa
(-76cmHg)..
Manifold Valve
Low pressure valve
6. Fully open high/low pressure valves.
7. Remove charging hose from charging end of low pressure valve.
8. Tighten bonnet of low-pressure valve. (As shown in Fig.10)
Manometer
Hi handle
Charging hose
Vacuum pump
Fig.8
Condensate drainage of outdoor unit (no for cooling only)
The condensate and defrosting water formd during heating
in the outdoor unit can be properly discharged by drainage
pipe .
Installation method:set the drain connection in Ø 25 hole of the
chassis has been installed and then connect drainage pipe
with drain nozzle,so that condensate and defrosting waer can
be properly discharged
Chassis
Drain
connection
158
Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting Guide
Note: When replacing the controller, make sure insert the wire jumper into the new controller, otherwise the
unit display C5
The breaker trips at once when it
Measure insulation resistance to ground to see
if there is any leakage.
is set to "ON".
Trip of breaker or blow
The circuit or the part of the air conditioner has
of fuse
malfunction. They heat and break the insulation
The breaker trips in few minutes
and lead to short circuit or creepage. Measure
when it is set to "ON"
the insulation resistance or eliminate the malfunction one by one. If the breaker itself has
Air conditioner can not start up
malfunction, then replace the breaker.
No power
Check power supply circuit.
Power plug is not well plugged in and poor con-
Check if the plug is properly plugged in and
nection
make the loose contact firm.
The air conditioner
does not react after
it is powered ( after
Fuse of controller burnt out
Change controller fuse
the plug is inserted,
the buzzer does
not sound and the
The transformer connection is loose or has bad
contact or the transformer has malfunction
Fasten the wiring; measure the output
voltage of the transformer, if it is
incorrect, change the transformer
remote startup has
no response)
The remote controller
Cont roller is broken
Check remote controller
Remote controller is short of power
Change batteries
Remote controller malfunction
First, press the manual switch button AUTO,
does not receive
signals (after it is
if there is no response,check based on the
powered, the buzzer
will sound, unless it
has
above methods. If it runs normally after
Receiver loose or poor connection
pressing the button,check again whether the
installation position and the connection wire
malfunction)
of the reception head is correct. If it is
correct,then replace the receiver or the re-
Receiver is broken
mote controller.
heck the voltage. If it is lower than 10£¥ of the rated voltage, check the
Power voltage is too low
cause, improve the power supply condition and add the stabilized voltage
power supply.
159
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Improper set of temperature
Adjust set temperature
If cooling (heating) load is
Check the forecasted load of cooling (heating)
proper
The refrigerant has leakage or is
insufficient
heck and fill the leakage, then
vacuumize it and supplement the refrigerant as required
Leakage between the high presMalfunction of
refrigerant
flow
sure and the low pressure inside the compressor
Malfunction of four-way valve
Local block of capillary
Poor COOL(HEAT) operation
Replace the compressor
Replace the four-way valve
Replace the capillary
Judge whether the system is blocked by
Blockage of cooling system
observing the condensation of evaporator and the pressure value of the high
pressure manometer and take measures
to deal with the system.
Heat insulation for the connection
pipes of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is bad.
Make sure that heat insulation for the thick and thin pipes
is good. Heat insulation must also be provided for the
joint andthe exposed part of the copper pipe .
Block of outdoor heat exchanger
Clean the dust accumulated on the surface of
the heat exchanger.
Air filter were blocked
Clean the filter
To set the fan speed to high or
Fan speed was set too slow
Air circulation
is insufficient
Fan rotation speed becomes
low
middle speed
Capacitor
Replace the capaci-
damage
tor
Motor damage
Replace the motor
The installation position of the
Good ventilation must be provided for the
outdoor unit is not appropriate.
installation position of the outdoor unit.
The outdoor temperature is too high.
Properly install the rainproof plate or the sunproof plate. If the
maximum cool air still can not meet the requirement, it is suggested to replace the air conditioner.
The air tightness is not enough. People
come in and out too frequently. There
are heating devices indoors.
160
Keep certain air tightness indoors, try not to use
electricalappliance with large quantity of heat
Troubleshooting Guide
The indoor fan motor is burned or breaks or
has the heat protector malfunction.
The fan does not
run when it is set
to supply air.
In the cooling and
heating mode, the
compressor runs,
but the outdoor
fan does not run.
When cooling or
heating, outdoor
fanruns,compressor
doesn't run.
The compressor is
too hot and leads to
the action of the
protector.
Replace the fan motor or the defective part.
The built-in heat protector of the motor breaks
frequently because the motor is
abnormal.
Replace the fan motor
Wrong connection
Make the correction connection based on the circuit
drawing.
The fan capacitor has open circuit or is damaged.
Replace the fan capacitor of the same type and same
specification.
The outdoor fan motor is damaged.
Replace the fan motor
Wrong connection
Make the correct connection based on the circuit
drawing.
The outdoor fan capacitor is damaged.
Replace the fan capacitor
Malfunction of compressor
Replace the compressor
Breakage of running capacitor of compressor
Replace the capacitor
The voltage is too low or too high.
Manostat is recommended.
Wrong wire connection
Connect the circuit diagram correctly
The protector itself has malfunction.
Use the multimeter to check whether the contact of
the compressor is on when it is not overheated. If it
is not on, then replace the protector
The refrigerant is not enough or is too much.
Adjust the volume of the refrigerant
The capillary is blocked and the temperature
rises.
Replace the capillary
The compressor does not run smoothly or is
stuck. The air discharge valve is damaged
Replace the compressor
The protector itself has malfunction.
Replace the protector
The torque of the swing motor is not enough
The swing fan does
not run.
wrong connection
First, check whether the connection is wrong. If no,
replace the parts
The controller is damaged• •IC2003 is
damaged,
the swing relay can not close,
• •
etc
161
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Controller malfunction (IC2003 broken,
creepage of
parallel capacitor of relay loop,
Change controller
relay is broken etc.)
In cool, heat mode,the
outdoor
unit and compressor
will not run.
Wire loose or wrong connection
Correctly wire according to the drawing
Improper setting of temperature
Adjust setting temp.
Drainage pipe blocked or broken
Change drainage pipe
Wrap of refrigerant pipe joint is not close
Re-wrap and make it tight.
Water leakage
enough.
Abnormal sound
and shake
162
Fan of indoor unit contacts other parts.
Adjust fan location.
Foreign object in indoor unit
Take out the foreign object.
Compressor shakes too much.
Adjust support washer of compressor, and
tighten loosen screws.
Touch of pipeline of outdoor unit
Separate the touching pipeline.
Touch of inner plates
1. Tighten connect screw.
2. Stick absorbing clay between plates.
Louver of outdoor unit touched outer
case.
Adjust location of louver.
Abnormal sound inside compressor
Change compressor
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Flashing LED of Indoor/Outdoor Unit and Primary Judgement
Name of running status
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Compressor start
Defrosting
Anti-freezing protection
IPM protection
Yellow light
Red light
Green light
Blink once
H1
E2
H5
E5
H4
E4
H3
Blink twice
Blink three times
Blink four times
Overcurrent protection
Blink five times
Overload protection
Blink six times
Air exhaust protection
Blink seven times
Overload protection
Blink eight times
Limited frequency (current)
Blink once
Limited frequency (Air exhaust)
Blink twice
Limited frequency (overload)
Blink three times
Limited frequency (anti-freezing)
Blink four times
Outdoor unit ambient sensor malfunction
Blink five times
Outdoor unit tube temp. sensor malfunction
Blink six times
Outdoor air exhaust sensor malfunction
Blink seven times
Achieve the temperature of unit
startsup
F3
F4
F5
Blink eight times
Communication is normal
Blink continuously
Communication malfunction
OFF
Overload sensor malfunction
Blink nine times
Low voltage protection
Blink twelve times
High voltage protection
Blink thirteen times
Indoor ambient sensor malfunction
Indoor tube temperature sensor
malfunction
Normal cooling or norminal heating
Max. cooling or max. heating
Interim cooling or interim heating
Min. cooling or Min. heating
Indoor unit display
E6
H3
PL
PH
F1
F2
P1
P2
P3
P4
163
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Malfunction Display
If malfunction occurs,corresponding code will display and the unit will resume normal until protection or
malfunction disappears.
Yellow indicator blinks for once
Yellow indicator blinks for twice
Yellow indicator blinks for 3 times
Compressor stars (normal)
Defrosting (normal display of indoor unit)
Anti-freezing protection (normal
display of indoor unit)
Yellow indicator blinks for 4 times
IPM protection
Yellow indicator blinks for 5 times
Overcurrent protection
Yellow indicator blinks for 6 times
Overload protection
Yellow indicator blinks for 7 times
Exhaust protection
Yellow indicator blinks for 8 times
Overlod protection of compresoor
Indicator display
of outdoor unit
Red indicator blinks for once
Cooling (dehumidify) or heating current
dropped frequency current.
Red indicator blinks for twice
r
Exhaust
temp.
Red indicator blinksfor 3 times
Tube temp.
Red indicator blinks for 4 times
T tube-in
Red indicator blinks for 5 times
Outdoor condenser temp. sensor mal.
Red indicator for 6 times
dropped frequency temp.
dropped frequency temp.
dropped frequency temp.
Outdoor ambient temp. sensor mal.
Red indicator blinks for 7 times
Outdoor exhaust temp. sensor mal.
Red indicator blinks for 8 times
Starting at temp. does not reach
Green indicator does not blink
Communication is abnormal
164
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Analysis or processing of some of the malfunction display:
1. Compressor discharge protection
Possible reasons: shortage of refrigerant; blockage of air filter; poor ventilation or air flow short pass for condenser;
the system has noncondensing gas (such as air, water etc.); blockage of capillary assy (including filter); leakage
inside four-way valve causes incorrect operation; malfunction of compressor; malfunction of protection relay;
malfunction of discharge sensor; outdoor temperature too high.
Processing method: refer to the malfunction analysis in the above section.
2.
Low voltage overcurrent protection
3.
Communication malfunction
Possible reason: Sudden drop of supply voltage.
Processing method: Check if communication signal cable is connected reliably.
4. Sensor open or short circuit
Processing method: Check whether sensor is normal, connected with the corresponding position on the
controller and if damage of lead wire is found.
5.
Compressor overload protection
Possible reasons: insufficient or too much refrigerant; blockage of capillary and increase of suction temp.;
improper running of compressor, burning in or stuck of bearing, damage of discharge valve;
malfunction of protector.
Processing method: adjust refrigerant amount; replace the capillary; replace the compressor; use
universal meter to check if the contactor of compressor is fine when it is not overheated, if not replace
the protector.
6.
System malfunction
i.e. overload protection. When tube temperature (Check the temperature of outdoor heat exchanger
when cooling and check the temperature of indoor heat exchanger when heating) is too high,
protection will be activated.
Possible reasons: Outdoor temperature is too high when cooling; insufficient outdoor air circulation;
refrigerant flow malfunction.
please refer to the malfunction analysis in the previous section for handling method .
7. IPM module protection
Processing method:Once the module malfunction happens,if it persists for a long time and can not be self- canceled,
cut off the power and turn off the unit,and then re-energize the unit again after about 10 min.After repeating the
procedure for sever times, if the malfunction still exists,replace the module.
165
Troubleshooting Guide
3ǃHow to Check simply the main part
(1) Capacitor charge fault (Fault with outdoor unit) (AP1 below refers to the outdoor control panel)
Main Check Points:
Use AC voltmeter to check if the voltage between terminal L and N on the wiring board is within 210VAC~240VAC.
If the reactor (L) is correctly connected? If the connection is loose or fallen? If the reactor (L) is damaged?
Fault diagnosis process:
Switch on the unit
and wait 1 minute
Use DC voltmeter
to measure the
voltage on the two
ends of electrolytic
capacitor (test3)
Voltage higher than 200V?
Y
Fault with the voltage
testing circuit on
control panel AP1
Replace the control
panel AP1
Switch off the power
and repair the supply
power to restore the
voltage to
210VAC~250VAC
Re-energize and
switch on the unit
N
Measure the AC voltage between
terminal L and N on wiring board
XT
Voltage within
210VAC~250VAC?
N
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
Y
Switch off the power and wait 20 minutes; or
use DC voltmeter to measure the voltage on the
two ends of capacitor (test3), until the voltage
is lower than 20V
N
Check the
connection of reactor
(L in the Electrical
Wiring Diagram)
If the wiring of
reactor L is normal?
N
Connect the reactor L
according to Electrical
Wiring Diagram
Re-energize and
switch on the unit
Y
Replace the control
panel AP1
End
166
N
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
(2) IPM Protection, Out-of-step Fault, Compressor Phase Overcurrent (AP1 below refers
to the outdoor control panel)
Mainly detect:
If the connection between control panel AP1 and compressor COMP is secure? If loose? If the connection is in correct order?
If the voltage input of the machine is within normal range? (Use AC voltmeter to measure the voltage
between terminal L and N on the wiring board XT)
If the compressor coil resistance is normal? If the insulation of compressor coil against the copper tube
is in good condition?
If the working loads of the machine are too high? If the radiation is good?
If the charge volume of refrigerant is correct?
Fault diagnosis process:
167
Troubleshooting Guide
Energize and
switch on
IPM protection
occurs after the
machine has run for
a period of time?
Y
Use AC voltmeter
to measure the
voltage between
terminal L and N
on the wiring
board XT)
If the voltage
between terminal L
and N on wiring
board XT is within
210VAC~250VAC?
N
Check the supply
voltage and
restore it to
210VAC~250VAC
Y
Start and run the
unit. Before
protection occurs,
use DC voltmeter to
measure the voltage
between the two
ends of electrolytic
capacitor on control
panel AP1 (test3)
Voltage between
the two ends of
electrolytic
capacitor (test3) is
higher than 250V
Y
Please confirm:
1. If the indoor and
outdoor heat
exchangers are
dirty? If they are
obstructed by other
objects which affect
the heat exchange
of indoor and
outdoor unit.
2. If the indoor and
outdoor fans are
working normally?
3. If the environment
temperature is too
high, resulting in
that the system
pressure is too high
and exceeds the
permissible range?
4. If the charge
volume of
refrigerant is too
much, resulting in
that the system
pressure is too
high?
5. Other conditions
resulting in that the
system pressure
becomes too high.
The connection
of capacitor C2
is loose.
Stop the unit and
disconnect the power
supply. Wait 20 minutes,
or use DC voltmeter to
measure the voltage
between the two ends of
capacitor C2, until the
voltage is lower than 20V
If capacitor
C2 is failed?
Replace the capacitor
C2. Then, energize
and start the unit.
Y
Replace the
control panel AP1
N
If there is any
abnormality
described above?
Y
Replace the
control panel AP1
Y
Connect the control panel
AP1 and compressor
COMP correctly according
to the Electrical Wiring
Diagram. Then, energize
and start the unit.
If the
resistance is
normal?
N
If the unit can
work
normally?
Replace the
compressor
COMP
Resistance higher
than 500MΩ?
N
Replace the
control panel
AP1
END
168
N
If the unit can
work
normally?
If the unit can
work
normally?
Y
Y
N
Take corrective actions
according to Technical
Service Manual, and
then energize and start
the unit.
N
Use ohmmeter to
measure the resistance
between the two
terminals of compressor
COMP and copper tube.
Y
Reconnect the
capacitor C2 according
to Electrical Wiring
Diagram. Then,
energize and start the
unit.
Y
N
Remove the wires
on the two ends of
capacitor C2. Then,
use
capacitance
meter to measure
the capacitor C2.
Verify as per the
Parameters Sheet.
N
Use ohmmeter to
measure the resistance
between the three
terminals on compressor
COMP, and compare the
measurements with the
compressor resistance on
Service Manual.
If the unit can
work
normally?
N
Stop the unit and
disconnect the power
supply. Then, check
the connection of
capacitor
C2
according to Electrical
Wiring Diagram.
Refer to the
Electrical Wiring
Diagram and check
if the connection
between AP1 and
COMP is loose and if
the connection order
is correct.
If the connection
between AP1 and
COMP is unsecure
or the connection
order is wrong?
N
If the unit can
work
normally?
N
Y
Y
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
˄3˅High temperature and overload protection diagnosis (AP1 hereinafter refers to the control board of the
outdoor unit)
Mainly detect:
● Is outdoor ambient temperature in normal range?
● Are the outdoor and indoor fans operating normally?
● Is the heat dissipation environment inside and outside the unit is good?
Overheat and high
temperature protection
Y
Is outdoor ambient temperature higher than 53?
Normal protection, please operate it after the
outdoor ambient temperature is normalized.
N
20 minutes after the complete
unit is powered off.
Is heat dissipation of the indoor unit
and outdoor unit abnormal?
Y
Improve the heat
dissipation environment
of the unit
N
Does the outdoor fan work normally?
N
1. Check if the fan terminal OFAN
is connected correctly
2. Resistance between any two
terminals is measure by an ohm
gauge and should be less than 1K
Ohm.
Y
Replace the fan
capacitor C1
Replace the control panel
AP1
Replace the
outdoor fan
End
169
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
(4) Fail for start up (following AP1 for outdoor unit control board)
Mainly detect:
Whether the compressor wiring is connected correct?
Is time for compressor stopping enough?
Is compressor broken?
Power on the unit
Is stop time of the compressor
longer than 3 minutes?
N
Restart it up after 3 minutes
Y
Does startup fail?
Y
Are the wires for the compressor connected
correctly? Is connection sequence right?
N
Connect the wires as per the
connection diagram
Y
Replace the control panel AP1
N
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Replace the
compressor
Y
End
48
170
Troubleshooting Guide
(5) Out of step diagnosis for the compressor (AP1 hereinafter refers to the control board of the outdoor unit)
Mainly detect:
Whether the unit voltage is too high?
Whether the work voltage is too low?
Out of step occurs once the
unit is powered on.
Out of step occurs in
operation
Is stop time of the
compressor longer than
3 minutes?
Is the outdoor fan working
normally?
Is the outdoor unit blocked
by foreign objects?
Are the wires for the compressor connected
correctly? Is connection sequence right?
Is the connection made in clockwise
direction?
Check if the fan terminal
OFAN is connected correctly
Replace the fan
capacitor C1
Replace the
outdoor fan
Remove foreign objects
Replace the
control panel AP1
Connect the
wires correctly
Replace the control
panel AP1
If the fault is eliminated?
If the fault is eliminated?
Replace the
compressor
Replace the
compressor
End
End
171
Troubleshooting Guide
(6)Overload and air exhaust malfunction detect (following AP1 for outdoor unit control board)
Mainly detect:
Wether the electronic expansion valve is connected well or not? Is electronic expansion valve damaged?
Is refrigerant leaked?
20 minutes after the
complete unit is
powered off
Is the terminal FA for the
electronic expansion valve
connected correctly?
Resistances between the first four pins
close to the terminal hole and the fifth
pin are almost the same, less than 100
ohm.
Replace the electronic
expansion valve
If the fault is eliminated?
Replace the
control panel
AP1
If the fault is eliminated?
Coolant leakage, refilling
the coolant
End
172
Connect the
wires correctly
Troubleshooting Guide
˄7˅Power factor correction (PFC) fault (a fault of outdoor unit) (AP1 hereinafter
refers to the control board of the outdoor unit)
Mainly detect:
Check if the reactor (L) of the outdoor unit and the PFC capacitor are broken
The failure diagnosis process is as follows:
Start
Check wiring of the
reactor (L) of the
outdoor unit and the
PFC capacitor
Whether there is any
damage or
short-circuit?
Y
Replace it as per the
wiring diagram and
reconnect the wires
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Remove the PFC capacitor
and measure resistance
between the two terminals.
N
Is the resistance around zero?
Y
The capacitor is
short circuited and
the capacitor
should be replaced
Restart the unit
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
N
Disconnect the terminals for the
reactor and measure the resistance
between the two terminals of the
reactor by an ohm gauge
Whether there is any damage
or short-circuit?
N
Y
Replace the reactor
Restart the unit
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
N
Replace the control
panel AP1
N
Y
End
173
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
(8) Communication malfunction: (following AP1 for outdoor unit control board)
Mainly detect:
Detect the indoor and outdoor units connection wire and indoor and outdoor units inside wiring is connect
well or not, if is there any damage?
Is there any damage for the indoor unit mainboard communication circuit? Is communication circuit damaged?
The flow chart for malfunction detect:
Start
Y
N
Did the equipment operate
normally before the failure
occurs?
Check the wiring of the indoor and
outdoor units with reference to the
wiring diagram
Check wiring inside of
the indoor and outdoor
units
Y
Is the connection right?
N
N
The AP1 voltage
detection circuit
is at fault
Y
Correctly connect the
corresponding wires for
the indoor and outdoor
units with reference to
the wiring diagram
Are wires broken?
N
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Check the communication
circuit of the outdoor unit
If the fault is eliminated?
The communication
circuit is abnormal
Y
Replace the main board
˄AP1˅of the outdoor unit
N
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Replace the main board of
the indoor unit
Y
Y
174
End
Y
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Appendix 1: form for indoor/outdoor unit's ambient sensor numerical value of resistance
Temp.
Resistance
˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
Temp.
Resistance
˄N¡˅
Temp.
Resistance
˄ć˅
˄N¡˅
Resistance
Temp.
˄ć˅
˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
175
Troubleshooting Guide
Appendix 2: form for indoor/outdoor unit's tube temperature sensor numerical value of resistance
Temp
˄ć˅
176
Resistance
˄N¡˅
Temp
˄ć˅
Resistance
˄N¡˅
Resistance
Resistance
Temp
•
˄ć˅ • • ˄N¡˅
Temp
˄ć˅
• • • • • • • ˄N¡˅
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Appendix 3: form for indoor/outdoor unit's air exhaust temperature sensor numerical value of resistance
Temp.
Resistance
• • • • • • ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
Temp.
Resistance
• • • • • • ˄N¡˅
Temp.
Resistance
•
˄ć˅
• • • • ˄N¡˅
Temp.
˄ć˅
•Resistance
• • • • • • ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
177
'LVDVVHPEO\
Disassembly
Indoor Unit
Disconnect the unit from power supply before making any checks.
Be sure the power switch is set to “OFF”.
1.Disassemble the front panel
Front panel
Open the front panel, slightly press the both sides of rotating axial
of the panel, to make the rotating axial out of groove, can take down
the front panel.
To push the filter forward, to make the both clasps loosen, can pull
Screw off one screw from the top cover, can take down it.
out off the filter.
Filter
Top cover
2.Disassemble the air guide louver
To make the axis sleeve out of the middle of left air guide louver,
hold both sides of air guide louver, slightly press the middle part
then can disassemble the air guide louver.
Air guide board
Axis sleeve
3.Disassemble the front case
Screw off 7pcs screw from fixing front case, loosen the clasps of
rear side, lift it up, can disassemble the front case.
Screws
Clasps
178
Disassembly
4.Disassemble the electric box cover
Slightly press the electric box cover to make the clasps out
take down the ambient sensor, can take down the electrric box
cover.
Electric box cover
Earth screw
Cold plasma
Tube temperature sensor
5.Disassemble electric box
Screw off the screws fix the electrix box, screw off the earh screw,
pull out the tube sensor, pull out the air guide motor, the wiring terminal
of motor, screw off the screws fixing the displayer, can take down
the electric box.
Wire terminal
Screws
Mianboard
6.Disassemble the evaporator
Screw off the screws fixing the connection pipe clamp, loosen the clasp
from left side, take down the connection pipe clamp; Unscrew the screws
Screws
at both sides of evaporator, slightly move right toward, to make the right
side clasp loosen, then can take down the evaporator.
Connection pipe clamp
179
Disassembly
Clasp
Screws
Screws
7.Disassemble the motor
Unscrew the screws which fix the motor clamp, take down the motor and
cross flow fan, screw off one screw which connects with the motor and
cross flow fan, then take out the motor.
Screws
Motor clamp
Cross flow fan
Screw
Motor
180
'LVDVVHPEO\
outdoor Unit
Unscrew the screw fixing the big handle,and then
remove it downwards to take it out.
Screw
Big Handle
Unscrew the 2 screws fixing left side of top cover
and the 1 screw fixing the right side to remove the
top cover.
Screws
Unscrew the 4 screws fixing the rear grill to remove it.
Rear Grill
Screws
181
Disassembly
Unscrew the 5 screws fixing the panel and
dextrorotate the front panel to pull it out from
groove.
Screws
Unscrew the 2 screws fixing electric box ,and then
unscrew the 5 screws fixing the right side plate to
remove it.
Screws
Right Side Plate
Screws
Electric box cover
Firstly unscrew off two pcs screw on the lelectric box cover,
take down the connection wire of motor, compressor, sensor,
electric heating belt, screw off the earth screw at side wire
terminal and two pcs screw which fixes the electric box, then
can take down the electric box.
Screws
182
Disassembly
Loosen the fastening nut fixing the axial flow fan
with a spanner, and then take out the nut, spring
Axial Flow Fan
gasket and flap gasket in turn.
Nut
Unscrew the 4 screws fixing the motor to take out
the motor,and then unscrew the 2 screws fixing the
motor support to take it out.
Screws
Motor
Screws
Four-way valve
Unscrew the fastening nut of the four-way valve
coil and remove the coil. Wrap the four-way valve
with wet cotton and unsolder the 4 weld spots
connecting the four-way valve to take it out. (Note:
Refrigerant should be discharged firstly.)
Welding process should be as quick as possible
and keep wrapping cotton wet all the time. Be
Four-way valve coil
Weld spots
sure not to burn out the lead-out wire of
compressor.
183
Disassembly
Respectively unsolder the weld spots of main
capillary and auxiliary capillary to take off the
capillary.
Capillary
Screw off the screws which fix the valves, unsolder the pipeline
take down the valves.
Bolts
Liquid Valve
Gas Valve
Loosen 3 pcs nut from the bottom of compressor, unsolder
the air intake and air exhaust pipeline, becareful to move
the pipeline, and take out the compressor.
Nuts with washers
184
Exploded View
Exploded View
Indoor Unit
185
Exploded View
Outdoor Unit
186
Replacement Parts List
Replacement Parts List
Parts List (Indoor)
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Description
Wall-Mounting Frame
Rear Case
Evaporator Assy
Evaporator Support
Cross Flow Fan
Bearing cushion rubber base
Ring of Bearing
Volute tongue
Left Axile Bush
Crank
Axile Bush
Swing Louver1
Swing Louver2
Front Case
Filter
Remote Control YB1FA
Decorate Piece
Double-side glue
Receiver Board D5183B
Front Panel
Screw Cover
Guide Louver
Wire Clamp
Rear Clamp
Motor MP24AA
Motor Clamp
Motor FN20J-PG
Electric Box Cover 1
Covering Plate2
Terminal Board T4B3A
Electric Box
Main PCB M809F2J(MI)
Jumping Connector
Transformer 41X26.5G
Power Cable
Connecting Cable
Part Code
EVKC 09 DS
01252015
22202453
0100255203
24212090
10352018
26152022
76512203
26112162
/
10582070
10542008
10512113
10512114
20012120
11122081
30510041
2019223801
/
30565012
20012151S
24252016
10512111
71010103
26112164
1521210801
26112160
15012078
20102848
20122075
42011233
20112064
30138026
4202300106
43110236
400204643
400205236
EVKC 12 DS
01252013
22202454
0100255302
24212091
10352017
26152022
76512203
26112163
10512037
10582070
10542008
10512156
10512155
20012123
1112220401
30510041
2019223601
55112004
30565012
20012153
24252016
10512157
71010003
26112164
1521210801
26112161
150120874
20102848
20122075
42011233
20112064
30138026
4202300105
43110236
400204643
4002052312
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOTE) *Please ensure GCSC since these parts may be changed depending upon the buyer's request.
65
187
Replacement Parts List
No
Part Code
Description
Qty
1
Front Panel
EVJC 09 DS
01533005
EVJC 12 DS
01533006
2
Clap Board
01233012
01233381
1
1
3
Drainage Connecter
06123401
6123401
1
4
Reactor Support
01203682P
0120368201P
1
5
Temperature Sensor 222KT-XH-2P(white)-4
39000302
39000302
1
6
Compressor KNB092FHBMC
00120228
00120228
1
7
/
/
/
/
8
Compressor Bolt
70210108
70210108
3
9
Nut M6Xφ25X6.5
70310011
70310013
3
10
Valve Support
11
Right Side Plate
12
Valve 3/8
01713041
01713041
1
0130200401
0130200401
1
07100005
07100006
1
13
Valve 1/4
07100003
07100004
1
14
Capillary Assy
0310333305
0310307210
1
15
4-Way Valve
430004022
430004032
1
16
4-way Rever-sing Valve Component
03123042
03123126
1
17
Big Handle
26233433
26233433
1
18
4-way Valve Coil
430004002
430004002
1
19
Wire Clap
71010003
71010003
1
20
Insulation Piece D
70410525
70410525
1
21
Terminal Board A
42011113
42011113
1
22
Electric Box Assy
01403998
01403998
1
23
Electric Box
20113005
20113005
1
24
PCB W8073B
301380021
30138013
1
25
Temperature Sensor
39000208
39000208
1
26
Sensor 20K
390001921
390001921
1
27
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 50K
39000016
39000016
1
28
Electric Box Cover
01413048
01413048
1
29
Sensor Insert
42020063
42020063
1
30
Radiator
49010065
49010065
1
31
Rear Grill
32
Condenser Assy
33
Top Cover Assy
34
Motor Support
01473023
01473023
1
0110359012
0111308203
1
01253261
01253261
1
01705002
01705002
1
35
Reactor L15mH/10A
43130178
43130178
1
36
Reactor Box
01403617
01413504
1
37
Motor FW25K
150130671
15013067
1
38
Axial Flow Fan
10333414
10333413
1
39
Nut
70310131
70310131
1
40
Front Grill
22413431
22413431
1
41
Heating cable
76513004
76513004
1
NOTE) *Please ensure GCSC since these parts may be changed depending upon the buyer's request.
66
188
$SSHQGL[
$SSHQGL[
Method of testing the system at a fixed frequency operation.
9K
Model
Mode
Rotate speed
Cooling
25
Setting temp.
9K
Heating
25
25
9K
50
68
53
80
95
19
P2
74
29
12K
P2
18
P1
25
27
12K
P1
16
P0
Setting temp.
Mode
Rotate speed
12K
P0
80
95
30
After set up the turbo and indoor setting temperature, within 2.5s continuously press “Sleep” button four times, the
displayer will display P0 or the corresponding codes, that will enter into relevant testing status, the compressor will
run according to the relevant frequency.
P0: Min. status; P1: Rated status; P2:Max. status
189
High Wall
EVHC 18 to 24 DSAAAR
SERVICE MANUAL
EVHC-18 / EVHC-24
SM-EVHC-D-18-24GB 05-10
190
CONTENTS
Safety Cautions ................................................................................................................................1
Operation of wireless remote control .................................................................................................4
Emergency operation ........................................................................................................................9
Product Specifications .....................................................................................................................10
Part name ........................................................................................................................................12
Dimensions ......................................................................................................................................13
Schematic Diagram .........................................................................................................................15
PCB function manual and operation method ...................................................................................25
Appending data ...............................................................................................................................37
Refrigerant sysem diagram .............................................................................................................41
Installation .......................................................................................................................................42
Troubleshooting Guide ....................................................................................................................47
Disassembly ....................................................................................................................................69
Exploded View .................................................................................................................................78
Replacement Parts List ....................................................................................................................81
Appendix ..........................................................................................................................................84
191
6DIHW\&DXWLRQV
Safety Cautions
7RSUHYHQWLQMXU\WRWKHXVHURURWKHUSHRSOHDQGSURSHUW\GDPDJHWKHIROORZLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVPXVW
EHIROORZHG
■ ,QFRUUHFWRSHUDWLRQGXHWRLJQRULQJLQVWUXFWLRQZLOOFDXVHKDUPRUGDPDJH7KHVHULRXVQHVVLV
FODVVLILHGE\WKHIROORZLQJLQGLFDWLRQV
7KLVV\PEROLQGLFDWHVWKHSRVVLELOLW\RIGHDWKRUVHULRXVLQMXU\
7KLVV\PEROLQGLFDWHVWKHSRVVLELOLW\RILQMXU\RUGDPDJHWRSURSHUWLHVRQO\
■ 0HDQLQJVRIV\PEROVXVHGLQWKLVPDQXDODUHDVVKRZQEHORZ
Be sure not to do.
Be sure to follow the instruction.
ƾ Earth: The ground be connected!
ƾBe sure to pull out the power plug when not
using the air conditioner for a long time.
If not, please ask the qualified personnel to install. Furthermore,
don't connect each wire to the gas pipe, water pipe, drainage
pipe, drainage pipe or any other improper places.
ƾ Select the most appropriate temperature.
Keep room cooer than outside
about 5 degree.
It can preclude the electricity wasted.
Otherwise, the accumulated dust may cause fire or electric
shock.
ƾ Don't leave windows and doors open for a
long time while operating the air conditioner.
It can decrease the air conditioning capacity.
192
6DIHW\&DXWLRQV
ƾ For re-installation of the installed product,
always contact a dealer or an authorized
service center.
There is risk of fire, electric shock, explosion, or
injury.
ƾ Be cautious when unpacking and installing
the product.
Sharp edges could cause injury. Be especially careful of the case edges and the fins on the condenser
and evaporator.
ƾ Do not install the product on a defective
installation stand.
ƾ
Do not install, remove, or re-install the
unit by yourself.
There is risk of fire, electric shock, explosion, or
injury.
ƾ
For installation, always contact the
dealer or an Authorized service center.
There is risk of fire, electric shock, explosion, or injury.
ƾ
Be sure the installation area does not
deteriorate with age.
• It may cause injury, accident, or damage to the
product.
• If the base collapses, the air conditioner could fall
with it, causing property damage, product failure,
and personal injury.
193
6DIHW\&DXWLRQV
ƾ Don't place a space heater near the air
conditioner.
Or CO toxicosis may occur for imcomplete
burning.
ƾ The airflow direction can be adjusted
appropriately.At operating, adjust the
vertical airflow direction by adjusting the
louvers of upward/downward direction.
And then, hold two ends of left and right
louver to adjust the horizontal airflow.
Louver of left/right direction Louver of upward/
downward direction.
ƾ Don't apply the cold wind to the body for
a long time.
ƾ Keep combustible spray away from
the units more than 1m.
It can cause afire or explosion.
ƾDon't insert your hands or stick into the air
intake or outlet vents.
Otherwise it will cause accident.
ƾ Don't blow the wind to animals and plants
directly. It can cause a bad influence to
them.
It can cause the health problems.
Splashing water on the air conditioner
ƾ can
cause an electric shock and
malfunction.
ƾ Don't use the air conditioner for other purposes, such as drying clothes, preserving
foods, etc.
194
Operation of wireless remote control
Operation of wireless remote control
Note: Be sure that there are no obstructions between receiver and remote controller;
Don't drop or throw the remote control; Don't let any liquid in the remote control and
put the remote control directly under the sunlight or any place where is very hot.
Signal transmitter
SLEEP
SLEEP button
ƽ
FAN
FAN button
ƽ
Remote control
ON/OFF
ON/OFF button
ƽ
MODE
Press this button, the unit will be turned on,
press it once more, the unit will be turned
off. When turning on or turning off the unit,
the Timer, Sleep function will be canceled,
but the presetting time is still remained.
CLOCK
CLOCK button
ƽ
Press this button, Auto, Cool,Dry, Fan,
Heat mode can be selected circularly.
Auto mode is default while power on.
Under Auto mode,the temperature will not
be displayed; Under Heat mode, the
initial value is 28ć 82 R);Under other
modes, the initial value is 25ć 77 R)
LIGHT
AUTO
COOL
DRY
FAN
HEAT
(only for cooling and heating unit)
Press this button, Auto, Low, Middle, High
speed can be circularly selected. After
powered on,Auto fan speed is default.
Under Dehumidify mode, Low fan speed
only can be set up.
Low fan
Middle fan
High fan
Note:Under the Dry mode, the fan speed isn't
adjustable, low fan speed is imperative,
but when operating this button, the wireless
adjustable, low fan speed is imperative,
MODE button
ƽ
Press this button, Sleep On and Sleep
Off can be selected. After powered on,Sleep
Off is defaulted. After the unit is turned
off, the Sleep function is canceled. After
Sleep function set up, the signal of Sleep
will display. In this mode, the time of timer
can be adjusted. Under Fan and Auto
modes, this function is not available.
Press this button, the clock can be set up,
signal blink and display.Within 5
seconds, the value can be adjusted by
pressing + or - button, if continuously
press this button for 2 seconds above,
in every 0.5 seconds, the value on ten place
of Minute will be increased 1. During blinking,
repress the Clock button, si gnal wi l l be
constantly displayed and i t denot es t he
setting succeeded. After powered on, 12: 00
is defaulted to display and si gnal wi l l
be displayed. If there is si gnal
be
di spl ayed that denotes the cur r ent t i me
value is Clock value, otherwise i s Ti mervalue.
LIGHT button
ƽ
Press this button to select LIGHT on or off
in the displayer. When the LIGHT on is
set,the icon will be displayed and the
indicator light in the displayer will be on.
When the LIGHT off is set, the icon will
be displayed and the indicator light in the
displayer will be off.
195
Operation of wireless remote control
+
+ button
ƽ
Remote control
-
- button
ƽ
BLOW
BLOW button
ƽ
TURBO
Press this button, can turn on or turn off
the drying.In Cool and Dehumidifying mode,
press this button and will display "BLOW",
at this time the Blow is turned on. If repress
this button,"BLOW" will be concealed, at
this time the Blow function is turned off.
After powered on, Blow OFF is defaulted.
When operating the ON/OFF button, or
switching mode to Cool or Dehumidifying
mode,the Blow function will keep the original
status. If unit is turned off, Blow OFF only
can be set up and send the signal. In Auto,
Fan as well as Heat mode, Blow function
can not be set up and there is no "BLOW"
displaying.
For presetting temperature increasing.
Press this button,can set up the temperature,
when unit is on . Continuously press and
hold this button for more than 2 seconds,
the corresponding contents will be
changed rapidly, until unpress the button
then send the information, ℃(℉)is displaying all along. In Auto mode, the temperature can not be set up, but operate this
button can send the signal. Centigrade
setting range :16-30; Fahrenheit scale
setting range 61-86.
TEMP
Presetting temperature can be decreased.
Press this button, the temperature can be
set up, continuously press this button
and hold for two seconds, the relative
contents can quickly change, until unhold
this button and send the order that the ć
R
) signal will be displayed all the time.
The temperature adjustment is unavailable under the Auto mode, but the order
can be sent by if pressing this button.
TEMP button
ƽ
Press this button, can set up temperature:
presetting temperature (to display room),
indoor ambient temperature (to display
indoor temperature), outdoor ambient
temperature (to display outdoor temperature),
and that will go around. It is defaulted that
there is no signal displaying. Remark:when
operating this button,the wireless remote
control displays the presetting temperature
all along.
TURBO button
ƽ
In Cool or Heat mode, press this button
can turn on or turn off the Turbo function.
After turned on the Turbo function, its
signal will be displayed. When switching
the mode or changing fan speed, this
function will be canceled automatically.
196
Operation of wireless remote control
TIMER ON
TIMER ON BUTTON
ƽ
Remote control
SWING UP AND DOWN BUTTON
ƽ
Press this button, to set up swing angle,
which circularly changes as below:
OFF
This is an universal use remote controller. If
remote controller sends the following three
kinds of status that the swing status of main
unit will be:
TIMER OFF
ƽ
Timer On setting: Signal ì ONî will blink
and display, signal will conceal, the
numerical section will become the timer
on setting status. During 5 seconds blink,
by pressing ˇ or ˉ button to adjust the
time value of numerical section, every
press of that button, the value will be
increased or decreased 1 minute. Hold
pressing ˇ or ˉbutton, 2 seconds later,
it quickly change, the way of change is:
During the initial 2.5 seconds, ten numbers
change in the one place of minute, then
the one place is constant, ten numbers
change in the tens place of minute at 2.5
seconds speed and carry. During 5s blink,
press the Timer button, the timer setting
succeeds. The Timer On has been set up,
repress the timer On button, the Timer
On will be canceled. Before setting the
Timer, please adjust the Clock to the
current actual time.
TIMER OFF BUTTON
Once press this key to enter into
TIMER OFF setup, in which case
the TIMER OFF icon will blink.
The method of setting is the same
as for TIMER ON.
When the guide louver start to swing up and
down, if turn off the Swing, the air guide louver
will stop at current position.
which indicates the guide louver swings up
and down between that all five positions.
197
Operation of wireless remote control
Guide for operation- General operation
1. After powered on, press ON/OFF button, the unit will start to run.(Note: When
it is powered off, the guide louver of main unit will close automatically.)
2. Press MODE button, select desired running mode, or press COOL or HEAT
mode to enter into the corresponding operation directly.
3. Pressing +or - button, to set the desired temperature. (It is unnecessary
to set the temp. at AUTO mode.)
4. Pressing FAN button, set fan speed, can select AUTO FAN, LOW, MID
and HIGH.
5. Pressing
button, to select the swing.
Guide for operation- Optional operation
1. Press SLEEP button, to set sleep.
2. Press TIMER ON and TIMER OFF button, can set the scheduled timer on
or timer off.
3. Press LIGHT button, to control the on and off of the displaying part of the
unit (This function may be not available for some units).
4. Press TURBO button, can realize the ON and OFF of TURBO function.
Introduction for special function
ƾ About blow function
This function indicates that moisture on evaporator of indoor unit will be blowed after the unit
is stopped to avoid mould.
1. Having set blow function on: After turning off the unit by pressing ON/OFF button indoor
fan will continue running for about 10 min. at low speed. In this period, press blow button
to stop indoor fan directly.
2. Having set blow function off: After turning off the unit by pressing ON/OFF button, the
complete unit will be off directly.
ƾ About AUTO RUN
When AUTO RUN mode is selected, the setting temperature will not be displayed on the
LCD, the unit will be in accordance with the room temp. automatically to select the suitable
running method and to make ambient comfortable.
ƾ About turbo function
If start this function, the unit will run at super-high fan speed to cool or heat quickly so that
the ambient temp. approachs the preset temp. as soon as possible.
198
Operation of wireless remote control
ƾ About lock
Press +and - buttons simultaneously to lock or unlock the keyboard. If the remote controller
will be displayed on it, in which case, press any button, the mark will
is locked, the icon
flicker for three times. If the keyboard is unlocked, the mark will disappear.
ƾ About swing up and down
1. Press swing up and down button continuously more than 2s,the main unit will swing back
and forth from up to down, and then loosen the button, the unit will stop swinging and present
position of guide louver will be kept immediately.
2. Under swing up and down mode, when the status is switched from off to , if press this
button again 2s later, status will switch to off status directly; if press this button again
within 2s,the change of swing status will also depend on the circulation sequence stated above.
ƾ About switch between Fahrenheit and Centigrade
Under status of unit off, press MODE and - buttons simultaneously to switch ćanḑ
ƾ About new function of defrosting
It indicates: after starting this function by remote controller and the unit has been under
defrost status, If turn off the unit by remote controller, the unit will not stop defrosting until
it is finished; if change setting mode by remote controller, the function ,which is set last
time, won't be carried out until defrosting finished.
Operation of this function on or off: If remote controller is under off status, press mode button
and blow button simultaneously in order to enter or cancel this new function. If the unit is under
defrost mode, dual eight position on remote controller will display H1.If switch to heat mode,
the position will display H1, which flickers for 5s, in which case, press +/- button, H1 will
disappear and setting temp. be displayed.
After remote controller is powered on, the new defrost function will be defaulted to be closed.
Changing batteries and notices
Slightly to press the place with
, along the arrowhead direction to push the back cover of wireless
remote control. (As show in figure)
Take out the old batteries. (As show in figure)
Insert two new AAA1.5V dry batteries, and pay attention to the polarity.
(As show in figure)
Attach the back cover of wireless remote control. (As show in figure)
Fi g.1
ƾ NOTE:
ƽ When changing the batteries, do not use the old or different batteries,
otherwise, it can cause the malfunction of the wireless remote control.
ƽ If the wireless remote control will not be used for a long time, please
take them out, and don't let the leakage liquid damage the wireless
remote control.
ƽ The operation should be in its receiving range.
ƽ It should be placed at where is 1m away from the TV set or stereo sound sets.
Fi g.2
ƽ If the wireless remote control can not operate normally, please take them out, Sketch map for
changing batteries
after 30s later and reinsert, if they cannot normally run, please change them.
199
Emergency operation
Displayer indicator light control of indoor unit
It's a special selective buttonfor the users ,who are not accustomed to the
light at sleeping.
Get the displayer indicator light on: When setting the light function,the mark will
display on the remote controller screen by
pressing this button. In which case,the dissplayer indicator light will be on if the AC receives
this signal.
ƽ Get the displayer indicator light off: If cancel the light function,the mark
will disapƽ
per on the remote controller screen by pressing this
button. In which case, the displayer indicator light will
be off if the AC receives this signal.
Emergency operation
If the wireless remote control is lost
or broken, please use the manual switch
button. At this time, the unit will run at the
Auto mode, but the temperature and fan
speed cannot be changed. The operation
was shown as below:
To open the panel, the manual switch
is on the displayer box.
ƽ Turn on the unit: At unit turned off, press
the button,the unit will run at Auto mode
immediately.The microcomputer will accord
to the indoor temperature to select (Cooling,
Heating, Fan) and obtain the comfortable effect.
ƽ Turn off the unit: At unit turned on, press the
button, the unit will stop working.
Manual switch
Fig.3
200
Product Specifications
Product Specifications
Model
EVHC 18 DSAAAR
Function
COOLING
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Total Capacity (W/Btu/h)
HEATING
EVHC 24 DSAAAR
COOLING
HEATING
220-240V~
220-240V~
50Hz
50Hz
5300(1260~6150) 5800(1260~6300) 6400(1400~6800) 7000(1200~8000)
18000(4300~21000) 20000(4300~21500) 21500(4800~23200) 24000(4100~27300)
Power Input (W)
1600(380~2650)
1620(350~2650)
Rated Input (W)
2650
2650
2500
2700
Rated Current (A)
12.0
12.0
11.4
12.4
Air Flow Volume (m 3/h) (H/M/L)**
Dehumidifying Volume (l/h)
EER / C.O.P (W/W)
Energy Class
Model of Indoor Unit
850/780/650/550
Input of Heater (w)
Fan Motor Capacitor (uF)
2050(350~2700)
900/800/700/550
2.0
2.5
3.29
3.61
3.25
3.63
A
A
A
A
EVKC 18 DS
Fan Motor Speed (r/min) (H/M/L) 1350/1200/1050/900
Output of Fan Motor (w)
2000(350~2500)
EVKC 24 DS
1420/1250/1150/1050 1250/1100/950/800
1300/1100/1000/850
20
25
/
/
1.5
1.5
0.25
0.30
Cross flow fan - 1
Cross flow fan - 1
Φ98X710
Φ98X765
Aluminum fin-copper tube
Aluminum fin-copper tube
Φ7
Φ7
2-1.4
2-1.5
715X304.8X25.4
765X342.9X25.4
MP28VB
MP35XX
2.5
2.5
PCB 3.15A Transformer 0.2A
PCB 3.15A Transformer 0.2A
45/42/38
48/43/40
54/50/45
52/48/43
940X298X200
1008X315X219
Dimension of Package(W/H/D)(mm)
1010X285X380
1073X395X313
Net Weight /Gross Weight (kg)
13/17
16/21
Fan Motor RLA(A)
Fan Type-Piece
Diam eter-Length (mm)
Evaporator
Indoor Pipe Diameter (mm)
unit Row-Fin Gap(mm)
Coil length (l)×height (H)×coil
width (L)
Swing Motor Model
Output of Swing Motor (W)
Fuse (A)
Sound Pressure Level dB (A)
(H/M/L)
Sound Power Level dB (A)
(H/M/L)***
Dimension (W/H/D) ( mm)
10
201
Product Specifications
Model of Outdoor Unit
Compress or Manufacturer/tradem ark
Compress or Model
Compressor Type
L.R.A. (A)
Compress or RLA(A)
Compress or Power Input(W)
Overload Protector
Throttling Method
Starting Method
Working Temp Range (ºC)
Condens er
Pipe Diam eter (m m )
Rows -Fin Gap(mm )
Coil length(l) x height(H) x coil width(L)
Fan Motor Speed (rpm ) (H/M/L)
Output of Fan Motor (W)
Outdoor
Fan Motor RLA(A)
unit
Fan Motor Capacitor (uF)
Air Flow Volume of Outdoor Unit
Fan Type-Piece
Fan Diam eter (m m )
Defros ting Method
Climate Type
Isolation
Moisture Protection
Perm iss ible Excess ive Operating
Pres s ure for the Dis charge Side(MPa)
Perm iss ible Excess ive Operating
Pres s ure for the Suction Side(MPa)
Sound Pressure Level dB (A) (H/M/L)
Sound Power Level dB (A) (H/M/L)
Dimension (W/H/D) (m m)
Dimension of Package (L/W/H)(m m)
Net Weight /Gros s Weight (kg)
Refrigerant Charge (kg)
Length (m)
Gas additional charge(g/m )
Connecti Outer
Liquid Pipe (m m)
on Pipe Diam eter
Gas Pipe (m m )
Max
Height (m)
Distance
Length (m )
EVJC 18 DS
China Res ources (Shenyang)
C-6RZ146H1A
Twin rotary compress or
41
8.4
1640
1NT11L-3979
Electric expand valve
Trans ducer s tarting
Cool:5 ºC≤ T≤ 46 ºC
Heat:-15 ºC≤ T≤ 30 ºC
Alum inum fin-copper tube
7
1-1.4
870x660x19.05
690/500
60W
0.62
3
3200
Axial fan -1
Φ520
Auto defros t
T1
I
IP24
EVJC 24 DS
China Res ources (Shenyang)
C-6RZ146H1A
Twin rotary compress or
41
8.4
1640
1NT11L-3979
Electric expand valve
Trans ducer s tarting
Cool:5 ºC≤ T≤ 46 ºC
Heat:-15 ºC≤ T≤ 30 ºC
Alum inum fin-copper tube
7
2-1.4
837x660x38.1
690/500
60
0.62
3
3200
Axial fan -1
Φ520
Auto defrost
T1
I
IP24
3.8
3.8
1.2
1.2
54
64
890X700X340
1030X460X735
47/52
R410A/1.10
5
20
1/2” Φ6
1/4” Φ12
10
25
54
64
890X700X340
1030X460X735
50/55
R410A/1.40
5
20
1/2” Φ6
1/4” Φ12
10
25
11
202
3DUWQDPH
Part name
Air in
Power cable
Front Panel
Indoor unit
Wrapping Tape
Filter
Guide louver
Wall Pipe
Air out
Set Temp
Cooling
DRY
Wireless remote control
LED displayer
Run
Remote control window
Heat
Connection pipe
Air in
Outdoor unit
Drainage hose
Air out
203
'LPHQVLRQV
Dimensions
,QGRRU8QLW
W
Air inlet
H
D
Tube exit
Ceiling
Left
18K
Right
24K
02'(/
:΀
+΀
.
.
'΀
204
'LPHQVLRQV
Outdoor Unit
340
890
700
424
955
560
>60cm
380
cm
>60
>60cm
>60cm
Bolt
Nut
Spanner
205
Schematic Diagram
Schematic Diagram
Wiring Diagram
Indoor Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Serial No.
1
2
3
4
Name of interface
Instruction
Sensor neilsbed
Sensor neilsbed
Displayer neilsbed
PG motor neilsbed
5
Wire terminal
6
7
Transformer terminal
N˄1˅- Indoor and outdoor units connect with zero line;
2-communication wire; 3-indoor unit connect with fire line;
Earth wire
Swing motor terminal
Serial No.
Signal
1
FUSE101
2
RV1
3
CX1
Parameters
Fuse T3.15AH 250V
Resistance MYN15621KM
Capacitor 104M/275VAC
206
Schematic Diagram
Outdoor Unit
3
2
4
1
5
9
8
7
Serial No
Name of interface
Wire terminal
6
Instruction
N(1)-indoor units connect with zero line;
2-communication wire;
3-indoor unit and outdoor unit connect with fire line;
L-power fire line;N-power zero line;
Earth wire
Sensor neilsbed
Compressor overload sensor neilsbed
Yellow ü&2038
Compressor power supply terminal
Blue ü&2039
Red ü&203:
3)& Capacity wire terminal
It is yellow
Reactor wire terminal
It is white and orange
Outdoor motor neilsbed
It is white, black, blue
Electromagnetic expansion valve neilsbed
Four-way valve neilsbed
207
Schematic Diagram
Printed Circuit Board Connector Wiring Diagram
INDOOR UNIT
• TOP VIEW
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
13
12
11
• BOTTOM VIEW
1
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
208
Schematic Diagram
• TOP VIEW
Name of interface
Serial No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Instruction
used to connect with N line of power cable
Zero line
Health function zero line
used to connect with N line of health module
Fire line
used to connect with power supply L line
PG
motor power cable
used to connect with PG motor
Health function fire line
used to connect with health module L line
Communicate with outdoor unit
communication interface
Connect with Outdoor Unit
Connect with the original side of transformer
Connect with the original side of transformer
Auto key
Auto key
Connect with the upper and lower swing motor Connect with the upper and lower swing motor
PG
motor reactive wire
Display interface
used to connect with PG motor reactive signal wire
communicate with display modules
Connect with the subsidary bridge Connect with the subsidary bridge
Sensor
They are: tube temp.
o
o
20kΩ@25 C Inner ambient temp. 15kΩ@25 C˅
• BOTTOM VIEW
Circuit module
Serial No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Parts of swing motor driving
PG motor driving
Part of filter wave
Communication
Sensor
Power supply
Display
MCU
209
Schematic Diagram
• The key testing spots(BOTTOM)
TEST 2
TEST 1
TEST 3
TEST 4
Serial No. of testing spot
Test1
Test2
Test3
Test4
Testing spot
Between two spots
Corresponding component
Zero, fire lines
Between two spots
Zero, fire lines
Between two spots
Power supply
Between two spots
Power supply
Testing value under the normal circumstances
220VAC~240VAC f10%
220VAC~240VAC f10%
5V
12V
210
Schematic Diagram
Outdoor Unit
K1
- ~ ~+
Q16
(IGBT)
IPM MODULE
C303 P
1
1
1
1
P
P
N
N
2
N
2
N
N
C6
2
C5
C4
C3
TVS1
2
RV2
P
K2
4
C2(PFC)
1
2
1
2
C1
3
RV3
- ~ ~+
L2 C2
L1
4
RV1
BD2
3
FUSE1 CT1
N
DATA1
L
L
POWER SUPPLY
N
~
230V~ 50Hz
PE
BD1
P
L
C301C302 C304
IPM
FUSE2
Text
U
V
W
4
COMP
3
1
2
SMPS
BD3
K3
P.C.BOARD
K4
FM FAN MOTOR
K6
YV
SAT
T-SENSOR
EKV
OUTTUBEOUTROOM EXHAUST
TEM.SENSOR TEM.SENSOR TEM.SENSOR
Serial No.
1
Signal
Parameters
2
FUSE2
3
RV1ǃRV2ǃRV
4
TVS1
5
C1ǃC2
6
C3ǃ
C4ǃC5ǃC6
7
CT
8
L1ǃL2
Fuse T3.15AL 250V
Resistance MYN15-621KM
Discharge tube DSA362MA
Capacitor 105J/275VAC
Capacitor 472M/400VAC
Mutual inductance CT23E-A028
Choke 4mH/20A
9
K1
Relay
10
K2
Relay OJE-SS-112HMF(10A)
11
K3ǃK4ǃK6
12
L
13
BD1ǃBD2
14
BD3
15
16
17
18
IGBT
C2˄PFC˅
C301ǃC303
C302ǃC304
IPM
19
COMPRESSOR
20
FAN MOTOR
21
COIL FOR 4-WAY VALVE
Remarks
Fuse T25AH 250V
FUSE1
Relay
G8P-1A4TP12VDC(30A)
JZC-32F-012-H(5A)
Reactor 15mH/14A
25A/600V(D25XB60)
Rectifier
D3SBA60 600V 4A
(IGBT) GT30J122
(30A)
Capacitor CBB65 60uF 370V
Rectifier
Insulative nesistor
Electrolytic capacitor 470uF±10%/450V
IPM PS21767 (30A)
Compressor
Loop
impedance ¡
Outdoor fan motor
Four-way valve
2877(03.
¡
ć
22
T-SENSOR
Sensor
78%(.¡˄
ć˅
'5$,1.
¡˄
ć˅
23
24
OVC-COMP
PMV
Compressor overload sensor
Electron expansion valve
'&9
211
Schematic Diagram
• TOP VIEW
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
• BOTTOM VIEW
12
11
6
7
5
10
8
9
4
1
2
3
212
Schematic Diagram
• TOP VIEW
Serial No.
Name of interface
1
Compressor interface
2
3
Compressor overload protector
Sensor
Instructions
The corresponding three pieces of wire, they are : Yellow —COMP-U Blue —COMP-V
Red—COMP-W
The corresponding two cores wire are white, connect
with the overload protector SAT
o
They are: tube temp.
20kΩ @25 C Outdoor ambient temp. 15kΩ
o
o
@25 C Air exhaust temp.50kΩ@25 C
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Electric expansion valve
used to connect with 5-core electric expansion valve EKV
Outdoor fan motor
used to connect
FAN-MOTOR
YV
used to connect four-way-Valve
4-way valve
Connect with indoor communication interface connect with Indoor-Unit
L line
Earth line
N line
1
PFC capacitor interface
Reactor interface 2
Reactor interface
Power-Source L line
Connect to Earth
PowerSource N line
Connect to one terminal of Inductor Whilt
Connect to C2 Refer to electoical digrame
Connect to one terminal of Inductor Orange
• BOTTOM VIEW
Serial No.
circuit module
1
EM I Filter
2
Charging circuit and electrolytic capacitors
3
Bridge
4
PFC Circuit
5
Compressor currtent detecting circuit
6
M CU
7
Control circuit of Fan and 4V
8
Communication circuit with Indoor-Unit
9
SM PS
10
IPM
213
Schematic Diagram
• Key testing spot(bottom):
214
Schematic Diagram
Serial No. of
testing spot
Testing spot
Corresponding components
Between A and C
L and N
Between B and C
L and N
Between D and E
Between F and G
DC generatrix electrolytic capacitor
ON/OFF electrolytic capacitor
Tow polars of Diode D10
D10 (IPM module + 15 V power supply)
Two ends of sheet capacitor C56
Power supply
Two ends of sheet capacitor C58
Power supply
Two ends of sheet capacitor C83
Two ends of sheet capacitor C80
Testing value under normal status
Power supply
Power supply
Bump between 0-3.3V
Between L and M
R118 Cathode of electrolytic capacitor (outdoor unit singnal sending TXD)
Between M and N
R101 Cathode of electrolytic capacitor (outdoor unit singnal sending RXD)
Bump between 0-3.3V
Receiving port(audion side)
Bump between 0-3.3V
Transmitting port(flaring diode side)
Bump between 0-1.1V
Transmitting port(flaring diode side)
Bump between 0-1.1V
Receiving port(audion side)
Bump between 0-24V
215
3&%IXQFWLRQPDQXDODQGRSHUDWLRQPHWKRG
3&%IXQFWLRQPDQXDODQGRSHUDWLRQPHWKRG
7HPSHUDWXUHSDUDPHWHUV
,QGRRUVHWWLQJWHPS7VHW
,QGRRUDPELHQWWHPS7DPE.VHQVRULVDGRSWHGWKHUHVLVWDQFHLV.
,QGRRUKHDWH[FKDQJHUFRSSHUWXEHVXUIDFHWHPSHUDWXUH7LQQHUWXEH.VHQVRULVDGRSWHGWKHUHLVWDQFHLV.
2XWGRRUXQLWDLUH[KDXVWWHPSHUDWXUH7H[KDXVW
2XWGRRUKHDWH[FKDQJHUFRSSHUWXEHVXUIDFHWHPSHUDWXUH7RXWHUWXEH
,QGRRUWXQLWSDUW
%DVLFIXQFWLRQRIV\VWHP
&RROLQJPRGH
8QGHUWKLVPRGHIDQPRWRUVZLQJZLOOZRUNXQGHUVHWWLQJVWDWXVWKHWHPSUDQJHLV )DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
2XWGRRUXQLWPDOIXQFWLRQRUXQLWVWRSUXQQLQJLQGRRUXQLWZLOONHHSRULJLQDOUXQQLQJVWDWXVPDOIXQFWLRQGLVSOD\HG
:KHQ7VHW7DPELILQGRRUIDQPRWRULVKLJKIDQVSHHGWKDWWKHIDQPRWRULVUXQQLQJLQPLGGOHVSHHG
WKHPLGGOHIDQRUORZIDQZLOOEHPDLQWDLQHGWKLVFRQGLWLRQVKRXOGEHH[HFXWHGZKHQFRPSUHVVRUVWDUWVXS
WKHVXSHUKLJKVSHHGZLOOQRWURWDWH:KHQ7DPE7VHWWKHIDQZLOOUHWXUQWRWKHVHWWLQJIDQVSHHG
'HKXPLGLI\LQJPRGH
8QGHUWKLVPRGHIDQPRWRUZLOOUXQDWORZIDQVSHHGVZLQJZLOOZRUNDWVHWWLQJVWDWXVVHWWLQJWHPSUDQJHLV)DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
2XWGRRUXQLWPDOIXQFWLRQRUSURWHFWLRQXQLWZLOOVWRSLQGRRUXQLWZLOONHHSRULJLQDOUXQQLQJVWDWXVPDOIXQFWLRQGLVSOD\HG
)DQPRGH
8QGHUWKLVPRGHLQGRRUIDQPRWRUFRXOGUXQDWKLJKPLGGOHORZRUDXWRFRPSUHVVRURXWGRRUXQLWDQGIRXUZD\YDOYHZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
8QGHUWKLVPRGHWHPSUDQJHVKRXOGEH)DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
+HDWLQJPRGH
8QGHUWKLVPRGHWHPSUDQJHVKRXOGEH)DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
:RUNLQJFRQGLWLRQDQGSURFHGXUHRIKHDWLQJPRGH:KHQXQLWWXUQRQDQGHQWHULQWR+HDWLQJPRGHLQGRRUXQLW
HQWHULQWRDQWLFRROZLQGPRGHZKHQXQLWLVVWRSUXQQLQJDQGLQGRRUIDQPRWRUWXUQVRQEORZLQJKHDWZLOODFW
3URWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQXQGHUKHDWLQJPRGHFRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRSWRUXQGXHWRPDOIXQFWLRQKDSSHQHGLQGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOOEORZVXUSOXVKHDW
'HIURVWLQJFRQWURO:KHQUHFHLYLQJWKHGHIURVWLQJVLJQDOIURPRXWGRRUXQLWZLOOGLVSOD\+VODWHULQGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
$QWLFRROGZLQGIXQFWLRQ
%ORZKHDWDLUIXQFWLRQ
,IKHDWLQJWHPSPHHWVWKHFRPSUHVVRUVWRSUXQQLQJFRQGLWLRQFRPSUVVRURXWGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
WKHXSSHUDQGORZHUJXLGHORXYHUZLOOURWDWHWRKRUL]RQWDOSRVLWLRQ/LQGRRUIDQPRWRUUXQDWVHWWLQJIDQVSHHG
IRUVWKHQWKHLQGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
'XHWR3*PRWRUEORFNUXQQLQJWKHDLUJXLGHERDUGZLOONHHSWKHSRVLWLRQZKHQLWVWRSSLQJXQGHUHDFKPRGH
RWKHUPDOIXQFWLRQXQLWZLOOVWRSWRUXQWKHXSSHUDQGORZHUDLUJXLGHORXYHUZLOOURWDWHWRKRUL]RQWDOSRVLWLRQ
/LGQRRUIDQXQLWZLOOUXQDWVHWWLQJIDQVSHHGDQGUXQIRUVLQGRRUIDQXQLWZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
$XWRPRGH
:KHQ7DPEVHOHFWWKHFRROLQJPRGHDWWKLVWLPHWKHVHWWLQJWHPSLV)DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
&RROLQJDQGKHDWLQJXQLWV7DPEZLOOUXQDWKHDWLQJPRGHDWWKLVWLPHWKHVHWWLQJWHPSLV
)DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
&RROLQJRQO\XQLW:KHQ7DPELWZLOOUXQDW)DQPRGHWKHVHWWLQJWHPSLV)DKUHQKHLWVFDOH
:KHQ7LQGRRUDPEILUVWO\HQWHULQWRDXWRPRGHDQGUXQDWDXWRIDQVSHHGRWKHUPRGHVZLOO
UXQDWDXWRPRGHZLOONHHSWKHSUHYLRXVUXQQLQJPRGH:KHQHQWHULQJLQWR'HKXPLGLI\LQJPRGHLWZLOOUXQDW
DXWRIDQVSHHG
$XWRIDQVSHHGFRQWUROPRGH
216
Operation
2. Display state of indoor indicators
(1) State of indoor display board
1. When the unit is powered on, all patterns will be displayed and then only power indicator is on. When the unit is turned on
with a remote controller, the operating indicator is on and operation mode which is set currently is displayed.
2. In defrosting mode, "H1" is displayed on "Double 8".
3. Set temperature is displayed on "Double 8".
Ø
Display of operation patterns and mode patterns
When the unit is powered on, all patterns will be displayed and the standby operation indicator will become red. When the unit
is turned on through a remote controller, the operation indicator is light. At the same time, operating mode patterns (mode
indicators include cooling, heating and dehumidification modes) set currently are displayed, and dynamic display patterns of
wind speed are displayed. If the light button is switched off, all display will be turned off.
Ø
Temperature display control mode of separated air conditioner
1. When user sets the remote controller at set temperature display, currently set temperature will be displayed.
2. Only when remote signals are converted from other display states into indoor ambient temperature display state, the
remote controller will display indoor ambient temperature for 5 seconds and then return to set temperature display.
3. Only when remote signals are converted from other display states into outdoor ambient temperature display state, the
remote controller will display outdoor ambient temperature for 5 seconds and then return to set temperature display.
4. If the controller is lack of outdoor display functions, as the signal is received, set temperature will be displayed.
5. When the unit is turned off, temperature display will be compulsively set at given temperature by the controller. When the
unit is turned on, patterns as set by remote signals will be displayed.
6. If user does not set up temperature display state, given temperature will be displayed.
(2) Failure display of indoor unit
1. Requirements for failure display
When multiple failures appear at the same time, failure protection codes shall be displayed alternatively.
(1) Hardware failures shall be displayed immediately, referring to requirements in "Failure State Display Table";
(2) Operation states shall be displayed immediately, referring to requirements in "Failure State Display Table";
(3) Other failures shall be displayed 200s after the compressor stops, referring to requirements in "Failure State Display Table".
(Note: in the case that the unit is switched off with the remote controller, or the compressor is switched on again, failure
display waiting time (200s) shall be cleared.)
(4) Frequency limitation and reduction states shall be displayed by means of remote calling.
3. Failure display control
Indicator failure display shall be kept synchronous with Double 8 failure display, that is, during indicator blinking, failure code
corresponding to such indicator shall be displayed on Double 8.
4. Method of remote calling of failure display
Entering the failure remote calling mode: push the light button four times within 3s to call out relevant failure protection code;
Quit the failure remote calling mode: push the light button four times within 3s or call out failure display to enter it for 5 minutes
and then quit.
3. Other control targets
(1) Up and down wind blow functions: model of wind blow motor is MP28EA.
When the unit is powered on, the up and down wind blow motor will turn a wind deflector anti-clockwise to Position 0 to shut
down the air outlet. When the unit is switched on and wind blow function is not preset, under the heating mode, up and down
wind blades will turn clockwise to position D; and under other modes, the up and down wind blades will turn clockwise to
position L. If wind blow function is set at the same time as the unit is switched on, the wind blades will swing between position
L and D. The wind blades can be kept in seven states: position L, position A, position B, position C, position D, swing between
position L and D, stop at one position from L to D. When the unit is turned off, the wind deflector will be closed up to position 0.
Wind blow action is effective only when wind blow commands are set and the indoor unit is running.
Note: When the wind blades are set at position L to B, position A to C, or position B to D through
remote setting, the wind deflector will swing between position L and D. L—A—B—C—D.
(2) Buzzer
When the controller is powered on, signals from a remote controller are received, or the auto button
is pushed, a buzzer will give out prompt tone.
(3) Auto button
When the button is pushed, the unit will operate in auto mode and the indoor fan will run in auto state. When the indoor fan is
running, the wind blow motor will work. When the button is pushed again, the unit will be switched off. At the same time as the
button is pushed, the whole unit will be powered on and enter into fast test mode; when the unit is powered on and detects for
continuous 20s (such time shall not be fast tested) that the auto button is pushed, and if the unit is currently at fast test state,
the unit will quit the fast test state.
26
217
Operation
(4) Sleep function
This mode is effective only in cooling and heating modes. Proper sleep curves shall be selected for operation according to
preset temperature.
In cooling mode:
(1) When initial temperature is set at 16-23ć, an increase of 1ćwill be gained every hour after the sleep function is activated.
After 3ć is raised, the temperature will be maintained. After operation for 7 hours, temperature will go down by 1 ć,
afterwards, the unit will operate at such temperature.
(2) When initial temperature is set at 24-27ć, an increase of 1ćwill be gained every hour after the sleep function is activated.
After 2ć is raised, the temperature will be maintained. After operation for 7 hours, temperature will go down by 1 ć,
afterwards, the unit will operate at such temperature.
(3) When initial temperature is set at 28-29ć, an increase of 1ćwill be gained every hour after the sleep function is activated.
After 1ć is raised, the temperature will be maintained. After operation for 7 hours, temperature will go down by 1 ć,
afterwards, the unit will operate at such temperature.
In heating mode:
(1) When initial temperature is set at 16 ć, the unit will operate at such temperature.
(2) When initial temperature is set at 17-20 ć, a decrease of 1ćwill be gained every hour after the sleep function is
activated. After 1ć is reduced, the temperature will be maintained.
(3) When initial temperature is set at 21-27 ć, a decrease of 1ćwill be gained every hour after the sleep function is
activated. After 2ć is reduced, the temperature will be maintained.
(4) When initial temperature is set at 28-30 ć, a decrease of 1ćwill be gained every hour after the sleep function is
activated. After 3ć is reduced, the temperature will be maintained.
(5) Timing function
The main board integrates general timing and moment timing. Such two timing functions can be selected through a remote
controller on which different functions are arranged.
1 General timing:
!
Timing start: timing start can be set when the unit is off. When preset time is reached, the controller will operate in a preset
mode. Timing can be set at an interval of 0.5 hour in a scope of 0.5 - 24 hours.
Timing stop: timing stop can be set when the unit is on. When preset time is reached, the system will be turned off. Timing
can be set at an interval of 0.5 hour in a scope of 0.5 - 24 hours.
2 Moment timing
!
Timing start: if timing start is set when the system is at operation state, the system will continue to operate; if timing start is set
when the system is at stop, as the preset time is reached, the system will start to run in preset mode.
Timing stop: if timing stop is set when the system is at stop state, the system will keep standby; if timing stop is set when the
system is in operation, as the preset time is reached, the system will stop running.
Timing change:
When the system is in timing mode, start and stop can be set through the On/Off button on the remote controller; or timing
time can be reset and the system will operate according to the latest setting.
When the system is in operation and both timing start and stop are set, the system will stay at currently set operation state.
When preset timing stop time is reached, the system will stop working.
When the system is at stop state and both timing start and stop are set, the system will keep at stop state. When preset timing
start time is reached, the system will start operation.
From then on, the system will operate in preset mode at a preset start time and stop at a preset stop time everyday. If timing
stop time is set as the same as timing start time, a stop command will be executed.
(6) Dry and mildew proof function
Dry and mildew proof function can be set in cooling and dehumidification modes.
(7) Control of indoor fan
Indoor fan can be set at four levels, super-high, high, middle and low, with a remote controller. When one level is set, the fan
will thus operate at such level. The fan can also be set at auto state.
(8) Power-failure memory function
What will be memorized includes modes, up and down wind blow, light, preset temperature, preset wind speed, general timing
(no memory for moment timing), and Fahrenheit /Celsius degree. When the unit is powered on again after power failure,
operation continues according to memorized content. If timing is not set by the last remote control command, the system will
memorize the last remote control command and operate in the mode specified in the last remote control command. If timing is
set by the last remote control command and power failure happens before the preset time, the system, as powered on again,
will memorize the timing function set by the last remote control command. Timing will be re-counted from the time at which the
system is powered again. If timing is set by the last remote control command and timing of start or stop is reached before
power failure, the system, as powered on again, will memorize operation state before power failure and will not perform timing
action. Moment timing is out the range of memory.
27
218
Operation
(9) Locked-rotor Protection of PG Motor
When starting up the fans, if the motor has run at a lower speed continuously for a period, in order to prevent
automatic protection of the motor, stop running, and display locked-rotor; if the machine is running at present, the
code of the locked-rotor fault---H6 of double-eight digital tubes will be displayed; if the machine is shut down at
present, the information of locked-rotor fault will not be displayed.
(10) Super Power Function
In cooling and heating mode (automatic, dehumidifying and air-supplying modes are without power), press the
button of Super Power, the wind speed on the remote controller is displayed as super-high air flow, and the inner
fans are also turned to super-high air flow;
(11) Health Function
When the inner fans are running, at this time the remote controller is set at the Health function (if there is no
Health button on the remote controller, the order of starting Health is defaulted to be sent), then start the Health
function device.
5. Fault Detection of Thermo-bulb
(1) Indoor Environment Thermo-bulb:
Detect the fault of thermo-bulb at any time;
(2) Indoor Pipe Temperature Thermo-bulb:
During the defrosting period, the fault of the thermo-bulb will be not detected, which shall be detected in 5
minutes after defrosting is completed; the fault of the thermo-bulb will be detected at other times;
(3) Protecting Treatments of Thermo-bulb:
1.When detecting that the thermo-bulb has short-circuited continuously for 30 seconds:
It is regarded that the temperature detected by the thermo-bulb is over-high (or unlimited), then the whole
machine will implement corresponding safety stops according to the over-high temperature sensed by the
thermo-bulb, and at the same time display corresponding temperature safety stops and faults of the thermo-bulb.
2. When detecting that the thermo-bulb has been in open circuit continuously for 30 seconds: stop the machine in
protection, directly display corresponding faults of the thermo-bulb.
6. Forced Running Function of the Inner Units
(1) Enter into Forced Running Control
Within 5 minutes after power-up, press the Lights Off button on the remote controller continuously for three
times within 3 seconds to enter into the mode of collecting fluorine, and display Fo, send the fluorine-collecting
mode for 25 minutes continuously, each load will be treated as cooling when starting the machine (set the air flow
as high, set the temperature as 16ć).
(2) Exit from the Forced Running Control
After receiving any remote signal, or signal of keys, the fluorine-collecting mode will exit, and operate in
accordance with the current orders set; or exit the fluorine-collecting mode after running for 25 minutes, and the
machine will be shut down automatically.
Outer Units
1. Input Parameter Compensation and Calibration
(1) Check the ambient temperature compensation function
Indoor ambient temperature compensation function
a. In cooling mode, the indoor ambient temperature participating in computing control = (Tindoor ambient temperature –
ƸTcooling indoor ambient temperature compensation)
b. In heating mode, the indoor ambient temperature participating in computing control= (Tindoor ambient temperature –
ƸTheating indoor ambient temperature compensation)
(2) Check parameter effective judgment controls
Effective judgment function of outdoor exhaust temperature thermo-bulb
When conditions a and b are satisfied, the outdoor exhaust temperature thermo-bulb is judged not to be
connected into place, the mainboard of outer units will display failure of the outdoor exhaust temperature
thermo-bulb (not connected into place), stop the machine for repairing, and resume the machine by remote
controls of ON/OFF.
a. Judgment of exhaust detection temperature change:
After the compressor starts up and runs for 10 minutes, if the compressor frequency f ≥ 40Hz, and the rising
value Texhaust (Texhaust (after start-up for 10 minutes) - Texhaust (before start-up)) < 2ć, the outdoor exhaust temperature
thermo-bulb can be judged not to be connected into place (judging once when power is on the first time).
b. Comparative judgment of exhaust detection temperature and condenser detection temperature (Tpipe temperature
= Toutdoor pipe temperature in cooling mode, Tpipe temperature = Tindoor pipe temperature in heating mode):
After the compressor starts up and runs for 10 minutes, if the compressor frequency f ≥ 40Hz, and Tpipe temperature ≥
(Texhaust + 3ć), the outdoor exhaust temperature thermo-bulb can be judged not to be connected into place
(judging once when power is on the first time).
28
219
Operation
2. Basic Functions
(1) Cooling Mode
1. Conditions and processes of cooling operation:
(1) If the compressor is shut down, and [Tsetup – (Tindoor ambient temperature – ƸTcooling indoor ambient temperature
compensation)] ≤ 0.5ć, start up the machine for cooling, the cooling operation will start;
(2) During operations of cooling, if 0ć ≤ [Tsetup – (Tindoor ambient temperature – ƸTcooling indoor ambient temperature
compensation)] < 2ć, the cooling operation will be still running;
(3) During operations of cooling, if 2ć ≤ [Tsetup – (Tindoor ambient temperature – ƸTcooling indoor ambient temperature
compensation)], the cooling operation will stop after reaching the temperature point.
2. Temperature setting range
(1) If Toutdoor ambient temperature ≥ [Tlow-temperature cooling temperature], the temperature can be set at: 16~30ć (Cooling at
room temperature);
(2) If Toutdoor ambient temperature < [Tlow-temperature cooling temperature], the temperature can be set at: 25~30ć (Cooling at
low temperature), that is, the minimum setting temperature for outer units judgment is 25ć.
(2) Dehumidifying Mode
1. Conditions and processes of dehumidifying operations: Same as the cooling mode;
2. The temperature setting range is: 16~30ć;
(3) Air-supplying Mode
1. The compressor, outdoor fans and four-way valves are switched off;
2. The temperature setting range is: 16~30ć.
(4) Heating Mode
1. Conditions and processes of Heating operations: (Tindoor ambient temperature is the actual detection temperature
of indoor environment thermo-bulb, ƸTheating indoor ambient temperature compensation is the indoor ambient temperature
compensation during heating operations)
(1) If the compressor is shut down, and [(Tindoor ambient temperature – ƸTheating indoor ambient temperature compensation) –
Tsetup] ≤ 0.5ć, start the machine to enter into heating operations for heating;
(2) During operations of heating, if 0ć ≤ [(Tindoor ambient temperature – ƸTheating indoor ambient temperature compensation) –
Tsetup] < 2ć, the heating operation will be still running;
(3) During operations of heating, if 2ć ≤ [(Tindoor ambient temperature – ƸTheating indoor ambient temperature compensation) –
Tsetup], the heating operation will stop after reaching the temperature point.
2. The temperature setting range in this mode is: 16~30ć.
3. Special Functions
(1) Defrosting Control
1. Conditions for starting defrosting
After the time for defrosting is judged to be satisfied, if the temperature for defrosting is satisfied after
detections for continuous 3minutes, the defrosting operation will start.
(1) Time conditions for judging to start defrosting:
Enter into defrosting control first time
Enter into defrosting control
Enter into defrosting definition first time
next time
Start the machine and enter into heating mode and run
defrosting, the defrosting operation will start; if the events
Item
below happen, reset the first defrosting:
(1) After the compressor stops for 2 hours;
(2) Switching to the cooling/dehumidifying mode;
If the time of compressor continuously running ≥ [ttime of Determine the judgment
start time of defrosting of
entering into defrosting the first time] or the time of compressor
Time for
continuously running < [ttime of entering into defrosting the first time], this time according to the
entering into
and the time of the compressor continuously running for judgment time of defrosting
defrosting
totally 50 minutes (Note: The time is calculated when the of the last time and the
outer pipe temperature Touter pipe ≤ 3ć)
defrosting time
T ≤ 150s
The time of judging to enter into defrosting extends 10 minutes
150s < T ≤ 180s The time of judging to enter into defrosting extends 5 minutes
Defrosting
180s < T ≤ 240s The time of judging to enter into defrosting is unchanged
time
240s < T ≤ 300s The time of judging to enter into defrosting is shortened for 2 minutes
300s < T ≤ 360s The time of judging to enter into defrosting is shortened for 4 minutes
360s < T
The time of judging to enter into defrosting is shortened for 6 minutes
The maximum defrosting time interval [tmax. defrosting time interval] is 60 minutes, the minimum defrosting time
interval [tmin. defrosting time interval] is 30 minutes.
29
220
Operation
(2) Temperature conditions of judging to start defrosting
Outdoor ambient temperature
Outdoor pipe temperature
15ć ≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ -10ć
5ć ≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature <15ć
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ [Ttemperature 1 of starting defrosting]
0ć≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature < 5ć
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ [Ttemperature 2 of starting defrosting]
-5ć≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature < 0ć
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ [Ttemperature 3 of starting defrosting]
-10ć≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature < -5ć
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ (Toutdoor ambient temperature – [Ttemperature difference 1 of starting
defrosting]
-15ć ≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature < -10ć Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ (Toutdoor ambient temperature – [Ttemperature difference 2 of starting
defrosting]
-20ć ≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature < -15ć Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ (Toutdoor ambient temperature – [Ttemperature difference 3 of starting
defrosting]
-25ć ≤ Toutdoor ambient temperature < -20ć Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ (Toutdoor ambient temperature – [Ttemperature difference 4 of starting
defrosting]
Toutdoor ambient temperature < -25ć
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≤ (Toutdoor ambient temperature – [Ttemperature difference 5 of starting
defrosting]
(3) Conditions of finishing defrosting
The defrosting operation can exit when any condition below is satisfied:
(1)
Toutdoor pipe temperature ≥ (Toutdoor ambient temperature – [Ttemperature 1 of finishing defrosting];
(2)
Toutdoor ambient temperature < -5ć, and Toutdoor pipe temperature ≥[Ttemperature 2 of finishing defrosting], the time lasts for over
80s;
(3)
The continuous running time of defrosting reaches [tmax. defrosting time].
4. Control Logic
(1) Compressor Control
Notes:
See “Frequency control of inverter compressor” for controls of compressor frequency;
Start the compressor after starting cooling, heating, dehumidifying operations, and the outer fans start for 5s;
When the machine is shutdown, in safety stops and when switching to air-supplying mode, the compressor will
stop immediately.
In all modes: once the compressor starts up, it will not be allowed to stop until having run for the [tmin. compressor
running time] (Note: including cases of shutdown when reaching the temperature point; except the cases requiring
stopping the compressor such as fault protection, remote shutdown, mode switching etc.);
In all modes: once the compressor stops, it will be allowed be restart after 3-minute delay (Note: The inner units
have a function of power memory, the machine can restart after remote shutdown and powering up again without
delay).
1. Cooling mode
Start the machine to enter into cooling operation for cooling, the compressor is switched on.
2. Dehumidifying mode
Same as the cooling mode.
3. Air-supplying mode
The compressor is switched off.
4. Heating mode
(1) Start the machine to enter into heating operation for heating, the compressor is switched on.
(2) Defrosting:
a. Defrosting starts: the compressor is shut down, and restarts it after 55-second delay.
b. Defrosting ends: the compressor stops, then starts it after 55-second delay.
(2) Outer Fans Control
Notes:
Only the outer fans run at least 80s in each air flow speed can the air flow be switched;
After the outer fans run compulsively in high speed for 80s when the machine starts up, control the air flow
according to the logic.
after remote shutdown, safety stops, and when the machine stops after reaching the temperature point, as well
as after the compressor stops, extend 1 minute, the outer fans will stop (During the period in the 1 minute, the air
flow of outer fans can be changed according to the outdoor ambient temperature changes);
When running with force, the outdoor fans shall run in the highest air flow.
1. Outer fans control logic in cooling/dehumidifying mode:
(1) If Toutdoor ambient temperature ≥ [Tinlet temperature in high cooling air flow], the outer fans will run in high air flow speed;
(2) If Toutdoor ambient temperature ≤ [Tinlet temperature in low cooling air flow], the outer fans will run in low air flow speed;
30
221
Operation
(3) During the process of operation, if ǏT low air-damper inlet temperature of Cooling ǐ˘T outer ring ˘ ǏT high air-damper inlet
then keep the former operation air damper;
(4) Cooling oil return control: when the outdoor fan runs 80s at a high speed, then regulate it by control logic
(the control whose priority level is higher than the air damper switch cycle about 80s)
2. When it begins to supply air, the outdoor fan will stop working.
3. Outdoor fan control logic at the mode of heating:
(1) If T outer ring ≤ ǏT high air-damper inlet temperature of heatingǐ, the outdoor fan will run at a high speed;
(2) If T outer ring ≥ T high air-damper inlet temperature of heating, the outdoor fan will run at a low speed;
(3) During the process of operation, if ǏT high air-damper inlet temperature of heatingǐ˘ T outer ring ˘ ǏT low air-damper inlet
temperature of heatingǐ, then keep the former operation air damper;
(4) Defrosting control of heating:
a. Defrosting begins: When it stops 50s after entering into the defrosting compressor, the outdoor fan will
stop working.
b. Defrosting stops: The outdoor fan begins to work when leaving the defrosting compressor.
(5) Heating oil return control:
The outdoor fan regulates at the normal control logic.
(3) Four-way valve control
1. The mode of four-way valve control on Cooling, dehumidification and supplying air: closing;
2. The mode of four-way valve control on heating: getting power;
(1) Four-way valve power control by heating
a. Starts the machine for heating, and the four-way valve control will get power immediately.
(2) Four-way valve power turn-off control by heating
a. When getting the mode of heating for power off, heating for changing into others, the four-way valve will
cut the power after 2 min.
b. When all kinds of protection stops, the four-way valve will cut the power after delaying 4 min.
(3) Defrosting control of heating:
a. Defrosting begins: When it stops 50s after entering into the defrosting compressor, the four-way valve will
cut the power after 50s.
b. Defrosting stops: when leaving the defrosting compressor about 50s, the four-way valve will get the
power.
(4) Charging circuit control of outer engine aluminum capacitor
1. Charging control
(1) Charging begins: when receiving the order of power on or preheating the compressor, firstly go on the
charging control;
(2) Charging stops:
It will stop charging if the two following conditions:
a. The compressor’s preheating is closed for 30 min;
b. Changing for the power turn-off or supplying air mode for 10 min.
2. Capacitance short-circuit protection (short trouble of DC Power)
When pulling in charging relay 2s, if the DC Power busbar voltage is lower than 100v, then cut the charging
relay immediately; and carry on the above operation after 30s, if they are both capacitance short-circuit two
times, then has the DC Power short trouble, and can’t be resumed.
(5) PFC function control
1. Power frequency checking (suitable for Semi-active PFC control):
(1) When power-up 2s, continually checking that the 10 times Power Cycling fit for: 185 ms ˘T power ˘215
ms, then we can confirm that the power frequency is 50 HZ, and control PFC according to the 50 Hz power
parameter.
(2) When power-up 3s, continually checking that the 10 times power cycling fit for: 151 ms ˘ T power ˘181
ms, then we can confirm that the power frequency is 60 HZ, and control PFC according to the 60 Hz power
parameter.
(3) If the power cycling T doesn’t meet the (1), (2) condition, and doesn’t have trouble at the normal situation,
we shouldn’t start PFC, but start the compressor normally. If it has the PFC trouble at the testing mode and
can’t be resumed, only be removed by cutting the power. Both of the compressor and PFC shouldn’t be
started.
5. The protection functions of controller
(1) Evaporator frozen-preventing protection function
At the mode of Cooling, dehumidifying:
Evaporator frozen-preventing protection function begins when starting the compressor 6 min.
temperature of Coolingǐ,
31
222
Operation
1.Starting estimation:
After the compressor stopped working for 180s, if T inner pipe ˚ǏT frozen-preventing frequency-limited temperature ǐ(the
temperature of hysteresis is 2ć), the machine is only allowed to start for operating, otherwise it should not be
started, and should be stopped to treat according to the frozen-preventing protection:
Clear the trouble at the mode of power turn-off / heating, and the protection times are not counted.
2. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the process of raising frequency, if the ǏT frozen-preventing frequency-limited temperatureǐ≤T inner pipe˘ǏT frozen-preventing
, the frequency-raising speed should be executed according to theǏF preventing protection frequency
frequency-raising temperatureǐ
slow raising speedǐ; IfǏT frozen-preventing slowly raising frequency temperature ǐ≤T inner pipe, you should exit the slowly raising control.
3. Frequency limited
ǏT frozen-preventing normal speed frequency-reducing temperatureǐ≤T inner pipe˘ǏT frozen-preventing frequency-limited temperatureǐ, you should
limit the frequency raising of compressor.
4. Reducing frequency at normal speed:
If ǏT frozen-preventing high speed frequency-reducing temperatureǐ≤T inner pipe˘ǏT frozen-preventing normal speed frequency-reducing temperatureǐ,
you should adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 8Hz/90s till the lower limit;
5. Reducing frequency at high speed:
ǏT frozen-preventing high speed frequency-reducing temperatureǐyou should adjust
IfǏT frozen-preventing power turn-off temperature ǐ≤T inner pipe˘
the compressor frequency by reducing 30Hz/90s till the lower limit;
6. Power turn-off:
If the T inner pipe ˘ǏT frozen-preventing power turn-off temperatureǐ, then frozen-preventing protect to stop the machine; If ǏT
frozen-preventing frequency-limited temperatureǐ˘ T inner pipe , and the compressor has stopped working for 3 minutes, the
whole machine should be allowed to operate.
7. If the frozen-preventing protection power turn-off continuously occurs for six times, it should not be resumed
automatically, and you should press the ON/OFF button to resume if the fault keeps on. During the process of
running, if the running time of compressor exceeds the Ǐt evaporator frozen-preventing protection times zero clearing timeǐ, the times
of frozen-preventing power turn-off should be cleared to recount. The mode of stopping the machine or
transferring to supply air will clear the trouble times immediately (if the trouble can not be resumed, mode
transferring will not clear it).
(2) Overload protection function
Overload protection function at the mode of Cooling and dehumidifying
1. Starting estimation:
After the compressor stopped working for 180s, if T outer pipe ˘ǏT Cooling overload frequency-limited temperature ǐ(the
temperature of hysteresis is 2ć), the machine is allowed to start, otherwise it should not be started, and should
be stopped to treat according to the overload protection:
Clear the trouble at the mode of power turn-off / heating, and the protection times are not counted.
2. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the raising process of pipe temperature and frequency, if the ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature of Cooling overloadǐ
≤T outer pipe˘ǏT Cooling overload frequency-limited temperatureǐ, the frequency raising speed should be executed according to
the ǏF slowly raising speed of preventing protection frequencyǐ; If T outer pipe˘ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature of Cooling overloadǐ, you
should exit the slowly raising control.
3. Frequency limited
IfǏT Cooling overload frequency-limited temperatureǐ≤T outer pipe˘ǏT Cooling overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ, you should
limit the frequency raising of compressor.
4. Reducing frequency at normal speed and power turn-off:
If ǏT Cooling overload frequency reducing temperature at high speedǐ≤T outer pipe˘ǏT Cooling overload power turn-off temperatureǐ, you should
adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 8Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at the lower limit,
if ǏT Cooling overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ≤T outer pipe, then Cooling overload protects machine stopping;
5. Reducing frequency at high speed and stop machine:
If ǏT Cooling overload frequency reducing temperature at high speedǐ≤T outer pipe˘ǏT Cooling overload power turn-off temperatureǐyou should
adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 30Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at the lower
limit, if ǏT Cooling overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ≤T outer pipe, then Cooling overload protects machine
stopping;
6. Power turn-off:
If the ǏT Cooling overload power turn-off temperatureǐ≤T outer pipe, then Cooling overload protects machine stopping; If T outer
pipe˘ǏT Cooling overload frequency-limited temperatureǐand the compressor has been stopped working for 3 minutes, the
machine should be allowed to operate.
32
223
Operation
7. If the Cooling overload protection power turn-off continuously occurs for six times, it should not be resumed
automatically, and you should press the ON/OFF button to resume if the fault keeps on. During the process of
running, if the running time of compressor exceeds the Ǐt overload protection times zero clearing timeǐ, the times of overload
protection power turn-off should be cleared to recount. The mode of stopping the machine or transferring to
supply air will clear the trouble times immediately (if the trouble can not be resumed, transferring mode will not
clear it).
Overload protection function at the mode of heating
1. Starting estimation:
After the compressor stopped working for 180s, if T inner pipe ˘ǏT heating overload frequency-limited temperature ǐ(the
temperature of hysteresis is 2ć), the machine is allowed to start, otherwise it should not be started, and should
be stopped to treat according to the overload protection:
Clear the trouble at the mode of power turn-off / heating, and the protection times are not counted.
2. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the raising process of pipe temperature and frequency, if the ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature of heating overloadǐ
≤T inner pipe˘ǏT heating overload frequency-limited temperatureǐ, the frequency raising speed should be executed according to
the ǏF slowly raising speed of preventing protection frequencyǐ; If T inner pipe˘ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature of heating overloadǐ, you
should exit the slowly raising control.
1. Frequency limited
IfǏT heating overload frequency-limited temperatureǐ≤T inner pipe˘ǏT heating overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ, you should
limit the frequency raising of compressor.
2. Reducing frequency at normal speed and stopping machine:
If ǏT heating overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ≤T inner pipe˘ǏT heating overload frequency reducing temperature at high speed ǐ,
you should adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 8Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at
the lower limit, if ǏT heating overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ≤T inner pipe, then overload protects machine
stopping;
3. Reducing frequency at high speed and power turn-off:
If ǏT heating overload frequency reducing temperature at high speedǐ≤T inner pipe˘ǏT heating overload power turn-off temperatureǐyou should
adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 30Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at the lower
limit, if ǏT heating overload frequency reducing temperature at normal speedǐ≤T outer pipe, then Cooling overload protects machine
stopping;
4. Power turn-off:
If the ǏT heating overload power turn-off temperatureǐ≤T inner pipe, then overload protects machine stopping; If T inner pipe˘ǏT
heating overload frequency-limited temperatureǐand the compressor has been stopped working for 3 minutes, the machine
should be allowed to operate.
5. If the overload protection power turn-off continuously occurs for six times, it should not be resumed
automatically, and you should press the ON/OFF button to resume if the fault keeps on. During the process of
running, if the running time of compressor exceeds the Ǐt overload protection times zero clearing timeǐ, the times of overload
protection power turn-off should be cleared to recount. The mode of stopping the machine or transferring to
supply air will clear the trouble times immediately (if the trouble can not be resumed, transferring mode will not
clear it).
(3) Protective function for discharge temperature of compressor
1. Starting estimation:
After the compressor stopped working for 180s, if T Discharge˘ǏT Discharge limited temperatureǐ(the temperature of
hysteresis is 2ć), the machine is allowed to start, otherwise it should not be started, and should be stopped to
treat according to the discharge temperature:
The machine should be stopped or transferred to supply air, the trouble should be cleared immediately, and the
protection times are not counted.
2. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the process of raising frequency, if the ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge˘ǏT Limited
frequency temperature during dischargingǐ, the frequency raising speed should be executed according to the ǏF Preventing
protection frequency raising speedǐ; If T Discharge˘ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature during dischargingǐ, you should exit the slowly
raising control.
3. Frequency limited
IfǏT Limited frequency temperature during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge˘ǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed during dischargingǐ, you should
limit the frequency raising of compressor.
4. Reducing frequency at normal speed and stopping machine:
IfǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge˘ǏT frequency reducing temperature at high speed during dischargingǐ,
you should adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 8Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at
the lower limit, if ǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge, you should discharge to protect
machine stopping;
33
224
Operation
5. Reducing frequency at high speed and power turn-off:
If ǏT frequency reducing temperature at high speed during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge˘ǏT Stop temperature during dischargingǐyou should adjust
the compressor frequency by reducing 30Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at the lower limit, if
ǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge, you should discharge to protect machine stopping;
6. Power turn-off:
If the ǏT Power turn-off temperature during dischargingǐ≤T Discharge, you should discharge to protect machine stopping; If T
ǏT Limited frequency temperature during dischargingǐand the compressor has been stopped for 3 minutes, the machine
Discharge˘
should be allowed to operate.
7. If the discharging temperature protection of compressor continuously occurs for six times, it should not be
resumed automatically, and you should press the ON/OFF button to resume. During the process of running, if the
running time of compressor exceeds the Ǐt Protection times clearing of dischargeǐ, the discharge protection is cleared to
recount. Stopped or transferred to supply air mode will clear the trouble times immediately (if the trouble can not
be resumed, mode transferring also will not clear it).
(4) Protective function for Electric current
1. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the process of raising electric current and frequency, if the ǏI Electric current of overcurrent slowly raising frequencyǐ≤I AC
Electric current˘ǏI Limited frequency when overcurrentǐ, the frequency raising speed should be executed according to the ǏF
; If I AC Electric current ˘ǏI Electric current of overcurrent slowly raising frequencyǐ, you should exit the
Preventing protection frequency raising speedǐ
slowly raising control.
2. Frequency limited
IfǏI Limited frequency when overcurrentǐ≤I AC Electric current˘ǏI frequency reducing when overcurrentǐ, you should limit the frequency
raising of compressor.
3. Reducing frequency:
If ǏI Frequency reducing when overcurrentǐ≤I AC Electric current˘ǏI Power turn-off when overcurrentǐ, you should reduce the compressor
frequency till the lower limit or exit the frequency reducing condition;
4. Power turn-off:
If ǏI Power turn-off machine when overcurrentǐ≤I AC Electric current , you should carry out the overcurrent stopping protection; If I
AC Electric current˘ǏT Limited frequency when overcurrentǐand the compressor has been stopped for 3 minutes, the machine
should be allowed to operate.
5. If the overcurrent protection continuously occurs for six times, it should not be resumed automatically, and you
should press the ON/OFF button to resume. During the process of running, if the running time of compressor
exceeds the Ǐt Protection times clearing of overcurrentǐ, the discharge protection is cleared to recount.
(5) Voltage sag protection
After start the compressor, if the time of DC link Voltage sagǏU Sagging protection voltageǐis measured to be less than
Ǐt Voltage sag protection time ǐ, the machine should be stop at once, hand on the voltage sag trouble, reboot
automatically after 30 minutes.
(6) Communication fault
When you have not received any correct signal from the inner machine in three minutes, the machine will stop for
communication fault.
When you have not received any correct signal from driver IC (aim to the controller for the separating of main
control IC and driver IC), and the machine will stop for communication fault. If the communication is resumed, the
machine will be allowed to operate.
(7) Module protection
Testing the module protective signal immediately after started, once the module protective signal is measured,
stop the machine with module protection immediately. If the module protection is resumed, the machine will be
allowed to operate.
If the module protection continuously occurs for three times, it should not be resumed automatically, and you
should press the ON/OFF button to resume. If the running time of compressor exceeds the Ǐt Protection times clearing of
moduleǐ, the module protection is cleared to recount.
(8) Module overheating protection
1. Starting estimation:
After the compressor stopped working for 180s, if T Module˘ǏT Module frequency limited temperatureǐ(the temperature of
hysteresis is 2ć), the machine is allowed to start, otherwise it should not be started, and should be stopped to
treat according to the module overheating protection:
The machine should be stopped or transferred to supply air, the trouble should be cleared immediately, and the
protection times are not counted.
2. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the process of raising frequency, if the ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature of moduleǐ≤T Module˘ǏT Limited frequency
, the frequency raising speed should be executed according to the ǏF Preventing protection frequency raising
temperature of moduleǐ
speedǐ; If T Module˘ǏT Slowly raising frequency temperature of moduleǐ, you should exit the slowly raising control.
34
225
Operation
3. Frequency limited
IfǏT Limited frequency temperature of moduleǐ≤T Module˘ǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed of moduleǐ, you should limit the
frequency raising of compressor.
4. Reducing frequency at normal speed and power turn-off:
If ǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed of moduleǐ≤T Module˘ǏT frequency reducing temperature at high speed of moduleǐ, you should
adjust the compressor frequency by reducing 8Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at the lower limit,
if ǏT frequency reducing temperature at normal speed of moduleǐ≤T Module, you should stop the machine for module overheating
protection;
5. Reducing frequency at high speed and power turn-off:
If ǏT frequency reducing temperature at high speed of moduleǐ≤T Module˘ǏT Power turn-off temperature of moduleǐyou should adjust the
compressor frequency by reducing 30Hz/90s till the lower limit; After it was running 90s at the lower limit, if ǏT
frequency reducing temperature at normal speed of module ǐ≤T Module, you should stop the machine for module overheating
protection;
6. Power turn-off:
If the ǏT Power turn-off temperature of moduleǐ≤T Module, you should stop the machine for module overheating protection; If
T Module˘ǏT Limited frequency temperature of moduleǐand the compressor has been stopped for 3 minutes, the machine
should be allowed to operate.
7. If the discharging temperature protection of compressor continuously occurs for six times, it should not be
resumed automatically, and you should press the ON/OFF button to resume. During the process of running, if the
running time of compressor exceeds the Ǐt Protection times clearing of moduleǐ, the discharge protection is cleared to
recount. Stopped or transferred to supply air mode will clear the trouble times immediately (if the trouble can not
be resumed, mode transferring also will not clear it).
(9) Compressor overloads protection
If you measure the compressor overload switch action in 3s, the compressor should be stopped for overloading.
The machine should be allowed to operate after overload protection was measured to resume.
If the overloading protection continuously occurs for three times, it should not be resumed automatically, and you
should press the ON/OFF button to resume. The protection times of compressor is allowed to clear after the
compressor runǏt Protection times clearing of compressor overloadingǐ30 minutes.
(10) Phase current overcurrent protection of compressor
During the running process of compressor, you could measure the phase current of the compressor, and control
it according to the following steps:
1. Raising the frequency slowly:
During the process of raising phase current and frequency of compressor, if the ǏI Slowly raising frequency phase currentǐ
≤I Phase current˘ǏT Limited frequency phase currentǐ, the frequency raising speed should be executed according to the ǏF
Preventing protection frequency raising speedǐ; If I Phase current˘ǏI Slowly raising frequency phase currentǐ, you should exit the slowly raising
control.
2. Frequency limited
IfǏI Limited frequency phase currentǐ≤I Phase current˘ǏT frequency reducing phase currentǐ, you should limit the frequency raising of
compressor.
3. Reducing Frequency
If [I Frequency Reducing Phase Current]≤I Phase Current˘[I Power Turn-Off Phase Current], the compressor shall continue to reduce
frequency till the lowest frequency limit or out of the condition of reducing frequency;
4. Power turn-off
If I Phase Current≥[I Power Turn-Off Phase Current], the current over protection for phase current of compressor shall stop work;
if I Phase Current≤[I Frequency Reducing Phase Current], and the compressor have stopped work 3 min, the machine shall be
allowed to come back to operate;
5. If it still can’t run automatically when the current over protection for phase current of compressor happens to
stop working for 6 times in succession, it shall press ON/OFF to operate. During the running period, it should
clear and recount the stopping times to current over protection when the running time of compressor exceeds [t
Clearing Time of Compressor Phase Current Times].
(11) Starting-up Failure Protection for Compressor
Stop it after the compressor starting-up fails, restart after 20s if the fault doesn’t shows, and if they are all failing
for the successive start 3 times, it shall be reported as Starting-up Failure, and then restart up it after 3 min.
When it still not be able to operate through carry out the above process for 5 times, it is available if press ON/OFF.
And the compressor should be cleared the times after running 2 min.
(12) Out-of-Step Protection for Compressor
The out-of-step protection signal should be detected immediately after starting-up compressor, and once find the
out-of-step protection signal, the out-of-step protection shall be stopped; if it can run for lasting power turn-off 3
min, the machine shall be allowed to operate.
35
226
Operation
If it still can’t run automatically when the out-of-step protection for compressor happens to stop working for 6
times in succession, it needs to press ON/OFF to operate. And if the running time is more than 10 min, the power
turn-off times for out-of-step protection shall be cleared and recounted.
(13) Voltage Abnormity Protection for DC Bus
1. To detect voltage abnormity protection for dc bus after completing the pre-charge:
(1) Over-High Voltage Protection for DC Bus:
If it found the DC bus voltage UDC˚[UDC Jiekuangchun Protection], turn off PFC and stop the compressor at once, and it
shall show the DC over-high voltage failure; and it should clear the failure when the voltage dropped to UDC˘[UDC
Jiekuangchun Recovery] and the compressor stopped for 3 min.
(2) Over-Low Voltage Protection for DC Bus:
If it found the DC bus voltage UDC˘ [UDC Wantuochun Protection], turn off PFC and stop the compressor at once, and it
shall show the DC over-low voltage; and it should clear the failure when the voltage raised to UDC ˚[UDC
Wantuochun Recovery] and the compressor stopped for 3 min.
2. To detect voltage abnormity protect for DC bus when getting electricity:
If it found the DC bus voltage UDC˚[UDC——Over-High Voltage], turn off the relay at once, and shows voltage abnormity
failure for DC Bus. And the failure can’t recover except to break off and get the electricity.
(14) Abnormity Protection for Four-way Valve
Under the model of heating operation in good condition: the compressor is detected TInner Tube ˘(T Inner Ring—[T
Abnormity Temperature Difference For Four-Way Valve Reversion]), during the running, it should be judged as four-way valve reversion
abnormity. And then it shall run if stop the reversion abnormity protection for four-way valve 3 min; and if it still
can’t run when the reversion abnormity protection for four-way valve happens to stop working for 3 times in
succession, it is available if presses ON/OFF.
Attention: the protection shall be shielded during the testing mode and defrosting process, and it shall be cleared
the failure and its times immediately when turning off or delivering wind / cooling / dehumidifying mode conversed
(the inverted mode don’t clear failure when it can’t recover to operate).
(15) PFC Protection
1. After start up the PFC, it should detect the protection signal of PFC immediately; under the condition of PFC
protection, it should turn off the PFC and compressor at one time;
2. It shows the failure is cleared if PFC Protection stopped working 3 min and recovers to run automatically;
3. If it still can’t run when it occurs PFC protection for 3 times in succession, it is available if presses ON/OFF; and
clear the PFC Protection times when start up PFC for 10min.
(16) Failure Detection for Temperature Packets
1. Ambient Temperature Packets: detect the failure of temperature packets at all times.
2. Temperature Packets for Outdoor Tube Temperature: only detect the temperature packets failure for outdoor
tube temperature during the defrosting within the heating operation compressor starting-up 10min. to detect the
failure of temperature packets; to detect the failure of temperature packets at all times except it.
3. Outdoor Discharge Temperature Packets:
(a) The compressor only detect the temperature packets failure after it start up 3 min in normal mode;
(b) It should detect the discharge temperature packets failure immediately in the testing mode.
4. Module Temperature Packets:
(a) Short-Circuit Detection: the compressor should be detected immediately when the module temperature
packets occur short-circuits;
(b) Open-Circuit Detection: the compressor should be detected on open-circuit when it runs 3min (it needn’t 30s
avoiding the module over-heated).
(c) Detect the temperature packets failure at all times in the testing mode.
5. Disposal for Temperature Packets Protection
(1) When the short-circuit of temperature packet is detected within 30s,
It is regarded as the temperature of temperature packets over-high (or infinite), and now according to the
over-high temperature packets, the machine should carry out the corresponding protection to stop working, and
show the corresponding temperature shutdown protection and temperature packets failure at the same time (for
example: the compressor stops immediately when outer tube temperature packets short-circuit, and the machine
shall show the overload protection and outer tube temperature packets failure).
(2) When the open-circuit of temperature packet is detected within 30s,
The protection shall be stopped and it shall show the corresponding temperature packet failure.
36
227
Appending data
Appending data
Table showing operation frequency limits for cooling and heating
Cooling
Heating
Compressor running frequency(Hz)
Compressor running frequency(Hz)
Upper limit curve of cooling frequency
F max.
Upper limit curve of heating frequency
Lower limit curve of
heating frequency
F nominal
Lower limit curve of
cooling frequency
F high temp.
F low temp.
liquid returned
F Min.
Outdoor ambient temp.
Outdoor ambient temp.
Performance date for both cooling and heating
COOLING:
Temperature
(°C)
Indoor
condition
Outdoor
27/19
35/–
Model
name
Standard
pressure
P (MPa)
Heat exchanger
temp.
pipe
Compresso
Indoor fan Outdoor fan r revolution
mode
(rps)
mode
T1 (°C)
T2 (°C)
18K
0.9 to 1.1
12 to 14
41 to 43
High
High
62
24K
0.8 to 1.0
10 to 12
43 to 45
High
High
78
HEATING:
Temperature
(°C)
Indoor
20/–
condition
Outdoor
7/6
Model
name
Standard
pressure
P (MPa)
Heat exchanger
temp.
pipe
Compresso
Indoor fan Outdoor fan r revolution
mode
(rps)
mode
T1 (°C)
T2 (°C)
18K
2.2 to 2.4
37 to 38
2 to 4
High
High
62
24K
2.5 to 2.7
42 to 44
0 to 3
High
High
80
NOTES :
(1) Measure surface temperature of heat exchanger pipe around center of heat exchanger path
U bent. (Thermistor themometer)
(2) Connecting piping condition : 5 m
228
Appending data
([SDQGHGFDSDFLW\GDWDWDEOHVIRUERWKFRROLQJDQGKHDWLQJ
Heating
110
100
Capacity ratio (%)
105
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
• Conditions
65
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Indoor air flow : High
60
Pipe length : 5m
55
50
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
90
80
70
60
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C/WB15˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
50
40
ñ 15
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
ñ 10
ñ5
0
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
5 7
10
&DSDFLW\9DULDWLRQ5DWLR$FFRUGLQJWR3LSH/HQJWK
110
110
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27°C/WB19°C
Outdoor: DB35°C/WB24°C
Indoor air flow : High
105
100
Heating capacity ratio (%)
Coolimg capacity ratio (%)
Capacity ratio (%)
Cooling
95
90
Standard pipe length 5m
85
80
Maximum pipe length 30m
0
6
12
18
Total pipe length (m)
24
30
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20°C/WB15°C
Outdoor: DB7°C/WB6°C
Indoor air flow : High
105
100
95
Standard pipe
90
length 5m
85
80
Maximum pipe length 30m
0
6
12
18
24
Total pipe length (m)
30
229
Appending data
Operation Characteristic Curve
EVHC 18 DSAAAR
Cooling
Heating
11
Current (A)
8
9
8
7
6
230V
5
4
3
7
230V
6
5
240V
4
3
240V
2
220V
10
Current (A)
9
11
220V
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C/WB24˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
10
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C/WB15˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
2
1
1
0
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0
Compressor speed (rps)
1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 80 9 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 12 0
Compressor speed (rps)
EVHC 24 DSAAAR
Cooling
Heating
11
11
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C/WB24˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
9
Current (A)
8
220V
10
220V
9
8
Current (A)
10
7
6
230V
5
4
3
7
230V
6
5
240V
4
3
240V
2
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C/WB15˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 5m
2
1
1
0
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Compressor speed (rps)
70
80
90
0
1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 12 0
Compressor speed (rps)
39
230
Appending data
1RLVHFULWHULDFXUYHWDEOHVIRUERWKPRGHOV
Outdoor side noise
Indoor side noise when blowing
50
40
30
Low
Middle
High
Indoor fan motor rotating speed
Compressor frequency/Hz
231
5()5,*(5$176<67(0',$*5$0
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM
3-Way
valve
Heat exchanger
( INDOOR )
Sub-accumulator
Compressor
Muffler
2-Way
valve
4-Way valve
Strainer
Expansion valve
Strainer
Heat exchanger
( OUTDOOR )
Strainer
Cooling
Heating
232
Installation
Installation
Important Notices
1. The unit installation work must be done by qualified personnel according to the local rules and this
manual.
2. Before installating, please contact with local authorized maintenance center, if unit is not installed
by the authorized maintenance center, the malfunction may not solved,due to discommodious contacts.
. place, please firstly contact with the authorized Maintenance
3. When removing the unit to the other
Center in the local area.
Basic Requirements For Installation Position
Install in the following place may cause malfunction. If it is unavoidable contact with service center please:
● Place where strong heat sources, vapors, flammable gas or volatile object are emitted.
● Place where high-frequency waves are generated by radio equipment, welders and medical equipment.
● Place where a lot of salinities such as coast exists.
● Place where the oil (machine oil) is contained in the air.
● Place where a sulfured gas such as the hot spring zones is generated.
● Other place with special circumstance.
Indoor Unit Installation Position Selection
1. The air inlet and outlet vent should be far from the obstruction, make sure that the air can be blown
through the whole room.
2. Select a position where the condensing water can be easily drained out, and the place is easily
connected for outdoor unit
.
3. Select a location where the children can not reach.
4. Can select the place where is strong enough to withstand the full weight and vibration of the unit.
And will not increase the noise.
Be
5. sure to leave enough space to allow access for routine maintenance. The height of the installed
location should be 250cm or more from the floor.
6. Select a place about 1m or more away from TVset or any other electric appliances.
7. Select a place where the filter can be easily taken out.
8 . Make sure that the indoor unit installation should accord with installation dimension diagram
requirements.
9 . Do not use the unit in the immediate surroundings of a laundry a bath a shower or a swimming pool.
Outdoor Unit Installation Position Selection
1. Select a location from which noise and outflow air emitted by unit will not inconvenience neighbors,
animals, plants.
2. Select a location where there should be sufficient ventilation.
3. Select a location where there should be no obstructions cover the inlet and outlet vent.
4. The location should be able to withstand the full weight and vibration of the outdoor unit and permit
safe installation.
5. Select a dry place, but do not expose under the direct sunlight or strong wind.
6. Make sure that the outdoor unit installation dimension should accord with installation dimension
diagram, convenient for maintenance, repair.
7. The height difference of connecting the tubing within 5m, the length of connecting the tubing within 10m.
8. Select a place where it is out of reach for the children.
9. Select a place where will not block the passage and do not influence the city appearance.
233
Installation
Safety Requirements For Electric Appliances
1. The power supply should be used the rated voltage and AC exclusive circuit,
the power cable diameter should be satisfied.
2. Don't drag the power cable emphatically.
3. It should be reliably earthed, and it should be connected to the special earth device,
the installation work should be operated by the professional.
The air switch must have the functions of magnetic tripping and heat tripping, in order
to protect the short circuit and overloading.
4. The min. distance from the unit and combustive surface is 1.5m.
5. The appliance shall be installed in accordance with national wiring regulations.
6. An all-pole disconnection switch having a contact separation of at least 3mm in all poles
should be connected in fixed wiring.
Note:
●
●
Make sure that the Live wire or Zero line as well as the earth wire in the family power
socket can not be wrong connected, there should be reliable and no short circuit in the
diagram.
wrong connection may cause fire.
Earthing requirements
1. Air conditioner is type I electric appliance, thus please do conduct reliable earthing
measure.
2. The yellow-green two-color wire in air conditioner is earthing wire and cannot be used
for other propose. It cannot be cut off and be fix it by screw, otherwise it would cause
electric shock.
3. The earth resistance should accord to the National Criterion.
4. The user power must offer the reliable earthing terminal. Please don't connect the
earthing wire with the following place:
ķ Tap water pipe. ĸ Gas pipe.
Ĺ Contamination pipe.
ĺ Other places that professional personnel consider them unreliable.
5. The model and rating values for fuses according the silk print on fuse cover or related
PCB board.
234
Installation
Install the rear panel
1.Always mount the rear panel horizontally. Due to the water tray of indoor unit has been adopted the
both-way drainage design, the outlet of water tray should be adjusted slightly down when installing, that is
taking the outlet of the water tray as the center of a circle, the included angle between the evaporator and
level should be 0 or more, that is good for condensing water drainage.
Wall
2.Fix the rear panel on the wall with screws. Wall
Mark on the middle of it
Gradienter
Space
Space
(Where is pre-covered with plastic granula)
to the
to the
wall
wall
3.Be sure that the rear panel has been fixed
1 5 0 mm
1 5 0 mm
firmly enough to withstand the weight of an
above
above
adult of 60kg, further more, the weight should
be evenly shared by each screw.
Left
ij 5 5 mm
(Rear piping hole)
Right
Fig.5
Install the piping hole
1.Make the piping hole (Ф55) in the wall at a slight downward slant to the
outdoor side.
2.Insert the piping-hole sleeve into the hole to prevent the connection piping
and wiring from being damaged when passing through the hole.
φ
55mm
(Rear piping hole)
Indoor
Wall pipe
Outdoor
Seal pad
ÿ 55
Install the water drainage pipe
1.For well draining, the drain hose should be placed at a downward slant. Wrenched
2.Do not wrench or bend the drain hose or flood its end by water.
3.When the long drainage hose passing through indoor,
should wrap the insulation materials.
Bent
Flooded
Connect indoor and outdoor electric wires
1.Open the surface panel.
2.Remove the wiring cover .
3.Route the power connection cord and signal control wire (for cooling and heating unit only) from the
back of the indoor unit and pull it toward the front through the wiring hole for connection.
4.Connect the interconnection cord to the terminal block, and then fix the cord with cord anchorge.
5.Reassemble the clampand wiring cover.
6.Recover the surface panel.
yellowgreen
brown
235
Installation
NOTE:
When connecting the electric wire if the wire length is not enough, please contact with
the authorized service shop to buy a exclusive electric wire that is long enough and the
joint on the wire are not allowed.
● The electric wiring must be correctly connected, wrong connection may cause spare parts
malfunction.
● Tighten the terminal screw in order to prevent loose.
● After tighten the screw, slight pull the wire and confirm whether is it firm or not.
● If the earth wire is wrong connection, that may cause electric shock.
● The cover plate must be fixed, and tighten the connection wire, if it is poor installed, that
the dust, moisture may enter in or the connection terminal will be affected by outside force,
and will cause fire or electric shock.
Install the indoor unit
The piping can be lead out from right, right rear, left
left rear.
1.When routing the piping and wiring from the left
or right side of indoor unit, cut off the tailings
from the chassis in necessary(Show in Fig.7)
Ł Cut off the tailings 1 when routing the wiring only;
ł Cut off the tailings 1 and tailings 2 when routing
both the wiring and piping.
2. Take out the piping from body case, wrap the piping
electric wire, water pipe with tape and pull them
through the piping hole (As show in Fig.8)
3. Hange the mounting slots of the indoor unit on the
upper tabs of the rear panel and check if it is firm
enough.(As show in Fig.9)
4. The height of the installed location should be 2.5m
or more from the floor.
●
Tailing 2
Tailing 1
Fig.7
Gas side pipe
External connection
electric wire
Liquid side piping
Gas side piping
insulation
Finally wrap it
with tape
Liquid side
Piping insulation
Water drainage pipe
Left
Right
Right rear
Fixing hook
Mounting
plate
Left rear
Fig.8
Mounting
baord
Fig.9
Install the connection pipe
1. Align the center of the piping flare with the relevant valve.
2. Screw in the flare nut by hand and then tighten the
nut with spanner and torque wrench refer to the
following:
Hex nut diameter
Ф6
Ф 9.52
Ф 12
Ф 16
Ф 19
Indoor unit piping
Taper nut Piping
Tightening torque (N m)
15̚20
31̚35
50̚55
60̚65
70̚75
Spanner
Torque
wrench
NOTE: Firstly connect the connection pipe to indoor unit, then to outdoor unit; pay attention
to the piping bending, do not damage the connection pipe; the joint nut couldn't tighten too
much, otherwise it may cause leakage.
236
Installation
Electric wiring
1. Disassemble the handle on the outdoor unit right side plate.
2.Take off cord anchorage. Connect and fix power connect
cord (for cooling and heating unit,connect and fix power
connect cord and signal control wire)to terminal block.
3.Fix the power connection cable with cord anchorage,
(for cooling and heating unit, use the cord anchorage
to fix the power connection cable and the signal
control wire).
4. Ensure wire has been fixed well.
5. Install the handle.
N(1) 2 3 4 5
yellowgreen
blue black brown violet orange
Indoor unit
connection
yellowgreen
Power
Handle
NOTE:
● Wrong wiring may cause spare parts malfunction.
● After the cable fixed, make sure there should be
a free space between the connection and
connection and fixing place on the lead wire.
Air purging and leakage test
1. Connect charging hose of manifold valve to charge end of low pressure
valve (both high/low pressure valves must be tightly shut).
2. Connect joint of charging hose to vacuum pump.
Manifold
Valve
3. Fully open handle handle of Lo manifold valve.
Multimeter
Manometer
4. Open the vacuum pump to evacuate. At the beginning, slightly
-76cmHg
loosen joint nut of low pressure valve to check if there
Lo Handle
Hi handle
is air coming inside. (If noise of vacuum pump has
Charging hose
Charging
hose
been changed, the reading of multimeter is 0) Then
tighten the nut.
Vacuum pump
5. Keep evacuating for more than 15mins and make
Low pressure valve
sure the reading of multi-meter is -1.0 105pa
(-76cmHg)..
Fig.10
6. Fully open high/low pressure valves.
7. Remove charging hose from charging end of low pressure valve.
8. Tighten bonnet of low-pressure valve. (As shown in Fig.10)
Condensate drainage of outdoor unit (no for cooling only)
The condensate and defrosting water formd during heating
in the outdoor unit can be properly discharged by drainage
pipe .
Installation method:set the drain connection in ÿ 25 hole of the
chassis has been installed and then connect drainage pipe
with drain nozzle,so that condensate and defrosting waer can
be properly discharged
Chassis
Drain
connection
237
Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting Guide
Note: When replacing the controller, make sure insert the wire jumper into the new controller, otherwise the
unit display C5
The breaker trips at once when it
Measure insulation resistance to ground to see
if there is any leakage.
is set to "ON".
Trip of breaker or blow
The circuit or the part of the air conditioner has
of fuse
malfunction. They heat and break the insulation
The breaker trips in few minutes
and lead to short circuit or creepage. Measure
when it is set to "ON"
the insulation resistance or eliminate the malfunction one by one. If the breaker itself has
Air conditioner can not start up
malfunction, then replace the breaker.
No power
Check power supply circuit.
Power plug is not well plugged in and poor con-
Check if the plug is properly plugged in and
nection
make the loose contact firm.
The air conditioner
does not react after
it is powered ( after
Fuse of controller burnt out
Change controller fuse
the plug is inserted,
the buzzer does
not sound and the
The transformer connection is loose or has bad
contact or the transformer has malfunction
Fasten the wiring; measure the output
voltage of the transformer, if it is
incorrect, change the transformer
remote startup has
no response)
The remote controller
Cont r olle r is br oken
Check remote controller
Remote controller is short of power
Change batteries
does not receive
signals (after it is
Remote controller malfunction
First, press the manual switch button AUTO,
if there is no response,check based on the
powered, the buzzer
will sound, unless it
has
above methods. If it runs normally after
Receiver loose or poor connection
pressing the button,check again whether the
installation position and the connection wire
malfunction)
of the reception head is correct. If it is
correct,then replace the receiver or the re-
Receiver is broken
mote controller.
heck the voltage. If it is lower than 10£¥ of the rated voltage, check the
Power voltage is too low
cause, improve the power supply condition and add the stabilized voltage
power supply.
238
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Improper set of temperature
Adjust set temperature
If cooling (heating) load is
Check the forecasted load of cooling (heating)
proper
The refrigerant has leakage or is
insufficient
heck and fill the leakage, then
vacuumize it and supplement the refrigerant as required
Leakage between the high presMalfunction of
refrigerant
flow
sure and the low pressure inside the compressor
Malfunction of four-way valve
Local block of capillary
Poor COOL(HEAT) operation
Replace the compressor
Replace the four-way valve
Replace the capillary
Judge whether the system is blocked by
Blockage of cooling system
observing the condensation of evaporator and the pressure value of the high
pressure manometer and take measures
to deal with the system.
Heat insulation for the connection
pipes of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is bad.
Make sure that heat insulation for the thick and thin pipes
is good. Heat insulation must also be provided for the
joint andthe exposed part of the copper pipe .
Block of outdoor heat exchanger
Clean the dust accumulated on the surface of
the heat exchanger.
Air filter were blocked
Clean the filter
To set the fan speed to high or
Fan speed was set too slow
Air circulation
is insufficient
Fan rotation speed becomes
low
middle speed
Capacitor
Replace the capaci-
damage
tor
Motor damage
Replace the motor
The installation position of the
Good ventilation must be provided for the
outdoor unit is not appropriate.
installation position of the outdoor unit.
The outdoor temperature is too high.
Properly install the rainproof plate or the sunproof plate. If the
maximum cool air still can not meet the requirement, it is suggested to replace the air conditioner.
The air tightness is not enough. People
come in and out too frequently. There
are heating devices indoors.
Keep certain air tightness indoors, try not to use
electricalappliance with large quantity of heat
239
Troubleshooting Guide
The indoor fan motor is burned or breaks or
has the heat protector malfunction.
The fan does not
run when it is set
to supply air.
In the cooling and
heating mode, the
compressor runs,
but the outdoor
fan does not run.
When cooling or
heating, outdoor
fanruns,compressor
doesn't run.
The compressor is
too hot and leads to
the action of the
protector.
Replace the fan motor or the defective part.
The built-in heat protector of the motor breaks
frequently because the motor is
abnormal.
Replace the fan motor
Wrong connection
Make the correction connection based on the circuit
drawing.
The fan capacitor has open circuit or is damaged.
Replace the fan capacitor of the same type and same
specification.
The outdoor fan motor is damaged.
Replace the fan motor
Wrong connection
Make the correct connection based on the circuit
drawing.
The outdoor fan capacitor is damaged.
Replace the fan capacitor
Malfunction of compressor
Replace the compressor
Breakage of running capacitor of compressor
Replace the capacitor
The voltage is too low or too high.
Manostat is recommended.
Wrong wire connection
Connect the circuit diagram correctly
The protector itself has malfunction.
Use the multimeter to check whether the contact of
the compressor is on when it is not overheated. If it
is not on, then replace the protector
The refrigerant is not enough or is too much.
Adjust the volume of the refrigerant
The capillary is blocked and the temperature
rises.
Replace the capillary
The compressor does not run smoothly or is
stuck. The air discharge valve is damaged
Replace the compressor
The protector itself has malfunction.
Replace the protector
The torque of the swing motor is not enough
The swing fan does
not run.
wrong connection
First, check whether the connection is wrong. If no,
replace the parts
The controller is damaged• •IC2003 is
damaged,
the swing relay can not close,
• •
etc
240
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Controller malfunction (IC2003 broken,
creepage of
parallel capacitor of relay loop,
Change controller
relay is broken etc.)
In cool, heat mode,the
outdoor
unit and compressor
will not run.
Wire loose or wrong connection
Correctly wire according to the drawing
Improper setting of temperature
Adjust setting temp.
Drainage pipe blocked or broken
Change drainage pipe
Wrap of refrigerant pipe joint is not close
Re-wrap and make it tight.
Water leakage
enough.
Abnormal sound
and shake
Fan of indoor unit contacts other parts.
Adjust fan location.
Foreign object in indoor unit
Take out the foreign object.
Compressor shakes too much.
Adjust support washer of compressor, and
tighten loosen screws.
Touch of pipeline of outdoor unit
Separate the touching pipeline.
Touch of inner plates
1. Tighten connect screw.
2. Stick absorbing clay between plates.
Louver of outdoor unit touched outer
case.
Adjust location of louver.
Abnormal sound inside compressor
Change compressor
241
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
3.Malfunctions
1RUPDOO\GLDJQRVHWURXEOHVDFFRUGLQJWRWKHWURXEOHGLDJQRVLVSURFHGXUHDVGHVFULEHGEHORZ5HIHUWRWKHFKHFN
SRLQWVLQVHUYLFLQJZULWWHQRQWKHZLULQJGLDJUDPVDWWDFKHGWRWKHLQGRRURXWGRRUXQLWV
1R
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJSURFHGXUH
&RQILUPDWLRQ
-XGJHPHQWE\)ODVKLQJ/('RI,QGRRU2XWGRRU8QLW
+RZWR&KHFNVLPSO\WKHPDLQSDUW NOTE:
$ ODUJHFDSDFLW\ HOHFWURO\WLF FDSDFLWRU LV XVHG LQ WKH RXWGRRU XQLW FRQWUROOHULQYHUWHU7KHUHIRUHLI WKH SRZHU
VXSSO\LVWXUQHGRIIFKDUJHFKDUJLQJYROWDJH'&9WR9UHPDLQVDQGGLVFKDUJLQJWDNHVDORWRIWLPH$IWHU
WXUQLQJ RII WKH SRZHU VRXUFHLI WRXFKLQJ WKH FKDUJLQJ VHFWLRQ EHIRUH GLVFKDUJLQJ DQ HOHFWULFDO VKRFN PD\ EH
FDXVHG'LVFKDUJHWKHHOHFWURO\WLFFDSDFLWRUFRPSOHWHO\E\XVLQJVROGHULQJLURQHWF
<Discharging method>
UHPRYHWKHLQYHUWHUFRYHU2XWGRRU8QLW
$VVKRZQEHORZFRQQHFWWKHGLVFKDUJHUHVLVWDQFHDSSUR[Ω:RUSOXJRIWKHVROGHULQJLURQWRYROWDJH
EHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVRIWKHHOHFWURO\WLFFDSDFLWRUWHVW³'´DQG³(´SRLQWRQ3&%RDUGIRUVDQGWKHQ
SHIRUPHGLVFKDUJLQJ
242
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Discharging Position:
ǃConfirmation
˄1˅Confirmation of Power Supply
Confirm that the power breaker operates(ON) normally;
(2)Confirmation of Power Voltage
Confirm that power voltage is AC 220–230–240 ±10%. If power voltage is not in this range, the unit may not
operate normally.
2ǃFlashing LED of Indoor/Outdoor Unit and Primary Judgement
,QGRRUXQLWGLVSOD\LQJPHWKRG
1R
1
'RXEOHFRGHGLVSOD\
1DPHRIPDOIXQFWLRQ
6\VWHPKLJKSUHVVXUH E1
SURWHFWLRQ
2XWGRRUXQLWGLVSOD\PHWKRG
LQGLFDWRUNLQGVRIGLVSOD\
WKHFLUFOHLVVGLVSOD\
,QGLFDWRUGLVSOD\
LQGLFDWRUEOLQNVV
DQGH[WLQJXLVKV
$&VWDWXV
0DOIXQFWLRQV
□ 2II ■ 2Q %OLQNV
5XQQLQJ &RROLQJ +HDWLQJ
D40
LQGLFDWRU LQGLFDWRU LQGLFDWRU
V2II
EOLQNRQFH
□
D41 D42 D43
ƿ
ƿ
ƿ
2
$QWLIUHH]LQJ E2
SURWHFWLRQ
V2II
EOLQNWZLFH
■
□
■
□
3
&RPSUHVVRUDLUH[KDXVW
E4
KLJKWHPSSURWHFWLRQ
V2II
EOLQNIRXU
WLPHV
■
□
■
ƿ
FRROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
H[FHSWWKHLQGRRUIDQPRWRU
LVUXQQLQJRWKHUVZLOOVWRS
WRUXQKHDWLQJDOOVWRSUXQQLQJ
FRROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRURXWGRRUIDQ
PRWRUZLOOVWRSUXQQLQJ
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOOVWRS
WRUXQ
FRROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRURXWGRRUIDQ
PRWRUZLOOVWRSUXQQLQJ
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZRUNV
KHDWLQJDOOVWRSUXQQLQJ
+LJKSUHVVXUHRIV\VWHPPLJKWEH
5HIULJHUDQWLVWRRPXFK
3RRUKHDWLQJH[FKDQJLQJIRUXQLWV
LQFOXGLQJKHDWH[FKDQJHULVGLUW\DQG
XQLWKHDWLQJUDGLDWLQJDPELHQWLVSRRU
$PELHQWWHPSLVWRRKLJK
3RRULQGRRUXQLWDLUUHWXUQLQJ
,QGRRUIDQPRWRUURWDWLQJVSHHGDEQRUPDO
(YDSRUDWRULVGLUW\
3OVUHIHUWRWURXEOHVKRRW
DLUH[KDXVWSURWHFWLRQ
RYHUORDG
243
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
□
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRURXWGRRUIDQ
PRWRUZLOOVWRSLQGRRU
IDQZLOOZRUNKHDWLQJ
DOOZLOOVWRS
3RZHUVXSSO\LVQRWVWDEOHIOXFWXDWLRQ
LVWRRPXFK
3RZHUVXSSO\LVWRRORZRYHUORDGLVWRR
PXFK
□
ƿ
&RROLQJFRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRS
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZRUNV+HDWLQJ
DOOZLOOVWRS
3OHDVHUHIHUWRWURXEOHVKRRWLQJ
■
■
&RROLQJFRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRS
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZRUNV+HDWLQJ
DOOZLOOVWRS
3OHDVHUHIHUWRWURXEOHVKRRWLQJ
4
$&RYHUORDG
E5
SURWHFWLRQ
2IIVEOLQN
WLPHV
□
■
ƿ
5
,QGRRUDQGRXWGRRUXQLWV E6
FRPPXQLFDWLRQPDOIXQFWLRQ
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
□
□
6
$QWLKLJKWHPS E8
SURWHFWLRQ
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
■
□
7
,QGRRUXQLWPRWRU H6
QRIHHGEDFN
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
:KROHXQLWZLOO
VWRSWRUXQ
3RRULQVHUWIRU*3)
,QGRRUFRQWUROERDUG
$3PDOIXQFWLRQ
,QGRRUPRWRU0PDOIXQFWLRQ
8
-XPSZLUHFDS
C5
PDOIXQFWLRQ
SURWHFWLRQ
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
:KROHXQLWZLOO
VWRSWRUXQ
,QGRRUFRQWUROERDUG
$3MXPSFDSSRRUFRQQHFWHG
SOHDVHUHLQVHUWRUUHSODFH
WKHMXPSFDS
9
,QGRRUDPELHQW
VHQVRURSHQ
F1
FLUFXLW
VKRUWFLUFXLW
10
,QGRRUHYDSRUDWRU
F2
VHQVRUFLUXLW
RSHQVKRUWFLUFXLW
2XWGRRUDPELHQW
11 VHQVRUFLUFXLWRSHQ F3
FLUFXLWVKRUW
2XWGRRUFRQGHQVRU
12 VHQVRURSHQFLUFXLW F4
VKRUWFLUFXLW
2XWGRRUDLU
13 H[KDXVWVHQVRU F5
RSHQFLUFXLW
VKRUWFLUFXLW
2IIV
EOLQNRQFH
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
LQGRRUIDQPRWRULV
UXQQLQJRWKHURYHUORDGV
ZLOOVWRS+HDWLQJZKROH
XQLWZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
5RRPWHPSVHQVRU
LVQRWFRQQHFWHGZLWK
WKHFRQWUROSDQHO$3
5RRPWHPSVHQVRU
LVGDPDJHG
2IIV
EOLQNWZLFH
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUUXQQLQJ
RWKHURYHUORDGZLOOVWRS
+HDWLQJZKROHXQLWZLOO
VWRS
7XEHWHPSVHQVRU
LVQRWFRQQHFWHGZLWK
WKHFRQWUROSDQHO$3
7XEHWHPSVHQVRU
LVGDPDJHG
2IIV
EOLQN
WKUHHWLPHV
■
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRS
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOO
ZRUN+HDWDOOZLOOVWRS
□
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRS
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZLOO
ZRUN+HDWDOOZLOOVWRS
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
DIWHUUXQQLQJIRUPLQV
ODWHUWKHFRPSUHVVRUZLOO
VWRSWRUXQLQGRRUIDQ
PRWRUZLOOVWDUWWRUXQ
KHDWLQJDIWHUUXQPLQV
ODWHUDOOZLOOVWRSWRUXQ
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
□
□
□
□
ƿ
ƿ
2IIV
EOLQNV
WLPHV
□
□
ƿ
ƿ
F6
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
■
□
ƿ
ƿ
2YHUFXUUHQW
15 QHHGIUHTXHQF\ F8
GHVFHQGLQJ
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
■
■
□
■
2YHUORDGOLPLW
14 GHVFHQGLQJ
IUHTXHQF\
$LUH[KDXVW
16 RYHUKLJK
F9
QHHGIUHTXHQF\
GHVFHQGLQJ
'&JHQHUDWUL[
17 YROWDJH
PH
2XWGRRUURRP
WHPSVHQVRU
KDVQÿWFRQQHFWHG
ZHOORUGDPDJHG
SOHDVHUHIHUWR
WKHVHQVRUUHVLVWDQFH
YDOXHIRUFKHFNLQJ
2XWGRRUWXE
WHPSVHQVRU
KDVQÿWFRQQHFWHG
ZHOORUGDPDJHG
SOHDVHUHIHUWR
WKHVHQVRUUHVLVWDQFH
YDOXHIRUFKHFNLQJ
([KDXVWWHPSVHQVRU
KDVQÿWFRQQHFWHG
ZHOORUGDPDJHG
SOHDVHUHIHUWR
WKHVHQVRUUHVLVWDQFH
YDOXHIRUFKHFNLQJ
6HQVRUKHDGKDVQÿW
LQVHUWLQWRWKHFRSSHU
WXEH
2YHUORDGQRUPDO
RSHUDWLRQFRPSUHVVRU
LVUXQQLQJIUHTXHQF\
GHVFHQGLQJ
2YHUORDGQRUPDO
RSHUDWLRQFRPSUHVVRU
LVUXQQLQJIUHTXHQF\
GHVFHQGLQJ
,QSXWSRZHUVXSSO\LVWRRORZ
6\VWHPYROWDJHLVWRRKLJKRYHUORDG
LVWRRPXFK
2YHUORDGLVWRRPXFK
DPELHQWWHPSLVWRRKLJK
5HIULJHUDQWLVVKRUW
(OHFWULFH[SDQVLRQPDOIXQFWLRQ
7HVWLQJZLUHWHUPLQDO
/DQG1SRVLWLRQ
2IIV
EOLQN
WLPHV
■
■
□
□
2YHUORDGQRUPDO
RSHUDWLRQFRPSUHVVRU
LVUXQQLQJIUHTXHQF\
GHVFHQGLQJ
2IIV
□
■
□
ƿ
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRUVWRSUXQQLQJ
3OHDVHUHIHU
WRWURXEOHVKRRWLQJ
5
244
Troubleshooting Guide
is too high
Fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
Blink 11
times
If higher than 265VAC,
until the power supply
rise up to normal range
then to turn on the unit;
2. If AC input is normal,
after unit is turned on, to
test the both sides votage of
electrolytic capacitor on AP1,
if they are normal, that the
circuit of voltage testing part
has malfunction, pls replace the AP1
18
Whole unit’s
current testing
malfunction
U5
Off 3s
blink 13
times
□
■
ƿ
■
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
The circuit on AP1 has
malfunction, replace the
outdoor unit AP1
19
Compressor
current overcurrent
protection
P5
Off 3s
blink 15
times
□
ƿ
□
□
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Please refer to troubleshooting
(IPM protection, compressor
lose steps, compressor current
overcurrent protection)
20
Defrosting
H1
Off 3s
blink once
21
Electrostatic dedust
H2
protection
Off 3s
blink twice
Under the heating mode,
compressor running, indoor
fan motor stop working
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
1. Wire terminal OVCCOMP loosen or circuit,
normal phenomenon use
ohm meter to test both
sides of resistance value
should be less than 1ohm.
2.Please refer to troubleshooting
(air exhaust, overload)
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Pls refer to troubleshooting
■
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Pls refer to troubleshooting
ƿ
ƿ
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Pls refer to troubleshooting
ƿ
■
ƿ
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Pls refer to troubleshooting
□
ƿ
ƿ
Overload normal works,
compressor running,
frequency declines
Pls refer to troubleshooting
□
ƿ
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Pls refer to troubleshooting
■
□
H3
Off 3s
blink 3 □
times
23
System
abnormal
H4
Off 3s
blink 4
times
24
IPM protection
H5
Off 3s
blink 5
times
■
□
■
25
PFC protection
HC
Off 3s
blink 6 □
times
■
26
Compressor
lose steps
H7
Off 3s
blink 7
times
□
27
Heating, anti-high H0
temp. declines
Off 3s
blink 10 ■
times
28
Startsup
fail
Lc
Off 3s
blink 11 □
times
ƿ
29
Compressor
current
testing
circuit malfunction
U1
Off 3s
blink 13 □
times
ƿ
30
EEPROM
malfunction
EE
Off 3s
blink 15 □
times
31
Capacitor
charge
malfunction
PU
Off 3s
blink 17 □
times
■
32
Module sensor
circuit diagram
P7
Off 3s
blink 18 □
times
□
33
Module
temp.
over high
protection
P8
Off 3s
blink 19 ■
times
22
Compressor
overload
protection
It is normal
function
ƿ
□
□
ƿ
□
Replace the outdoor control plate AP1
■
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Replace the outdoor control plate AP1
□
■
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Pls refer to Part 3 capacitor charge
of troubleshooting
■
ƿ
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
Replace the outdoor control plate AP1
□
ƿ
■
Cooling, dehumidifying;
compressor stops running,
indoor fan motor works.
Heating: all will stop
running
After whole unit power off 20mins,
check the coolant on AP1’s IPM Module
whether is sufficient or not, whether the
radiator is tightened or not. If it is not ok
please improve or
245
Troubleshooting Guide
5HSODFHWKHFRQWUROERDUG$3
34
35
36
'&JHQHUDWUL[YROWDJH
U3
GHFOLQHPDOIXFQWLRQ
'&JHQHUDWUL[YROWDJH PL
LVWRRORZ
0RGXOHWHPSLVWRRKLJK EU
OLPLWGHFOLQHIUHTXHQF\
2IIV
EOLQN
□
WLPHV
2IIV □
EOLQN
WLPHV
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
□
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRS
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZRUNV
+HDWLQJDOOZLOOVWRS
&RROLQJGHKXPLGLI\LQJ
FRPSUHVVRUZLOOVWRS
LQGRRUIDQPRWRUZRUNV
+HDWLQJDOOZLOOVWRS
3RZHUYROWDJH
LVQRWVWDDEOH
7HVWLQJZLUHWHUPLQDO;7/DQG1
SRVLWLRQÿVYROWDJHLIORZHU9$&
ZDLWIRUSRZHUVXSSO\ULVHXSWRQRUPDO
UDQJHWKHQWXUQRQWKHXQLWDJDLQ
,I$&LQSXWWLQJLVQRUPDODIWHUSRZHUHG
RQWRWHVWWKHRXWGRRUFRQWUROERDUGÿV$3
HOHFWURO\WLFFDSDFLWRUYROWDJH7(67LILW
LVQRUPDOWKDWWKH'&YROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW
SDUWFLUFXLWKDVPDOIXQFWLRQSOHDVHUHSODFH
WKHRXWGRRUFRQWUROERDUG$3
:KROHXQLWEUHDNIRUPLQV
DQGGLVFKDUJHWRFKHFNWKH
RXWGRRUFRQWUROERDUG$3ÿV
,30PRGXOHFRRODQWZKHWKHU
LVVKRUWWKHUDGLDWRULV
WLJKWHQHG,IDERYHSKHQRPHQRQ
LVQRWRNSOHDVHLPSURYHRU
UHSODFHWKHFRQWUROERDUG
$3
ƿ
2YHUORDGQRUPDOZRUNV
FRPSUHVVRUUXQQLQJIUHTXHQF\
GHFOLQHV
3RZHUVXSSO\YROWDJHLV
ORZHUWKDQ$&9
7KLVPDOIXQFWLRQKDSSHQHG
LQKHDWLQJFRQGLWLRQDOOZLOO :LUHWHUPLQDO9ORRVHQ
RUZLUHEUHDN
VWRSWRUXQ
9GDPDJHGUHSODFH9
37
)RXUZD\YDOYHFRPPXWDWLQJ U7
LVDEQRUPDO
■
□
ƿ
□
38
2XWRRUXQLWPDOIXQFWLRQ U9
■
■
ƿ
□
&RROLQJFRPSUHVVRU
ZLOOVWRSLQGRRUIDQ
PRWRUZRUNV
+HDWLQJDOOZLOOVWRS
39
$QWLIUHH]LQJ
OLPLWGHFOLQH FH
IUHTXHQF\
■
■
■
□
2YHUORDGQRUPDOZRUNV ,QGRRUXQLWDLUUHWXUQLVSRRU
RUIDQPRWRUURWDWLQJVSHHG
FRPSUHVVRUUXQQLQJ
LVWRRORZ
IUHTXHQF\GHFOLQHV
5HSODFHWKHRXWGRRUFRQWUROERDUG
$3
5
246
Troubleshooting Guide
3ǃHow to Check simply the main part
(1) Capacitor charge fault (Fault with outdoor unit) (AP1 below refers to the outdoor control panel)
Main Check Points:
Use AC voltmeter to check if the voltage between terminal L and N on the wiring board is within 210VAC~240VAC.
If the reactor (L) is correctly connected? If the connection is loose or fallen? If the reactor (L) is damaged?
Fault diagnosis process:
Switch on the unit
and wait 1 minute
Use DC voltmeter
to measure the
voltage on the two
ends of electrolytic
capacitor (test3)
Voltage higher than 200V?
Y
Fault with the voltage
testing circuit on
control panel AP1
Replace the control
panel AP1
Switch off the power
and repair the supply
power to restore the
voltage to
210VAC~250VAC
Re-energize and
switch on the unit
N
Measure the AC voltage between
terminal L and N on wiring board
XT
Voltage within
210VAC~250VAC?
N
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
Y
Switch off the power and wait 20 minutes; or
use DC voltmeter to measure the voltage on the
two ends of capacitor (test3), until the voltage
is lower than 20V
N
Check the
connection of reactor
(L in the Electrical
Wiring Diagram)
If the wiring of
reactor L is normal?
N
Connect the reactor L
according to Electrical
Wiring Diagram
Re-energize and
switch on the unit
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
Y
Replace the control
panel AP1
N
End
247
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
(2) IPM Protection, Out-of-step Fault, Compressor Phase Overcurrent (AP1 below refers
to the outdoor control panel)
Mainly detect:
If the connection between control panel AP1 and compressor COMP is secure? If loose? If the connection is in correct order?
If the voltage input of the machine is within normal range? (Use AC voltmeter to measure the voltage
between terminal L and N on the wiring board XT)
If the compressor coil resistance is normal? If the insulation of compressor coil against the copper tube
is in good condition?
If the working loads of the machine are too high? If the radiation is good?
If the charge volume of refrigerant is correct?
Fault diagnosis process:
248
Troubleshooting Guide
Energize and
switch on
IPM protection
occurs after the
machine has run for
a period of time?
Y
Use AC voltmeter
to measure the
voltage between
terminal L and N
on the wiring
board XT)
If the voltage
between terminal L
and N on wiring
board XT is within
210VAC~250VAC?
N
Check the supply
voltage and
restore it to
210VAC~250VAC
Y
Start and run the
unit. Before
protection occurs,
use DC voltmeter to
measure the voltage
between the two
ends of electrolytic
capacitor on control
panel AP1 (test3)
Voltage between
the two ends of
electrolytic
capacitor (test3) is
higher than 250V
Y
Please confirm:
1. If the indoor and
outdoor heat
exchangers are
dirty? If they are
obstructed by other
objects which affect
the heat exchange
of indoor and
outdoor unit.
2. If the indoor and
outdoor fans are
working normally?
3. If the environment
temperature is too
high, resulting in
that the system
pressure is too high
and exceeds the
permissible range?
4. If the charge
volume of
refrigerant is too
much, resulting in
that the system
pressure is too
high?
5. Other conditions
resulting in that the
system pressure
becomes too high.
The connection
of capacitor C2
is loose.
Y
Reconnect the
capacitor C2 according
to Electrical Wiring
Diagram. Then,
energize and start the
unit.
Y
N
Remove the wires
on the two ends of
capacitor C2. Then,
use
capacitance
meter to measure
the capacitor C2.
Verify as per the
Parameters Sheet.
Stop the unit and
disconnect the power
supply. Wait 20 minutes,
or use DC voltmeter to
measure the voltage
between the two ends of
capacitor C2, until the
voltage is lower than 20V
If capacitor
C2 is failed?
Replace the capacitor
C2. Then, energize
and start the unit.
Y
Replace the
control panel AP1
N
If there is any
abnormality
described above?
Y
Y
Take corrective actions
according to Technical
Service Manual, and
then energize and start
the unit.
Connect the control panel
AP1 and compressor
COMP correctly according
to the Electrical Wiring
Diagram. Then, energize
and start the unit.
If the
resistance is
normal?
N
N
If the unit can
work
normally?
If the unit can
work
normally?
Y
Y
N
Replace the
control panel AP1
N
Use ohmmeter to
measure the resistance
between the three
terminals on compressor
COMP, and compare the
measurements with the
compressor resistance on
Service Manual.
If the unit can
work
normally?
N
Stop the unit and
disconnect the power
supply. Then, check
the connection of
capacitor
C2
according to Electrical
Wiring Diagram.
Refer to the
Electrical Wiring
Diagram and check
if the connection
between AP1 and
COMP is loose and if
the connection order
is correct.
If the connection
between AP1 and
COMP is unsecure
or the connection
order is wrong?
N
If the unit can
work
normally?
If the unit can
work
normally?
Y
N
Y
Replace the
compressor
COMP
N
Use ohmmeter to
measure the resistance
between the two
terminals of compressor
COMP and copper tube.
Resistance higher
than 500MΩ?
N
Replace the
control panel
AP1
END
249
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
˄3˅High temperature and overload protection diagnosis (AP1 hereinafter refers to the control board of the
outdoor unit)
Mainly detect:
● Is outdoor ambient temperature in normal range?
● Are the outdoor and indoor fans operating normally?
● Is the heat dissipation environment inside and outside the unit is good?
Overheat and high
temperature protection
Y
Is outdoor ambient temperature higher than 53?
Normal protection, please operate it after the
outdoor ambient temperature is normalized.
N
20 minutes after the complete
unit is powered off.
Is heat dissipation of the indoor unit
and outdoor unit abnormal?
Y
Improve the heat
dissipation environment
of the unit
N
Does the outdoor fan work normally?
N
1. Check if the fan terminal OFAN
is connected correctly
2. Resistance between any two
terminals is measure by an ohm
gauge and should be less than 1K
Ohm.
Y
Replace the fan
capacitor C1
Replace the control panel
AP1
Replace the
outdoor fan
End
5
250
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
(4) Fail for start up (following AP1 for outdoor unit control board)
Mainly detect:
Whether the compressor wiring is connected correct?
Is time for compressor stopping enough?
Is compressor broken?
Power on the unit
Is stop time of the compressor
longer than 3 minutes?
N
Restart it up after 3 minutes
Y
Does startup fail?
Y
Are the wires for the compressor connected
correctly? Is connection sequence right?
N
Connect the wires as per the
connection diagram
Y
Replace the control panel AP1
N
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Replace the
compressor
Y
End
251
Troubleshooting Guide
(5) Out of step diagnosis for the compressor (AP1 hereinafter refers to the control board of the outdoor unit)
Mainly detect:
Whether the unit voltage is too high?
Whether the work voltage is too low?
Out of step occurs once the
unit is powered on.
Out of step occurs in
operation
Is stop time of the
compressor longer than
3 minutes?
Is the outdoor fan working
normally?
Is the outdoor unit blocked
by foreign objects?
Are the wires for the compressor connected
correctly? Is connection sequence right?
Is the connection made in clockwise
direction?
Check if the fan terminal
OFAN is connected correctly
Replace the fan
capacitor C1
Replace the
outdoor fan
Remove foreign objects
Replace the
control panel AP1
Connect the
wires correctly
Replace the control
panel AP1
If the fault is eliminated?
If the fault is eliminated?
Replace the
compressor
Replace the
compressor
End
End
252
Troubleshooting Guide
(6)Overload and air exhaust malfunction detect (following AP1 for outdoor unit control board)
Mainly detect:
Wether the electronic expansion valve is connected well or not? Is electronic expansion valve damaged?
Is refrigerant leaked?
20 minutes after the
complete unit is
powered off
Is the terminal FA for the
electronic expansion valve
connected correctly?
Connect the
wires correctly
Resistances between the first four pins
close to the terminal hole and the fifth
pin are almost the same, less than 100
ohm.
Replace the electronic
expansion valve
If the fault is eliminated?
Replace the
control panel
AP1
If the fault is eliminated?
Coolant leakage, refilling
the coolant
End
253
Troubleshooting Guide
˄7˅Power factor correction (PFC) fault (a fault of outdoor unit) (AP1 hereinafter
refers to the control board of the outdoor unit)
Mainly detect:
Check if the reactor (L) of the outdoor unit and the PFC capacitor are broken
The failure diagnosis process is as follows:
Start
Check wiring of the
reactor (L) of the
outdoor unit and the
PFC capacitor
Whether there is any
damage or
short-circuit?
Y
Replace it as per the
wiring diagram and
reconnect the wires
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Remove the PFC capacitor
and measure resistance
between the two terminals.
N
Is the resistance around zero?
Y
The capacitor is
short circuited and
the capacitor
should be replaced
Restart the unit
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
N
Disconnect the terminals for the
reactor and measure the resistance
between the two terminals of the
reactor by an ohm gauge
Whether there is any damage
or short-circuit?
N
Y
Replace the reactor
Restart the unit
If the fault is eliminated?
Y
N
Replace the control
panel AP1
N
Y
End
254
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
(8) Communication malfunction: (following AP1 for outdoor unit control board)
Mainly detect:
Detect the indoor and outdoor units connection wire and indoor and outdoor units inside wiring is connect
well or not, if is there any damage?
Is there any damage for the indoor unit mainboard communication circuit? Is communication circuit damaged?
The flow chart for malfunction detect:
Start
Y
N
Did the equipment operate
normally before the failure
occurs?
Check the wiring of the indoor and
outdoor units with reference to the
wiring diagram
Check wiring inside of
the indoor and outdoor
units
Y
Is the connection right?
N
N
The AP1 voltage
detection circuit
is at fault
Y
Correctly connect the
corresponding wires for
the indoor and outdoor
units with reference to
the wiring diagram
Are wires broken?
N
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Check the communication
circuit of the outdoor unit
If the fault is eliminated?
The communication
circuit is abnormal
Y
Replace the main board
˄AP1˅of the outdoor unit
N
If the fault is eliminated?
N
Replace the main board of
the indoor unit
Y
Y
End
Y
255
Troubleshooting Guide
(9) Flow chart for outdoor communitcation circuit detecting:
Start
Measure voltage at the
Test 10 position as
shown in the diagram
with a voltmeter
Value jumping
N
Y
Measure voltage at the
Test 15 position as
shown in the diagram
with a voltmeter
Y
Value jumping
N
Y
Fault with
outdoor unit
Measure voltage at the
Test 11 position as
shown in the diagram
with a voltmeter
Value jumping
End
N
Y
Measure voltage at the
Test 12 position as
shown in the diagram
with a voltmeter
N
Value jumping
Y
The communication
circuit of the outdoor
unit is normal
256
d
A
n
e
p
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
T
Apendix1: value of indoor/outdoor unit ambient sensor resistance
Temp.
Resistance
• ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
Temp.
Resistance
• • • • • • ˄N¡˅
Resistance
•
Temp.
Resistance
˄ć˅
• • • • • ˄N¡˅
Temp.
˄ć˅
• • ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
257
Troubleshooting Guide
Apendix 2: value of indoor/outdoor unit tube sensor resistance
Resistance
Temp.
˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
258
Temp. Resistance
• • • • • • ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
Resistance
Temp.
•
˄ć˅ • • ˄N¡˅
Temp.
˄ć˅
•Resistance
• • • • • • ˄N¡˅
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGH
Apendix 3: value of indoor/outdoor unit air exhaust sensor resistance
Temp.
Resistance
• ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
Temp.
Resistance
Resistance
˄N¡˅
•
Temp.
˄ć˅
Resistance
• • • ˄N¡˅
Temp.
˄ć˅
• • ˄N¡˅
˄ć˅
259
'LVDVVHPEO\
Disassembly
Indoor Unit
18K
Disconnect the unit from power supply before making any checks.
Be sure the power switch is set to “OFF”.
1.Disassemble the front panel
Open the front panel, slightly press the both sides of rotating axial
of the panel, to make the rotating axial out of groove, can take down
the front panel.
To push the filter forward, to make the both clasps loosen, can pull
out off the filter.
Screw off one screw from the top cover, can take down it.
Front panel
Filter
Top cover
2.Disassemble the air guide louver
To make the axis sleeve out of the middle of left air guide louver,
hold both sides of air guide louver, slightly press the middle part
then can disassemble the air guide louver.
Air guide board
Axis sleeve
3.Disassemble the front case
Screw off 7pcs screw from fixing front case, loosen the clasps of
rear side, lift it up, can disassemble the front case.
Screws
Clasps
260
Disassembly
4.Disassemble the electric box cover
Slightly press the electric box cover to make the clasps out
take down the ambient sensor, can take down the electrric box
cover.
Ambient temperature sensor
Electric box cover
Mainboard
5.Disassemble electric box
Screw off the screws fix the electrix box, screw off the earh screw,
pull out the tube sensor, pull out the air guide motor, the wiring terminal
of motor, screw off the screws fixing the displayer, can take down
the electric box.
Screws
Tube sensor
Screws
Earth screw
6.Disassemble the evaporator
Screw off the screws fixing the motor clamp and right side evaporator,
loosen the clasp from the motor clamp, can take down the motor clamp,
evaporator supporter.
Unscrew the scrws connect with the evaporator and motor clamp,
Motor clamp
take down the motor clamp.
Screws
Clasps
261
Disassembly
Screws
Screw
7.Disassemble the motor
Unscrew 1pc screw fixing the motor and cross flow fan,
then can take out the motor.
Cross flow fan
Screw
Motor
262
'LVDVVHPEO\
.
Disconnect the unit from power supply before making any checks.
Be sure the power switch is set to “OFF”.
1.Disassemble the front panel
Front panel
Open the front panel, slightly press the both sides of
rotating axial of the panel, to make the rotating axial
out of groove, can take down the front panel.
To push the filter forward, to make the both clasps
loosen, can pull out off the filter.
Screw off one screw from the top cover, can take down it.
Filter
Top cover
2.Disassemble the air guide louver
To make the axis sleeve out of the middle of left air guide
louver, hold both sides of air guide louver, slightly press
the middle part then can disassemble the air guide louver.
Air guide board
Axis sleeve
3.Disassemble the front case
Screw off 7pcs scrw from fixing front case, loosen the
clasps of rear side, lift it up, can disassemble the front case.
Screws
Clasps
263
Disassembly
4.Disassemble the electric box cover
Slightly press the electric box cover to make the clasps out
take down the ambient sensor, can take down the electric
box cover.
Ambient temperature sensor
Electric box cover
Mainboard
5.Disassemble the electric box
Screw off the screws fix the electric box, screw off
the earth screw, pull out the tube sensor, pull out
the air guide motor, the wiring terminal of motor,
screw off the screws fixing the displayer, can take
down the electric box.
Screws
Tube sensor
Earth screw
6.Disassemble the evaporator
Screw off screws fixing the motor clamp and right side evaporator,
loosen the calsp from the motor clamp, can take down the motor
clamp, evaporator supporter.
Unscrew the scres connect with the evaporator and motor clamp,
take down the motor clamp.
Motor clamp
Screws
264
Disassembly
Screws
Connection pipe clamp
Screws
7.Disassemble the motor
Unscrew 1pc screw fixing the motor and cross flow
fan, then can take out the motor.
Screws
Motor
Screw
Cross flow fan
265
'LVDVVHPEO\
outdoor Unit
6FUHZV
1.Disassemble top cover and handles
Screw off screws which fix the top cover, then lift it up,
can disassemble the top cover.
%LJ+DQGOH
Screw off the scres which fix the handle, lit it up,
can take down the handle.
2.Disassemble the rear grille
Screw off the screws which fix the rear grille, take down
the sensor, can take down the rear grille.
6FUHZ
Sensor
Screws
3.Front panel
Screw off the screws which fix the front panel, then
lift it up, loosen the right side clasp, then turn to left
and rotate it, can take down the front panel.
5HDU*ULOO
6FUHZV
266
Disassembly
4.Disassemble the right side plate
Unscrew the screws which fix the right side plate,
5LJKW6LGH3ODWH
then lift it up can take down the right side plate.
6FUHZV
Electric box cover
5.Disassemble the electric box
Disassemble the clasps on the electric box
cover, then can take down the electric box cover,
pull out the motor, compressor, sensor, reactor,
and capacitor wire terminal, then screws off
Screws
the earth screw and two pcs screw which fix
the electric box, then can take down the electric
box.
Wire terminal
Earth screw
Inductance
Capacitor
6.Disassemble the axial flow fan
Use the spanner to screw off tighten nuts which fix the
axial flow fan, then can take out the axial flow fan.
Axial flow fan
Screws
267
Disassembly
7.Disassemble the motor and motor supporter
Unscrew four pcs screws which fix the motor, then
can take down the motor. Unscrew the screws, which
fix the motor supporter, then take down the motor supporter.
Screws
Motor supporter
Screws
8.Disassemble the four-way valve
Use the wet cloth wrap four-way valve, unsoldered
the four pcs soldered spot on the four-way valve,
then can take down the four-way valve.
The solderprocessing should be as quickly as possible,
and the cloth should keep wet, please do not to damage
the wires.
Four-way valve
Note: Please discharge the refrigerant before maintenance.
Soldered spot
8.Disassemble the compressor
Take down the soundproof cotton on the compressor,
show up the compressor, then loosen three pcs bottom
nut on the compressor, then unscrew the earth srew on
compressor, then take down the compressor and air
discharge pipe.
Bottom nuts
268
Exploded View
Exploded View
Indoor Unit
Model: EVKC 18 DS
78
269
Exploded View
Model: EVKC 24 DS
79
270
Exploded View
Outdoor Unit
80
271
Replacement Parts List
Replacement Parts List
Parts List (Indoor)
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Description
Front Panel Case
Filter Sub-Assy
Front Case Sub-Assy
Screw Cover
Display Board
Evaporator Assy
Evaporator Support
Cross Flow Fan
O-Gasket of Cross Fan Bearing
Bearing cushion rubber base
Rear Case
Wall-Mounting Frame
Helicoid tongue
Air Louver
Axile Bush
Left Axile Bush
Guide Louver
Crankshaft
Stepping Motor
Air Louver
Drainage Pipe
Pipe Clamp
Motor
Motor Clamp
Lower Shield of Electric Box
Electric Box
Main PCB
Trans form er
Terminal Board
Electric Box Cover 1
Upper Shield of Electric Box
Electric Box Cover 2
Tube Sensor
Room Sensor
Remote Controller
Connecting Cable
Part Code
EVKC 18 DS
20012260
1112208901
20012288
24252016
30565038
1002575
24212100
10352019
76512203
26152022
22202109
1252218
26112177
10512116
10542008
10512037
10512115
10582070
15012086
10512117
05230014
26112164
15012113
26112178
1592069
20112078
30138061
43110237
4201026601
20122099
1592070
20112081
390000595
390000451
30510041
400204056
Qty
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOTE) *Please ensure GCSC since these parts may be changed depending upon the buyer's request.
81
272
Replacement Parts List
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Description
Wall-Mounting Frame
Rear Case Assy
Axile Bush
Crank
Cross Flow Fan
O-Gasket sub-assy of Bearing
O-Gasket of Cross Fan Bearing
Ring of Bearing
Helicoid tongue
Air Louver 1
Evaporator Assy
Evaporator Support
Drainage hose
Guide Louver
Axile Bush
Front Case
Screw Cover
Filter Sub-Assy
Front panel Assy
Front panel
Receiver Window
Receiver Board
Remote Controller
Electric Box Cover2
Motor Press Plate
Fan Motor
Terminal Board
Electric Box Cover 1
Shield cover of Electric Box
Electric Box Assy
Electric Box
Main Board
Jumper
Transformer
Rubber Plug (Water Tray)
Stepping Motor
Pipe Clamp
Connecting Cable
Part Code
EVKC 24 DS
1252004
22202117
10542008
10582070
10352030
76512051
76512203
26152025
26112187
10512159
01002269
24212103
0523001401
10512118
10542008
20012295
24252016
11122091
20012328
20012296S
22432173
30565038
30510041
20112081
26112184
15012098
4201026601
20122099
01592070
20202181
20112078
30138061
4202300101
43110237
76712012
15213001
26112188
400204056
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOTE) *Please ensure GCSC since these parts may be changed depending upon the buyer's request.
82
273
Replacement Parts List
Parts List (Outdoor)
No
1
Description
Axial Flow Fan
2
Fan Motor
3
Motor Support Sub-Assy
4
Electric box (fireproofing)
5
4-way Valve Fittings
6
4-way Valve Assy
7
Rear Grill
Part Code
Qty
EVJC 18 DS
EVJC 24 DS
10335008
10335008
1
1501506301
1501506301
1
01705013
01705013
1
01413148
01413148
1
4300040033
4300040033
1
03123151
03123245
1
01473043
3900028011
01473043
1
8
Temperature Sensor
3900028011
1
9
Condenser Assy
01113249
01113386
1
10
Electronic Expansion Valve
07133059
07133556
1
11
Electric expand valve fitting
4300876702
4300876702
1
12
Top Cover
01255005P
01255005P
1
13
Left Side Plate
01305041P
01305041P
1
14
Electric Box Assy
02603066
0260306601
1
15
Terminal Board
42010255
42010255
1
16
Magnetic Ring
49010109
49010109
1
17
Handle
26235254
26235254
1
18
Capacitor CBB61
33010010
33010010
1
19
Valve support assy
01715010P
01715010P
1
20
Cut-off valve Sub-Assy
07133060
07133060
1
21
Cut-off valve Sub-Assy
07133058
07133058
1
01305053P
1
0120371401P
1
22
Right Side Plate
23
Base Plate Sub-Assy
01305053P
01203714P
24
Drainage Connecter
06123401
06123401
1
25
Drainage Plug
06813401
06813401
3
26
Front Panel
01535005
01535005
1
27
Front grill
22415002
22415002
1
28
C o m p re s s o r
00103501
00103501
1
29
Reactor
43130021
43130021
1
30
Clapboard Sub-Assy
01232902
01232902
1
31
Capacitor CBB65
33000065
33000065
1
32
Connecting Cable
400205402
400205402
1
NOTE) *
83
274
Appendix
Appendix
Method of testing the system at a fixed frequency operation.
Compressor frequency shall be set by means of a combination of timing by the remote controller and set temperature, as shown in
following table.
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
1
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
29
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
Frequency (Hz)
Number of hours of timing stop is set by the
remote controller
Temperature is set by the remote controller
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Frequency (Hz)
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
ĂĂ
Caution:
i. In frequency set mode, the cooling state is set at temperature of 16 degree and the heating state is set at temperature of 30 degree.
ii. In frequency set mode, “Timing Stop Time” for frequency calculation is performed as per Code A of the remote controller, regardless
time standard.
iii. After the remote controller is set in terms of frequency corresponding to the above table, the sleep button shall be pushed continuously four times within 3s to enter test state, and push any button to quit the test state.
iv. For an indoor unit with double 8 display, frequency shall be set in terms of double 8 blinking display (on for 0.5s, off for 0.5s); and for
an indoor unit with indicator display, when one of different modes of test cooling, such as minimum, middle, nominal and maximum,
is set, a cooling indicator will fast blink (on for 0.25s, off for 0.25s). When one of different modes of test heating, such as minimum,
middle, nominal and maximum , is set, a heating indicator will fast blink (on for 0.25s, off for 0.25s).
v. According to the above table, frequency shall be set in such way as described in the following: ķĀ˄number of hours of stop as
set – 10˅*10” is taken as ten's place and hundred’s place of set frequency and only rounded number is taken as number of hours
84
275
Appendix
of timing stop, and in such case, 0.5 hour shall be negligible. For example, if stop time is set at 13.5 hours, for frequency, 13 will be
regarded as default; ĸ “set temperature -20” is taken as one’s place of set frequency; if temperature is set below 20 degree, one’s place
of frequency shall be zero at default.
vi.
For example: if timing stop is set at 15 hours and temperature is set at 21, corresponding set frequency will be ˄15-10˅×10+˄21-20
˅=50+1=51Hz; and if timing stop is set at 17.5 hours and temperature is set at 24, the 0.5 hour will be neglected and corresponding
set frequency will be ˄17-10˅×10+˄24-20˅=74Hz.
85
276
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Languages